Home

ABB ACS550-02 & ACS550-U2 Drives User`s Manual

1. 40 Panel P 1101 REF1 Panel REF 2 P1106 0 17 REF2 0 Panel REF2 300 PID Setpoint 20 21 500 19 4016 G40 Current 4 PID1 ower LOC REM selection Guerre sel P4014 P4015 f Torque PID Act Value EG Power 4 Panel REF 1 P1103 DI Cun e Al Speed P1105 Comm REF 1 EXT 2 Panel REF 2 4 1106 71 Const Al Speed Comm REF 2 P1106 Panel iv P4010 PID Setpoint doce P1107 AI2 P4012 775 P1108 4013 19 Comm Internal G40 Al P4016 PID1 Current PID1 Out Torque Power 1014 4015 Current P4017 PID Act Value Torque Power 4 Note In order to activate and use the PID controller parameter 1106 must be set to value 19 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 191 PID controller Advanced The ACS550 has two separate PID controllers Process PID PID1 and External PID PID2 Process PID PID1 has 2 separate sets of parameters Process PID PID1 SET1 defined in Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 and Process PID PID1 SET2 defined in Group 41 PROCE
2. 120 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Range Resolution Default User Group 22 ACCEL DECEL 2201 1 2 SEL 6 7 1 5 015 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 0 0 1800 0 s 0 15 5 05 2203 DECELER TIME 1 0 0 1800 0 s 0 15 5 05 2204 SHAPE 1 0 0 LINEAR 0 1 1000 0 s 0 15 0 05 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 0 0 1800 0 s 0 15 60 05 2206 DECELER TIME 2 0 0 1800 0 s 0 15 60 05 2207 2 0 0 LINEAR 0 1 1000 05 0 15 0 05 2208 DEC TIME 0 0 1800 0 s 0 15 1 05 2209 RAMP INPUT 0 6 7 1 0 NOT SEL Group 23 SPEED CONTROL 2301 PROP GAIN 0 00 200 00 0 01 10 00 2302 INTEGRATION TIME 0 00 600 00 s 0 01 s 2 505 2303 DERIVATION TIME 0 10000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 2304 COMPENSATION 0 00 600 00 s 0 01 s 0 00 s 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN OFF 1 ON 1 OFF Group 24 TORQUE CONTROL 2401 TORQ RAMP UP 0 00 120 00 s 0 01 s 0 00 s 2402 TORQ RAMP DOWN 0 00 120 00 s 0 01 s 0 00 s Group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL OFF 1 ON 1 OFF 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 0 rpm 0 0 Hz 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 0 rpm 0 0 Hz 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 0 rpm 0 0 Hz 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 H
3. 242 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual DCU profile CONTROL WORD See parameter 0301 Bit Name Value Command Req Comments 8 STPMODE EM 1 stop mode 0 no op 9 STPMODE_C 1 Coast stop mode 0 no op 10 RAMP 2 1 Ramp pair 2 0 Ramp pair 1 11 RAMP_OUT_0 1 Ramp output to 0 0 no op 12 RAMP_HOLD 1 Ramp freeze 0 no op 13 RAMP_IN_O 1 Ramp input to 0 0 no op 14 RREQ LOCALL 1 Local mode lock In lock drive will not switch to local mode 0 15 TORQLIM2 1 Torque limit pair 2 0 Torque limit pair 1 DCU profile CONTROL WORD See parameter 0302 Bit Name Value Function Comments 16 26 Reserved 27 REF_CONST 1 Constant speed ref These bits only for supervision 0 purposes 28 REF_AVE 1 Average speed ref 0 no op 29 LINK_ON 1 Master is detected in link 0 Link is down 30 REQ_STARTINH 1 Start inhibit request is pending 0 Start inhibit request is OFF 31 OFF_INTERLOCK 1 Panel OFF button For the control panel or PC tool this is pressed the OFF button interlock 0 no op Status Word The contents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual ABB Drives profile 243 The following tab
4. Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 41 Red M10 combi screws iw SS 69 Pedestal disconnected TTT Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 42 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Fixing the lead through plate to the floor 1 Make a hole in the floor or cable conduit cover below the lead through See section Dimension drawings on page 308 2 Check that the floor is horizontal with a spirit level 3 Fasten the lead through plate to the floor with screws or bolts You can also lead the cables through the plate first see steps Leading the power input and motor cables through the lead through plate on page 47 and Leading the control cables through the lead through plate on page 49 and fasten the plate to the floor after that if the cabling procedure is more convenient in that way Note These screws bolts are also used to fix the pedestal to the lead through plate so you will have to remove and refasten them later on when the pedestal is fixed Frame size R7 Frame size R8 Busbars connecting the power cable terminals Tepl to the drive module
5. 212 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description 8120 INTERLOCKS Defines operation of the Interlock function When the Interlock function is enabled e An interlock is active when its command signal is absent An interlock is inactive when its command signal is present The ACS550 will not start if a start command occurs when the speed regulated motor s interlock is active the control panel displays an alarm 2015 PFC LOCK Wire each Interlock circuit as follows e Wire a contact of the motor s On Off switch to the Interlock circuit the drive s PFC logic can then recognize that the motor is switched off and start the next available motor e Wire a contact of the motor thermal relay or other protective device in the motor circuit to the Interlock input the drive s PFC logic can then recognize that a motor fault is activated and stop the motor 0 NOT SEL Disables the Interlock function All digital inputs are available for other purposes Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 7 0 The Autochange function must be disabled if Interlock function is disabled 1 011 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with 011 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC the Autochange funct
6. Code Description 5050 Parameter upload was aborted 5051 File error was detected 5052 Parameter upload attempt has failed 5060 Parameter download was aborted 5062 Parameter download attempt has failed 5070 Panel backup memory write error was detected 5071 Panel backup memory read error was detected 5080 Operation is not allowed because the drive is not in local mode 5081 Operation is not allowed because a fault is active 5083 Operation is not allowed because parameter lock is not open 5084 Operation is not allowed because drive is busy try again 5085 Download is not allowed because drive types are incompatible 5086 Download is not allowed because drive models are incompatible 5087 Download is not allowed because parameter sets do not match 5088 Operation failed because a drive memory error was detected 5089 Download failed because a CRC error was detected 5090 Download failed because a data processing error was detected 5091 Operation failed because a parameter error was detected 5092 Download failed because parameter sets do not match Diagnostics Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Maintenance Safety 285 WARNING Read chapter Safety on page 5 before performing any maintenance on the equipment Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or
7. 132 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description 0136 COMM VALUE 2 Free data location that can be written from serial link 0137 PROCESS VAR 1 Process variable 1 Defined by parameters in Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY 0138 PROCESS VAR 2 Process variable 2 Defined by parameters in Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY 0139 PROCESS VAR 3 Process variable 3 Defined by parameters in Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY 0140 RUN TIME The drive s accumulated running time in thousands of hours kh Cannot be reset 0141 MWH COUNTER drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours Cannot be reset 0142 REVOLUTION CNTR motor s accumulated revolutions in millions of revolutions Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameters mode 0143 IDRIVE ON TIME drive s accumulated power on time in days Cannot be reset 0144 IDRIVE ON TIME LO The drive s accumulated power on time in 2 second ticks 30 ticks 60 seconds Shown in format hh mm ss Cannot be reset 0145 MOTOR TEMP Motor temperature in degrees Celsius PTC resistance in ohms Applies only if motor temperature sensor is set up See parameter 3501 0146 MECH ANGLE Defines the motor shaft s angular position to about 0 01 32 768 divisions for 360 The position is defined as 0 at power up During operation the zero position can be set by a Z pulse input i
8. 278 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Fault Fault name in 3 Rode panel Description and recommended corrective action 101 SYSTEM ERROR Error internal to the drive Contact your local ABB representative and report 199 the error number 201 SYSTEM ERROR Error in the system Contact your local ABB representative and report the 299 error number UNKNOWN Wrong type of panel i e panel that supports drive X but not the ACS550 DRIVE TYPE has been connected to the ACS550 ACS550 SUPPORTED DRIVES X Faults that indicate conflicts in the parameter settings are listed below Fault Fault name in z Rode panel Description and recommended corrective action 1000 PAR HZRPM Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following 2001 MINIMUM SPEED gt 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 2007 MINIMUM FREQ gt 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 2001 MINIMUM SPEED 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside proper range gt 50 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside proper range gt 50 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside proper range gt 50 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside proper range gt 50 1001 PAR PFC REF Parameter values are inconsistent Check for the following NEG 2007 MINIMUM FREQ is negative when 8123 PFC ENABLE is active 1002 RESERVED Not used 1003 PAR Al SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following
9. e rey NN These brackets can be removed for the duration of the Ve installation Floor fixing points pedestal and lead through plate fixing points Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 43 Removing the EMC screen from the pedestal frame size R7 only 1 Remove the EMC screen by undoing the five fastening screws Note The screen must be replaced when the cables have been connected Tightening torque of the fastening screws is 5 N m 3 7 Ibf ft Frame size R7 Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 44 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Disconnecting the EMC filter on IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems frame size R7 only WARNING If a drive with its EMC filter connected is installed on an IT system an N ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohm power system the system will be connected to earth potential through the EMC filter capacitors This may cause dan
10. 69 Control panels About control parnels duce m a RACER CU TA S AUR UR hs enh TATUR A 71 Compatibility rr 71 Assistant Control 72 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web Table of contents www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 10 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Basic Control Pariel utr tete e ede et ete ne ta e erts e re vea Uo de alae 92 Application macros ABB Staridard miacto m uei nsu enm ead ene fe alas 102 35wire macro cid ce ERN edie MN PEE AE vb Coley ns ARES 103 Alternatemacro s oo rss Bre corte eta herd Rah at he ieu Erste d atus ma OA m do ios tois Opes 104 Motor Potentiometer 105 dL sm ha pas Ce 106 PIB GontroltmRacro s n esce RR EROR S ete eruca mie NS deas 107 PEG MIO RERUM CURRERE ERES 108 Torque Control macro o de ha ana goa TR Iba iR a a a x RED C 109 Connection example of a two wire sensor 110 User parameter sets iori reri ori a Pa ih Dee eats 111 Macro default values for parameters 112 Parameters Complete parameter list
11. 6 12 1 0 NOT SEL 4229 OFFSET 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 4230 TRIM MODE NOT SEL 1 PROPORTIONAL 1 NOT SEL 3 DIRECT 4231 TRIM SCALE 100 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 4232 CORRECTION SRC 1 PID2REF 2 PID2OUTPUT 1 1 PID2REF Group 50 ENCODER 5001 PULSE NR 50 16384 1 1024 Y 5002 ENCODER ENABLE O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 DISABLE Y 5003 ENCODER FAULT 1 FAULT 2 ALARM 1 1 FAULT 5010 Z PLS ENABLE DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 DISABLE Y 5011 POSITION RESET O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 DISABLE Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE 5101 FBATYPE 0 NOT DEFINED 5102 FB PAR 2 26 0 65535 1 0 5126 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 126 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Range Resolution Default User 5127 PAR REFRESH DONE 1 REFRESH 1 DONE 5128 FILE CPI FW REV 0 0xFFFF hex 1 0 5129 FILE CONFIG ID 0 0xFFFF hex 1 0 5130 FILE CONFIG REV 0 0xFFFF hex 1 0 5131 FBA STATUS 0 6 1 IDLE 5132 FBACPIFW REV 0 0xFFFF hex 1 0 5133 APPL FW REV 0 0xFFFF hex 1 0 Group 52 PANEL COMM 5201 STATION ID 1 247 1 1 5202 BAUD RATE 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 115 2 kbits s 9 6 kbits s 5203 PARITY 8 NONE 1 1 8 NONE 2 1 8
12. O O O O O 13 DI3 4 5 INV Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI3 014 and 015 See above DI1 2 3 INV for code 14 DI4 5 6 INV Selects of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using 014 015 and DI6 e See above DI1 2 3 INV for code 1202 CONST SPEED 1 Sets value for Constant Speed 1 The range and units depend on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE Range 0 30000 rpm when 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ Range 0 500 Hz when 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ 1203 1208 CONST SPEED 2 CONST SPEED 7 Each sets a value for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above Constant Speed 7 is used also as jogging speed See parameter 1004 JOGGING SEL Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 144 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description 1209 TIMED MODE SEL Defines timed function activated constant speed mode Timed function can be used to change between external reference and a maximum of three constant speeds or to change between a maximum of 4 selectable speeds i e constant speeds 1 2 3 4 1 EXT CS1 2 3 Selects an external speed when no timed function is active selects Constant speed 1 when only Timed function 1 is active Selects Constant speed 2 when only Timed function 2 is active and selects Const
13. 3BFA01051905 C Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 298 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual NEMA Cable sizing is based on NEC Table 310 16 for copper wires 75 C 167 F wire insulation at 40 C 104 F ambient temperature Not more than three current carrying conductors in raceway or cable or earth directly buried For other conditions dimension the cables according to local safety regulations appropriate input voltage and the load current of the drive In any case the cable must be between the minimum limit defined in this table and the maximum limit defined by the terminal size see Cable entries on page 299 Copper cables with concentric copper shield Max load current Cable type A AWG kcmil 57 6 75 4 88 3 101 2 114 1 132 1 0 154 2 0 176 3 0 202 4 0 224 250 or 2 x 1 251 300 MCM or 2 x 1 0 273 350 MCM or 2 x 2 0 295 400 MCM or 2 x 2 0 334 500 MCM or 2 x 3 0 370 600 MCM or 2 x 4 0 or 3 x 1 0 405 700 MCM or 2 x 4 0 or 3 x 2 0 449 2 x 250 MCM or 3 x 2 0 502 2 x 300 MCM or 3 x 3 0 546 2 x 350 MCM or 3 x 4 0 590 2 x 400 or 3 x 4 0 669 2 x 500 MCM or 3 x 250 MCM 739 2 x 600 MCM or 3 x 300 MCM 810 2 x 700 MCM or 3 x 350 MCM 884 3 x 400 MCM or 4 x 250 MCM 1003 3 x 500 MCM or 4 x 300 MCM 1109 3 x 600 MCM or 4 x 400 MCM 1214 3 x 700 MCM
14. ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 125 Code Range Resolution Default User S 4122 SLEEP SELECTION 6 7 1 NOT SEL 4123 PID SLEEP LEVEL 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 0 rpm 0 0 Hz 4124 PID SLEEP DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 60 0 s 4125 WAKE UP DEV Unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 0 0 4107 4126 WAKE UP DELAY 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 s 0 50 s Group 42 EXT TRIM PID 4201 GAIN 0 1 100 0 0 1 1 0 4202 INTEGRATION TIME 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 3600 0 s 0 15 605 4203 DERIVATION TIME 0 0 10 0s 0 16 0 05 4204 PID DERIV FILTER 0 0 10 0 s 0 1s 1 0s 4205 ERROR VALUE INV 0 NO 1 YES 1 0 NO 4206 UNITS 0 127 1 4 96 4207 SCALE 0 4 1 1 4208 0 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4206 0 0 4207 4209 100 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 100 0 4207 4210 SET POINT SEL 0 2 8 17 19 20 1 1 11 Y 4211 INTERNAL SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 40 0 4207 4212 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 0 0 1 0 0 4213 SETPOINT 500 0 500 0 0 1 100 0 4214 5 1 13 1 1 1 4215 FBK MULTIPLIER 0 000 NOT SEL 32 768 32 767 0 001 0 000 NOT SEL 4216 1 INPUT 1 7 1 2 AI2 Y 4217 21 1 7 1 2 AI2 Y 4218 ACT1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4219 1 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4220 2 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4221 2 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4228
15. 2007 value is lt 0 Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency P 2008 A positive or zero minimum frequency value defines two ranges one positive and one negative e A negative minimum frequency value defines one speed range Frequency range allowed Time 0 gt See the figure Note Keep MINIMUM FREQ lt MAXIMUM FREQ 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ Proog Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency Freq 2007 value is gt 0 P 2008 Frequency range allowed P 2007 0 p lime P 2007 Frequency range allowed P 2008 2013 IMIN TORQUE SEL Defines control of the selection between two minimum torque limits 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 and 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 0 MIN TORQUE 1 Selects 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 as the minimum limit used 1 011 Defines digital input 011 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used Activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 2 value De activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 1 value 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used See 011 above 7 COMM Defines bit 15 of the Command Word 1 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is parameter 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input 011 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used Activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 1 value
16. 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Set time delay before acting on a communication loss Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Feedback from the drive EFB Pre defined feedback Inputs to the controller drive outputs have pre defined meanings established by the protocol This feedback does not require drive configuration The following table lists a sample of feedback data For a complete listing see input word point object listings in the technical data for the appropriate protocol starting on page 237 227 Dive paame Modbus protocol reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 0102 SPEED 40102 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 40103 0104 CURRENT 40104 0105 TORQUE 40105 0106 POWER 40106 0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE 40107 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 40109 0301 FB CMD WORD1 bit 0 STOP 40301 bit O 0301 FB CMD WoRD1 1 bit 2 REV 40301 bit 2 0118 DI 1 3 STATUS bit O DI3 40118 Note With Modbus any parameter can be accessed using the format 4 followed by the parameter number Actual value scaling The scaling of actual values can be protocol dependent In general for Actual Values scale the feedback integer using the parameter s resolution See section Complete parameter list on page 115 for parameter resolutions For example Feedback Parameter
17. 54 115 Complete parameter descriptions 128 Embedded fieldbus OVERVIEW acd uM 219 1 PI CET 220 Mechanical and electrical installation 220 Communication 221 Activate drive control functions 223 Feedback from the drive 227 Diagnostics EFB a a eu n be E Ee Oe eee eae ed Race 228 Modbus 231 ABB control profiles technical data 239 Fieldbus adapter GT R 251 Planning era RR Saa acu ced 253 Mechanical and electrical installation FBA 254 Communication set up 255 Activate drive control functions 255 Feedback from the drive FBA 2 09 lid wea ese ru Iu in 258 Diagnostics oue hata bt RADAR aaa UR Me QURE dA 259 ABB Drives
18. Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 128 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Complete parameter descriptions This section describes the actual signals and parameters for ACS550 Group 99 START UP DATA This group defines special start up data required to setup the drive enter motor information Code Description 9901 LANGUAGE Selects the display language There are two different Assistant Control Panels each supporting a different language set Panel ACS CP L supporting languages 0 2 11 15 has been integrated into ACS CP A Assistant Control Panel ACS CP A 0 ENGLISH 1 ENGLISH AM 2 DEUTSCH 3 ITALIANO 4 ESPANOL 5 PORTUGUES 6 NEDERLANDS 7 FRAN AIS 8 DANSK 9 SUOMI 10 SVENSKA 11 RUSSKI 12 POLSKI 13 T RK E 14 CZECH 15 MAGYAR Assistant Control Panel ACS CP D Asia 0 ENGLISH 1 CHINESE 2 KOREAN 3 JAPANESE 9902 APPLIC MACRO Selects an application macro Application macros automatically edit parameters to configure the ACS550 for a particular application 1 ABB STANDARD 2 3 WIRE 3 ALTERNATE 4 MOTOR POT 5 HAND AUTO 6 PID CONTROL 7 CONTROL 8 TORQUE CTRL USER 51 LOAD 1 USER S1 SAVE 2 USER S2LOAD 3 USER S2 SAVE 1 USER S1 SAVE 3 USER S2 SAVE With these it is possible to save two different user parameter sets into the drive permanent memory for later use Ea
19. att 311 Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals 311 Table of contents Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Task Identify the frame size of your drive R7 or R8 Plan the installation Check the ambient conditions ratings required cooling air flow input power connection compatibility of the motor motor connection and other technical data Select the cables Unpack and check the drive Check that all necessary optional modules and equipment are present and correct Only intact drive may be started up Check the installation site Check the insulation of the motor the motor cable 1 If the drive is about to be connected to an IT ungrounded system or corner grounded TN system check that the EMC filter in frame size R7 and the varistor in frame sizes R7 and R8 are disconnected Route the cables Install the drive Connect the power cables Connect the control and the auxiliary control cables Check the installation Commission the drive 13 Installation and commissioning flowchart See Technical data Ratings on page 293 vs application requirements Planning the electrical installation on page 15 Technical data on page 293 For compliance with th
20. Protective measures insulated bearing construction common mode filter CMF Non ABB motors random wound and form wound windings Insulation level Protective measures Py lt 100 kW 100 kW Py lt 350 kW Py gt 350 kW Standard U 1300 V 0 lt Uy lt 420V insulated N bearing insulated N bearing Standard U 1300 V 420 V lt lt 500 du dt du dt insulated N bearing Reinforced 0 2 V us 420 V lt Uy lt 500 V insulated N bearing The abbreviations used in the table are defined below Abbreviation Definition UN nominal voltage of the supply network peak line to line voltage at motor terminals which the motor insulation must withstand PN motor nominal power du dt du dt filter at the output of the drive or internal du dt limitation Contact ABB N N end bearing insulated motor non drive end bearing Common mode filter CMF is included in ACS550 02 U2 as standard Planning the electrical installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 18 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Supply connection Disconnecting device means Install a hand operated input disconnecting device between the AC power source MCC and the drive The disconnecting device must be of a type that can be locked to the open position for installation and maintenanc
21. The speed regulated motor when Autochange is not used 2016 RESERVED Not used 2017 2018 PID SLEEP This alarm warns that the PID sleep function is active which means Note 1 that the motor could accelerate when the PID sleep function ends To control PID sleep use parameters 4022 4026 or 4122 4126 2019 ID RUN Performing ID Run 2020 RESERVED Not used 2021 START ENABLE 1 This alarm warns that the Start Enable 1 signal is missing MISSING To control Start Enable 1 function use parameter 1608 To correct check Digital input configuration Communication settings 2022 START ENABLE 2 This alarm warns that the Start Enable 2 signal is missing MISSING Tocontrol Start Enable 2 function use parameter 1609 To correct check Digital input configuration Communication settings 2023 EMERGENCY Emergency stop activated STOP 2024 ENCODER ERROR The drive is not detecting a valid encoder signal Check for and correct Encoder presence and proper connection reverse wired loose connection or short circuit Voltage logic levels are outside of the specified range Aworking and properly connected Pulse Encoder Interface Module OTAC 01 Wrong value entered in parameter 5001 PULSE NR A wrong value will only be detected if the error is such that the calculated slip is greater than 4 times the rated slip of the motor Encoder is not being used but parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE 1 ENABLE
22. Parameters 1608 amp 1609 STARTED RELAY STATUS Group 14 Damper closed DAMPER STATUS Damper closing time RUN ENABLE SIGNAL from the damper end switch when the damper is fully opened Parameter 1601 MOTOR STATUS ati Drive coasts to stop Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 154 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description 1609 START ENABLE 2 Selects the source of the start enable 2 signal Note Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality SEL Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal 1 011 Defines digital input 011 as the start enable 2 signal This digital input must be activated for start enable 2 signal If the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2022 on the panel display The drive will not start until start enable 2 signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 2 signal See 011 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 2 signal Bit 3 of the Command word 2 parameter 0302 activates the start disable 2 signal See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the start enable 2 signal 2 6 DIZ INv DI6 INV
23. The ACS550 detects automatically which communication protocol is used by the plug in fieldbus adapter The default settings for each protocol assume that the profile used is the protocol s industry standard drive profile e g PROFldrive for PROFIBUS AC DC Drive for DeviceNet All of the FBA protocols can also be configured for the ABB Drives profile Configuration details depend on the protocol and profile used These details are provided in a user s manual supplied with the FBA module Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 252 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Details for the ABB Drives profile which apply for all protocols are provided in section ABB Drives profile technical data on page 262 Control interface In general the basic control interface between the fieldbus system and the drive consists of Output Words CONTROL WORD REFERENCE speed or frequency Others The drive supports a maximum of 15 output words Protocols limits may further restrict the total nput Words STATUS WORD Actual Value speed or frequency Others The drive supports a maximum of 15 input words Protocols limits may further restrict the total Note The words output and input are used as seen from the fieldbus controller point of view For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller to the drive and appears as
24. 3 ic Protocol Drive parameter Value Description 1002 ExT2 10 Start Stop by controlled fieldbus with COMMANDS Ext2 selected 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Direction controlled by fieldbus Input reference select Using the fieldbus to provide input reference to the drive requires drive parameter value set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied reference word s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 8 COMM Ref selected by fieldbus Required only if 2 references used 1103 REF1 SELECT 8 COMM Input reference 1supplied by fieldbus 9 COMM AI1 10 COMM AI1 1106 REF2 SELECT 8 COMM Input reference 2 supplied by fieldbus 9 COMM AI Required only if 2 references used 10 COMM AI Note Multiple references are supported only when using the ABB Drives profile Scaling Where required REFERENCES can be scaled See the following sections as appropriate Heference scaling on page 266 ABB Drives profile technical data Reference scaling on page 270 Generic profile technical data System control Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller command s in the appropriate loca
25. Es 5 S 0 Ce0 6 2 meen 2061 Li 9 A at SU 28 e poe lt m Qo lt T z PE PO Ox ad 4 2 ZENI l IX M 4 6 g 919 OC ot H oL aN gt 04 Sn g 092 9 CPSA Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 310 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Frame size R8 Lee zo 9661 Ba TOOT TTT 6 5 2 Es d E 5 S o god mjo 8 RIP E H in N Br Meu 3 P S 10 64 e 7002 lo o 7 D Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com
26. 00003 CONTROL Bit 2 OFF3 REVERSE OFF3 00004 CONTROL WORD Bit 3 START LOCAL START 00005 CONTROL WORD Bit 4 N A RESET RAMP OUT ZERO 00006 CONTROL WORD Bit 5 RAMP EXT2 RAMP 00007 CONTROL WORD Bit 6 RAMP IN ZERO RUN DISABLE RAMP IN ZERO 00008 CONTROL WORD Bit 7 RESET STPMODE R RESET 00009 CONTROL WORD Bit 8 N A STPMODE EM N A 00010 CONTROL WORD Bit 9 N A STPMODE C N A 00011 CONTROL WORD Bit 10 N A RAMP 2 REMOTE_CMD 00012 CONTROL WORD Bit 11 EXT2 RAMP OUT 0 EXT2 00013 CONTROL WORD Bit 12 N A RAMP HOLD N A 00014 CONTROL WORD Bit 13 N A RAMP IN 0 N A 00015 CONTROL WORD Bit 14 N A REQ LOCALLOCK N A 00016 CONTROL WORD Bit 15 N A TORQLIM2 N A 00017 CONTROL WORD Bit 16 Does not apply FBLOCAL CTL Does not apply 00018 CONTROL WORD Bit 17 FBLOCAL REF 00019 CONTROL WORD Bit 18 START DISABLE1 00020 CONTROL WORD Bit 19 START DISABLE2 00021 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 00032 00033 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1 00034 RELAY OUTPUT 2 Relay Output 2 Relay Output 2 Relay Output 2 00035 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Relay Output 3 Relay Output 3 Relay Output 3 00036 RELAY OUTPUT 4 Relay Output 4 Relay Output 4 Relay Output 4 00037 RELAY OUTPUT 5 Relay Output 5 Relay Output 5 Relay Output 5 00038 RELAY OUTPUT 6 Relay Output 6 Relay Output 6 Relay Output 6 Active low For the Oxxxx regis
27. 1301 MINIMUM AI1 gt 1302 MAXIMUM 11 1304 MINIMUM AI2 gt 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 1004 PARAOSCALE Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following 1504 MINIMUM AO1 gt 1505 MAXIMUM 1 1510 MINIMUM 2 gt 1511 MAXIMUM AO2 1005 PARPCU2 Parameter values for power control are inconsistent Improper motor nominal kVA or motor nominal power Check for the following 1 1 lt 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 1 73 3 0 where Py 1000 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are kW or Py 746 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units hp e g in US 1006 PAR EXT RO Parameter values are inconsistent Check for the following Extension relay module not connected and 1410 1412 RELAY OUTPUTS 4 6 have non zero values 1007 PAR FIELDBUS Parameter values are inconsistent Check for and correct MISSING A parameter is set for fieldbus control e g 1001 ExT1 COMMANDS 10 but 9802 COMM PROT SEL 0 1008 MODE Parameter values are inconsistent 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE must be SCALAR FREQ when 8123 PFC ENABLE is activated Diagnostics Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 279 Fault code Fault name in panel Description and recommended corrective action 1009 PAR PCU 1 Parameter values for power control are inconsistent Improper motor nominal frequency o
28. 20 Emergency stop devices 55 53 21 Selecting the power CableSv Pe e ney ente Pp qubd ae aca piod gd p do 21 Power factor compensation capacitors 23 Equipment connected to the motor cable 24 Selecting the control cables 2 2 Reg xe ha AERA eR ee ee RE Roe adag 26 Connection of a motor temperature sensor to the drive I O 27 FOULING Ane cables c i ae OK wed Akos BOLA cs d Een 27 Installation MOVING the nee heed a a ees ee aede Sen eR Bg 29 Before installation 2 59 Re RU haa 31 Checking the insulation of the installation 35 Power cable connection diagram 36 Installation procedure 37 Installation checklist gt ed quini DR REA ale aaa ae 59 Start up control with I O and ID Run How to start up drive 61 How to control the drive through the I O interface 68 How to perform the ID
29. 3419 JOUTPUT3 UNIT Selects the units used with the third display parameter See parameter 3405 3420 JOUTPUT3 MIN Sets the minimum value displayed for the third display parameter See parameter 3406 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 179 Code Description 3421 OUTPUT3 Sets the maximum value displayed for the third display parameter See parameter 3407 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 180 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS This group defines the detection and reporting for a particular potential fault motor overheating as detected by a temperature sensor Typical connections are shown below One sensor Three sensors a D n n AT id Motor f I Motor 5 AGND E AGND E m n ea T T T 2 X L1 aot JAGND y F 10 nF 19 amp A WARNING IEC 60664 requires double or reinforced insulation between live parts and the surface of accessible parts of electrical equipment which are either non conductive or conductive but not connected to the protective earth To fulfill this requirement connect a thermistor and other similar componen
30. 5550 User s Manual ACS550 02 Drives 132 355 kW ACS550 U2 Drives 250 550 hp EP ED I I Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 Drive Manuals GENERAL MANUALS MAINTENANCE MANUALS ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 132 355 kW 250 550 hp 3AFE64804626 English Safety Planning electrical installation Installation Start up control with I O and ID Run Control panels Application macros Parameters Embedded fieldbus Fieldbus adapter Diagnostics Maintenance Technical data ACS550 U2 Installation Supplement 3AUA0000004067 English OPTION MANUALS delivered with optional equipment OHDI 01 115 230 V Digital Input Module User s Manual 3AUA0000003101 English OREL 01 Relay Output Extension Module User s Manual 3AUA0000001935 English OTAC 01 User s Manual Pulse Encoder Interface Module User s Manual 3AUA0000001938 English RCAN 01 CANopen Adapter User s Manual 3AFE64504231 English 01 ControlNet Adapter User s Manual 3AFE64506005 English RDNA 01 DeviceNet Adapter User s Manual 3AFE64504223 English RETA 01 Ethernet Adapter User s Manual 3AFE64539736 English RETA 02 Ethernet Adapter User s Manual 3AFE68895383 English RLON 01 LonWorks Adapter Module User s Manual 3AFE64798693 English RPBA 01 PROFIBUS DP Adapter User s Manual 3AFE64504215 English Typical c
31. Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 2 signal See 011 INV above 1610 DISPLAY ALARMS Controls the visibility of the following alarms 2001 Overcurrent alarm e 2002 Overvoltage alarm 2003 Undervoltage alarm 2009 Device overtemperature alarm For more information see section Alarm listing on page 280 0 NO The above alarms are suppressed 1 YES All of the above alarms are enabled Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 155 Group 20 LIMITS This group defines minimum and maximum limits to follow in driving the motor speed frequency current torque etc Code Description 2001 MINIMUM SPEED Speed 2001 value is lt 0 Defines the minimum speed rpm allowed P 2002 A positive or zero minimum speed value defines two ranges one positive and one negative A negative minimum speed value defines one speed range Speed range allowed Time See the figure P 2001 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED Speed 2001 value is gt 0 Defines the maximum speed rpm allowed P 2002 Speed range allowed P 2001 0 Time P 2001 Speed range allowed P 2002 2003 CURRENT Defines the maximum output current A supplied by the drive to the motor 2005 JOVERVOLT CTRL Sets the DC overvoltage controller on or off Fast braking of a high
32. Do not use this option when fielbus communication provides the start stop and direction commands 8 COMM Defines the fieldbus as a fault reset source The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The bit 4 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 resets the drive 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a fault reset source De activating the digital input resets the drive 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as a fault reset source See DI1 INV above Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 152 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description 1605 USER PAR SET CHG Defines control for changing the user parameter set See parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO The drive must be stopped to change User Parameter Sets During a change the drive will not start Note Always save the User Parameter Set after changing any parameter settings or performing a motor identification Whenever the power is cycled or parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO is changed the drive loads the last settings saved Any unsaved changes to a user parameter set are lost Note The value of this parameter 1605 is not included in the User Parameter Sets and it does not change if User Parameter Sets change Note You can use a relay output to supervise the selection of User Parameter Set 2 See par
33. ti you through the task of specification of its parameter set as shown in steps 4 con nue with and 5 below The Start up Assistant then asks if you want to continue with the setup next assistant or skip it select the appropriate answer with keys and Lp 2 and press X3 If you choose to skip the Start up Assistant asks the EXI 00 00 OK same question about the next assistant and so on 4 To specify a new value press keys and amp w 7 LOC UPAR EDIT 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT EXIT 100 00 SAVE To ask for information on the requested parameter press 2 Scroll the 3 luem on the help text with keys and S w 2 Close the help by pressing e motor na mep ate 2 value must correspond to motor D Y connection EXIT 100 00 Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 82 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual the allowed range Setting the limits Step Action Display 5 To accept the new value and continue to the setting of the next parameter LOC EDIT SAVE press 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR To stop the assistant press e 00 00 SAVE The table below lists the tasks of the assistants and the relevant drive parameters Depending on the selection made in the Application task parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO the Start up Assistant d
34. 00577998 xls A Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 297 Cable types IEC The table below gives copper and aluminium cable types for different load currents Cable sizing is based on max 9 cables laid on a cable ladder side by side ambient temperature 30 C PVC insulation surface temperature 70 C EN 60204 1 and IEC 60364 5 52 2001 For other conditions size the cables according to local safety regulations appropriate input voltage and the load current of the drive In any case the cable must be between the minimum limit defined in this table and the maximum limit defined by the terminal size see Cable entries on page 299 Copper cables with Aluminium cables with concentric copper shield concentric copper shield Max load current Cable type Max load current Cable type A mm A mm 56 3x16 69 3x35 71 3x25 83 3x50 88 3x35 107 3x70 107 3x50 130 3x95 137 3x70 151 3 120 167 3 95 174 3 150 193 3 120 199 3 185 223 3 150 235 3x240 255 3 185 214 2 x 3x70 301 3x240 260 2 x 3x95 274 2 x 3x70 302 2 x 3x120 334 2 x 3x95 348 2 x 3x150 386 2 x 3x120 398 2 x 3x185 446 2 x 3x150 470 2 x 3x240 510 2 x 3x185 522 3 x 3x150 602 2 x 3x240 597 3 x 3x185 579 3 x 3x120 705 3 x 3x240 669 3 x 3x150 765 3 x 3x185 903 3 x 3x240
35. 2025 FIRST START Signals that a the drive is performing a First Start evaluation of motor characteristics This is normal the first time the motor is run after motor parameters are entered or changed See parameter 9910 ID RUN for a description of motor models 2026 RESERVED Not used Diagnostics Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 283 Alarm ee code Display Description 2027 USER LOAD This alarm warns that the condition defined by parameter 3701 USER CURVE LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than half of the time defined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 2028 START DELAY Shown during the Start delay See parameter 2113 START DELAY Note 1 Even when the relay output is configured to indicate alarm conditions e g parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 5 ALARM or 16 FLT ALARM this alarm is not indicated by a relay output Alarm codes Basic Control Panel The Basic Control Panel indicates control panel alarms with a code A5xxx The following table lists the alarm codes and descriptions Code Description 5001 Drive is not responding 5002 The communication profile is incompatible with the drive 5010 The parameter backup file is corrupted 5011 Drive is controlled from another source 5012 Rotation direction is locked 5013 Button is disabled because start is
36. Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 127 Code Range Resolution Default User S 8109 ISTART FREQ 1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 02 50 0 Hz U2 0 0 Hz 8110 START FREQ 2 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 02 50 0 Hz U2 0 0 Hz 8111 START FREQ 3 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 02 50 0 Hz U2 0 0 Hz 8112 LOW FREQ 1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 02 25 0 Hz U2 30 0 Hz 8113 Low FREQ 2 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 02 25 0 Hz U2 30 0 Hz 8114 Low FREQ 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 02 25 0 Hz U2 30 0 Hz 8115 AUX MOT START D 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 5 0s 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 3 0s 8117 OF AUX MOT 0 4 1 1 Y 8118 INTERV 0 1 TEST MODE 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1h 0 0 h NOT SEL Y 0 1 336 h 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL 0 0 100 096 0 196 50 8120 NTERLOCKS 0 6 1 4 014 Y 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL 0 NO 1 YES 1 0 NO 8122 PFC START DELAY 0 00 10 00 s 0 01 s 0 50 s 8123 PFC ENABLE O NOT SEL 1 ACTIVE 1 0 NOT SEL Y 8124 IN AUX STOP 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 1800 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s NOT SEL 8125 DEC IN AUX START 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 1800 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s NOT SEL 8126 AUTOCHNG 0 4 1 NOT SEL 8127 MOTORS 1 7 1 2 8128 AUX START ORDER 1 EVEN RUNTIME 2 RELAY ORDER 1 1 EVEN RUNTIME Y Group 98 OPTIONS 9802 COMM PROT SEL 0 NOT SEL 1 STD MODBUS 1 0 NOT SEL Y EXT
37. See parameter 0122 RELAY 1 STATUS RELAY 2 STATUS RELAY 3 STATUS 0124 AO 1 The analog output 1 value in milliamperes 0125 AO 2 The analog output 2 value in milliamperes 0126 PID 1 OUTPUT The PID controller 1 output value in 96 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT The PID controller 2 output value in 96 0128 PID 1 SETPNT The PID 1 controller setpoint signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0129 PID 2 SETPNT The PID 2 controller setpoint signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0130 PID 1 FBK The PID 1 controller feedback signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0131 PID 2 FBK The PID 2 controller feedback signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0132 PID 1 DEVIATION The difference between the PID 1 controller reference value and actual value Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0133 PID 2 DEVIATION The difference between the PID 2 controller reference value and actual value Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0134 COMM RO WORD Free data location that can be written from serial link Used for relay output control See parameter 1401 0135 COMM VALUE 1 Free data location that can be written from serial link Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com
38. Wider cable lugs may cause a short circuit 6 Connect the twisted shields of the cables to the PE terminal frame size R7 or to the grounding clamps or PE terminal frame size R8 Note 360 degrees grounding is not needed at the cable entry The short twisted shield provides in addition to the protective grounding also sufficient disturbance suppression Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 48 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Frame size R7 gt 41 14 4 5 bess RR _ PE A e V VU 1 Terminal U1 U2 V1 V2 W1 W2 A hole 1 mm in 159 6 3 262 10 3 365 14 4 A hole 2 mm in 115 4 5 218 8 5 321 12 6 PE terminal hole 1 3 4 5 6 B mm in 43 1 7 75 3 0 107 4 2 139 5 5 171 6 7 203 8 0 Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 49 Frame size 8 gt 22 1004 L zi P S EM 2 SURE ORE A lt LX e a V m cH cH _30 1 2 Terminal
39. s control panel shows fault code 28 SERIAL 1 ERR check for either of the following The master system is down To correct resolve problem with master system The communication connection is bad To correct check communication connection at the drive The time out selection for the drive is too short for the given installation The master is not polling the drive within the specified time out delay To correct increase the time set by parameter 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Faults 31 33 EFB1 EFB3 The three EFB fault codes listed for the drive in chapter Diagnostics on page 273 fault codes 31 33 are not used Intermittent off line occurrences The problems described above are the most common problems encountered with ACS550 serial communication Intermittent problems might also be caused by marginally loose connections wear wires caused by equipment vibrations insufficient grounding and shielding on both the devices and on the communication cables Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 231 Modbus protocol technical data Overview The Modbus protocol was introduced by Modicon Inc for use in control environments featuring Modicon programmable controllers Due to its ease of use and implementation this common PLC language was quickly adopted as a de facto standard for integration of a wide variet
40. 100 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual How to upload and download parameters For the upload and download functions available see above Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing X if you are in the Output mode LOC otherwise by pressing 7 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom MENU F WD 2 If the panel is not in the Copy mode CoPY not visible press key A 10 or CY until you see CoPY 0 MENU F WD Press X LOC d 1 MENU F WD panel step to uL with keys and amp w 7 MENU F WD Press 5 During the transfer the display shows the transfer status asa 10 U L D 0 F WD To perform downloads step to the appropriate operation here dL LOC d L Download All is used as an example with keys Cw MENU F WD Press During the transfer the display shows the transfer status asa 10 d L D P 0 percentage of completion F WD 3 To upload all parameters including user sets from the drive to the control 10 u L Basic Control Panel alarm codes In addition to the faults and alarms generated by the drive see chapter Diagnostics the Basic Control Panel indicates control panel alarms with a code of form A5xxx See section Alarm codes Basic Control Panel on page 283 for a list of the alarm codes and descriptions
41. 5 AI2 Not used 6 7 8 AGND Analog input circuit common AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA AO2 Output current 0 20 mA 7 19 AGND Analog output circuit common r 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 412 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start stop Activation starts the drive 14 DI2 Forward reverse Activation reverses rotation direction 15 DI3 Reference up Activation increases the reference 16 014 Reference down Activation decreases the reference 17 015 Constant speed 1 1202 18 016 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A Default operation 21 RO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable Note 1 For DI3 and DIA 23 RO2A Default operation 24 IRO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable f both are active or inactive the speed reference is unchanged The existing speed reference is 0 26 Default operation 27 RO3B Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 stored during stop or power down gt 25 connected to 26 Note 2 Settings of the ramp times with acceleration and deceleration time 2 parameters 2205 and 2206 Inp
42. 6 DI3U 4D Same as above DI3U 4D R except A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero The reference is stored When the drive restarts the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference 7 DI5U 6D Same as above DI3U 4D except that 015 and DI6 are the digital inputs used 8 COMM Defines the fieldbus as the reference source 9 COMM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 10 1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 11 DI3U 4D RNC Same as DI3U 4D R above except that Changing the control source 1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference 12 DI3U 4D NC Same as DI3U 4D above except that Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference 13 DIBU 6D NC Same as DI5U 6D above except that e Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT LOC to REM does not copy the reference 14 AI1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 15 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction bel
43. Aux Aux X X X X One additional relay output for the PFC that is in use One motor is in sleep when the other is rotating The table below shows the ACS550 motor assignments for some typical settings in the Relay Output parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 where the settings are either 31 PFC or X anything but 31 and where the Autochange function is enabled 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV value gt 0 Parameter setting ACS550 Relay assignment 1111111111 8 Autochange enabled 414141414411 ROI RO2 RO4 RO5 ROG 0 1 1 1 1 2 32 OR 31131 X X X X 1 PFC X X X X 31 31 31 X X X 2 PFC PFC X X X X 31 31 X X X 1 X PFC PFC X X X X X X 31 X 31 1 X X X PFC X PFC 31 31 X X X X 0 PFC X X X X No auxiliary motors but the autochange function is in use Working as a standard PID control 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV Controls operation of the Autochange function and sets the interval between changes The Autochange time interval only applies to the time when the speed regulated motor is running See parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL for an overview of the Autochange function e The drive always coasts to stop when autochange is performed Autochange enabled requires parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS value gt 0 0 1 TEST MODE Forces the interval to value 36 48 s 0
44. Connect multiple Stop push buttons in series Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FORWARD 4 DITP 2P 3 Three wire Start Stop Direction Start Stop commands are through momentary push buttons as described for DI1P 2P Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DI3 DI3 activated Reverse de activated Forward 5 DITP 2P 3P Start Forward Start Reverse and Stop Start and Direction commands are given simultaneously with two separate momentary push buttons the P stands for pulse Start Forward command is through a normally open push button connected to digital input 011 In order to start the drive the digital input DI3 must be activated prior to the pulse in DI1 Start Reverse command is through a normally open push button connected to digital input DI2 In order to start the drive the digital input DI3 must be activated during the pulse in DI2 Connect multiple Start push buttons in parallel Stop is through a normally closed push button connected to digital input DI3 Connect multiple Stop push buttons in series Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 6 DI6 Two wire Start Stop Start Stop is through digital input DI6 DI6 activated Start DI6 de activated Stop Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FORWARD 7 DI6 5 Two wire Start Stop Di
45. F WD Diagnostics Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 274 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual The message reappears after a few seconds if the control panel is not touched and the fault is still active Flashing green Alarms For less severe errors called alarms the diagnostic display is advisory For these situations the drive is simply reporting that it had detected something unusual In these situations the drive flashes the green LED on the drive does not apply to alarms that arise from control panel operation errors flashes the green LED on the control panel if attached to the drive sets an appropriate bit in an Alarm Word parameter 0308 or 0309 See Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS on page 134 for the bit definitions overrides the control panel display with the display LOC ALARM of an alarm code and or name in the Fault mode figures on the right ALARM 2008 Alarm messages disappear from the control panel display after a few seconds The message returns periodically as long as the alarm condition exists LOC 2 5 Correcting faults PANEL LOSS 00 00 F WD The recommended corrective action for faults is Use the table in section Fault listing below to find and address the root cause of the problem Resetthe drive See section Fault resetting on page 279 Fault listing The following table lis
46. MECHANICAL INSTALLATION The ambient operating conditions are allowed See nstallation on page 29 Technical data Ratings on page 293 Ambient conditions on page 303 The drive is fixed properly on the floor and a vertical non flammable wall See nsiallation on page 29 The cooling air will flow freely ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION See Planning the electrical installation on page 15 and Installation on page 29 The motor and the driven equipment are ready for start See Planning the electrical installation Checking the compatibility of the motoron page 15 Technical data Motor connection on page 300 EMC filter capacitors and varistor are disconnected if the drive is connected to an IT ungrounded or corner grounded TN system See Disconnecting the EMC filter on IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems frame size R7 only on page 44 Disconnecting the varistor on IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems frame size R7 on page 45 Disconnecting the varistor on IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems frame size R8 on page 46 The capacitors are reformed if stored over one year See Reforming on page 289 The drive is grounded properly The input power voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage The input power connections at U1 V1 and W1 and their tightening torques are OK Appropriate input power fuses and disconnector are installed The motor connections at U2 V2 and W2 and their tight
47. Mark Applicable standards EN 50178 1997 Electronic equipment for use in power installations C IEC EN 60204 1 2005 Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of machines Part 1 General requirements Provisions for compliance The final assembler of the machine is responsible for installing anemergency stop device asupply disconnecting device IEC EN 60529 2004 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures IP code IEC 60664 1 2002 Insulation coordination for equipment within low voltage systems Part 1 Principles requirements and tests IEC EN 61800 5 1 2003 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 5 1 Safety requirements Electrical thermal and energy IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC requirements and specific test methods Part 3 EMC requirements and specific test methods IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems UL 508C UL 15 LISTED UL Standard for Safety Power Conversion Equipment third edition Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 305 CE marking C A CE mark is attached to the drive to verify that the drive follows the provisions of the European Low Voltage and EMC Directives Directive 73 23 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC and Directive 89 33
48. Run enable signal present No faults exist Supply voltage is within range Emergency Stop command is not on 2 RUN Energize relay when the drive is running 3 FAULT 1 Energize relay when power is applied De energizes when a fault occurs 4 FAULT Energize relay when a fault is active 5 ALARM Energize relay when an alarm is active 6 REVERSED Energize relay when motor rotates in reverse direction 7 STARTED Energize relay when drive receives a start command even if Run Enable signal is not present De energized relay when drive receives a stop command or a fault occurs 8 SUPRV1 OVER Energize relay when first supervised parameter 3201 exceeds the limit 3203 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 174 9 SUPRV1 UNDER Energize relay when first supervised parameter 3201 drops below the limit 3202 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 174 10 SUPRV2 OVER Energize relay when second supervised parameter 3204 exceeds the limit 3206 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 174 11 SUPRV2 UNDER Energize relay when second supervised parameter 3204 drops below the limit 3205 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 174 12 SUPRV3 OVER Energize relay when third supervised parameter 3207 exceeds the limit 3209 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 174 13 SUPRV3 UNDER Energize relay when third supervised parameter 3207 dr
49. Securing the control cables mechanically Fasten the control cables together and to the drive frame with cable ties as shown in section Routing the control signal cables inside the cubicle on page 53 Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 58 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Settings of the cooling fan transformer The voltage transformer of the cooling fan is located at the top right hand corner of the drive Set to 220 V if the supply frequency is 60 Hz The voltage is set to 230 V 50 Hz at the factory Installation of optional modules The optional module fieldbus adapter relay output extension module is inserted in the optional module slot of the control board See the appropriate optional module manual for cable connections Cabling of I O and fieldbus modules Module Stripped cable 9 as short as possible Alternative to a Shield Grounding wire of the outer shield Strain relief with a cable tie Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 59 Installation checklist Check the mechanical and electrical installation of the drive before start up Go through the checklist below together with another person Read chapter Safety on page 5 before you work on the drive Check
50. Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 2 See parameter 2503 2506 CRIT SPEED 3 LO Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 3 See parameter 2502 2507 CRIT SPEED 3 Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 3 See parameter 2503 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 167 Group 26 MOTOR CONTROL This group defines variables used for motor control Code Description 2601 FLUX OPT ENABLE Changes the magnitude of the flux depending on the actual load Flux Optimization can reduce the total energy consumption and noise and it should be enabled for drives that usually operate below nominal load 0 Disables the feature 1 ON Enables the feature 2602 FLUX BRAKING Braking Provides faster deceleration by raising the level of torque Rated motor power magnetization in the motor when needed instead of 120 With flux braki 1 2 2 kW limiting the deceleration ramp By increasing the flux in flux braking 2 15 kW the motor the energy of the mechanical system is 3 37 kw changed to thermal energy in the motor 80 Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 VECTOR SPEED OR 2 VECTOR TORQ 0 oFF Disables the feature 1 ON Enables the feature 4 75 kW 2603 COMP VOLT IR compensation Sets th
51. Type MC continuous corrugated aluminum armor cable with symmetrical grounds or shielded power cable must be used for the motor cables if metallic conduit is not used For the North American market 600 V AC cable is accepted for up to 500 V AC For drives rated over 100 amperes the power cables must be rated for 75 C 167 F Conduit Where conduits must be coupled together bridge the joint with a ground conductor bonded to the conduit on each side of the joint Bond the conduits also to the drive enclosure Use separate conduits for input power motor and control wiring Do not run motor wiring from more than one drive in the same conduit Armored cable shielded power cable The motor cables can be run in the same cable tray as other 460 V power wiring Control and signal cables must not be run in the same tray as power cables Six conductor 3 phases and 3 ground type MC continuous corrugated aluminum armor cable with symmetrical grounds is available from the following suppliers trade names in parentheses Anixter Wire amp Cable Philsheath BICC General Corp Philsheath Rockbestos Co Gardex Oaknite CLX Shielded power cables are available from Belden Lapp Kabel OLFLEX and Pirelli Planning the electrical installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 23 Power factor compensation capacitors A Power factor compens
52. When enabled PFC control Switches in or out auxiliary constant speed motors as output demand increases or decreases Parameters 8109 START FREQ 1 to 8114 LOW FREQ 3 define the switch points in terms of the drive output frequency Adjusts the speed regulated motor output down as auxiliary motors are added and adjusts the speed regulated motor output up as auxiliary motors are taken off line Provides Interlock functions if enabled Requires 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ 0 NOT SEL Disables PFC control 1 ACTIVE Enables PFC control Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 217 Code Description 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP Sets the PFC acceleration time for a zero to maximum frequency ramp This PFC acceleration ramp Applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary motor is switched off Replaces the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECELI Applies only until the output of the regulated motor increases by an amount equal to the output of the switched off auxiliary motor Then the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies NOT SEL 0 1 1800 Activates this function using the value entered as the acceleration time 8125 IDEC IN AUX START Sets the PFC deceleration time for a maximum to zero A speed regulated motor a
53. X1 control board 10 24 V 11 Auxiliary voltage output non isolated 24 V DC 250 mA Note The sensor is supplied through its current output Thus the output signal must be 4 20 mA not 0 20 m A Application macros Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 111 User parameter sets In addition to the standard application macros it is possible to save two user parameter sets into the permanent memory and load them at a later time A user parameter set consists of the user parameter settings including Group 99 START UP DATA and the results of the motor identification The panel reference is also saved if the user parameter set is saved and loaded in local control The remote control setting is saved into the user parameter set but the local control setting is not The steps below show how to save and load User Parameter Set 1 The procedure for User Parameter Set 2 is identical only the parameter 9902 values are different To save User Parameter Set 1 Adjust the parameters Perform the motor identification if it is needed in the application but it is not done yet Save the parameter settings and the results of the motor identification to the permanent memory by changing parameter 9902 to 1 USER S1 SAVE MENU SAVE ENTER Press I Assistant Control Panel or Basic Control Panel
54. e g mode selected item parameter group or fault Operation You operate the control panel with menus and keys The keys include two context sensitive soft keys whose current function is indicated by the text shown in the display above each key You select an option e g operation mode or parameter by scrolling the and Cw arrow keys until the option is highlighted in reverse video and then pressing the relevant soft key With the right soft key you usually enter a mode accept an option or save the changes The left soft key is used to cancel the made changes and return to the previous operation level The Assistant Control Panel has nine panel modes Output Parameters Assistants Changed Parameters Fault Logger Time and Date Parameter Backup I O Settings and Fault The operation in the first eight modes is described in this chapter When a fault or alarm occurs the panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the fault or alarm You can reset it in the Output or Fault mode see chapter Diagnostics Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 74 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Initially the panel is in the Output mode where you can LOC wv 49 THz start stop change the direction switch between local and 49 1 Hz remote control modify the reference value and monitor up 0 5 A to three actual values To do other tasks go first to the 10 7 Main me
55. x integer resol tion Feedback integer Parameter resolution Scaled value 1 0 1 mA 1 0 1 mA 0 1 mA 10 0 196 10 0 196 196 Where parameters are in percent the Complete parameter descriptions section specifies what parameter corresponds to 10096 In such cases to convert from percent to engineering units multiply by the value of the parameter that defines 100 and divide by 100 Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 228 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual For example Feedback Parameter see uh Feedback integer Parameter resolution Of integer resolution defines 100 Value of 100 ref 100 Scaled value 10 0 1 1500 rpm 10 0 1 1500 RPM 100 15 rpm 100 0 196 500 Hz 100 0 1 500 Hz 100 50 Hz 1 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9908 MOT NOM SPEED as the 10096 reference and that 9908 1500 rpm 2 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9907 MOT NOM FREQ as the 10096 reference and that 9907 500 Hz Diagnostics EFB Fault queue for drive diagnostics For general ACS550 diagnostics information see chapter Diagnostics on page 273 The three most recent ACS550 faults are reported to the fieldbus as defined below Modbus protocol reference Drive parameter ABB DRV DCU
56. 0 SEL Disables the Autochange function 0 1 336 The operating time interval the time when the start signal is on between automatic motor changes WARNING When enabled the Autochange function requires the interlocks 8120 INTERLOCKS value gt 0 enabled During autochange the power output is interrupted and the drive coasts to stop preventing damage to the contacts ACS550 Relay logic PFC with Autochange mode Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 211 Code Description 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Sets an upper limit as a percent of output capacity for the autochange logic When the output from the PID PFC control block exceeds this limit autochange is prevented For example use this parameter to deny autochange when the Pump Fan system is operating near maximum capacity Autochange overview The purpose of the autochange operation is to equalize duty time between multiple motors used in a system At each autochange operation A different motor takes a turn connected to the ACS550 output the speed regulated motor The starting order of the other motors rotates The Autochange function requires External switchgear for changing the drive s output power connections Parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS value gt 0 Autochange is performed when The runni
57. 0 0 1 0128 PID 1 SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4006 4106 and 4007 4107 0129 PID 2 SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 4207 0130 PID 1 FBK Unit and scale defined by par 4006 4106 4007 4107 0131 PID 2 FBK Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 4207 0132 1 DEVIATION Unit and scale defined by par 4006 4106 and 4007 4107 0133 PID 2 DEVIATION Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 4207 0134 COMM RO WORD 0 65535 1 0 0135 COMM VALUE 1 32768 32767 1 0 0136 VALUE 2 32768 32767 1 0 0137 PROCESS VAR 1 1 0138 PROCESS VAR 2 1 0139 PROCESS VAR 1 0140 IRUN TIME 0 00 499 99 kh 0 01 kh 0 00 kh 0141 COUNTER 0 9999 MWh 1 MWh 0142 REVOLUTION CNTR 0 65535 Mrev 1 Mrev 0 0143 DRIVE ON TIME HI 0 65535 days 1 day 0 0144 DRIVE ON TIME LO 00 00 00 23 59 58 1722s 0 0145 MOTOR TEMP Par 3501 1 3 10 200 C 1 Par 3501 4 0 5000 ohm Par 3501 5 6 0 1 0146 MECH ANGLE 0 32768 1 0147 REVS 32768 32767 1 0148 Z PLS DETECTED O NOT DETECTED 1 DETECTED 1 DETECTED 0150 TEMP 20 0 150 0 C 1 0 C 0151 INPUT KWH 0 0 999 9 kWh 1 0 kWh 0152 INPUT MWH 0 9999 MWh 1 MWh 0158 COMM VALUE 1 32768 32767 1 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 32768 32767 1 Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 0301 WORD 1 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 0303 FBSTS WORD 1 0304 FBST
58. 0 50 100 Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 267 ABB Drives profile FBA Reference Value setting Al reference scaling REF1 1 COMM 96 Al 96 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus reference Acorrection coefficient 200 100 Alt input signal 100 0 5 par 1105 0 50 100 REF2 1 COMM 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus reference A correction coefficient 100 0 5 1108 1 100 HARS i AI1 input signal 100 0 5 par 1108 0 50 100 REF2 COMM AI1 COMM 96 Al 96 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus reference A correction coefficient 200 ee I 100 4 SCA l A input signal 0 gt 0 50 100 Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 268 Reference handling ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Use Group 10 START STOP DIR parameters to configure for control of rotation direction for each control location EXT1 and EXT2 The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce REFERENCE values REF1 and REF2 Note fieldbus references are bipolar that is they can be positive or negativ
59. 0 0 6553 5 MWh 0 0 disables 0 1 MWh 0 0 MWh 2908 UsER MWh 0 0 6553 5 MWh 0 1 MWh 0 0 MWh Group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS 3001 AISMIN FUNCTION 0 3 1 0 NOT SEL 3002 PANEL COMM ERR 1 3 1 1 FAULT 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 6 6 1 0 NOT SEL 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 6 6 1 0 NOT SEL 3005 THERM PROT 0 NOT SEL 1 FAULT 2 ALARM 1 1 FAULT 3006 MOT THERM TIME 256 9999 5 1 500 s 3007 LOAD CURVE 50 150 1 100 3008 SPEED LOAD 25 150 1 70 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ 1 250 Hz 1 35 Hz 3010 STALL FUNCTION O NOT SEL 1 FAULT 2 ALARM 1 NOT SEL 3011 5 FREQUENCY 0 5 50 Hz 0 1 Hz 20 Hz 3012 STALL TIME 10 400 s 1s 20s 3017 FAULT O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 ENABLE Y 3018 FAULT FUNC NOT SEL 1 FAULT 2 CONST SP 7 1 0 NOT SEL 3 LAST SPEED 3019 FAULT TIME 0 60 05 0 15 3 05 3021 11 FAULT LIMIT 0 100 0 1 0 3022 12 FAULT LIMIT 0 100 0 1 0 3023 WIRING FAULT DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 ENABLE Y 3024 TEMP FAULT O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 ENABLE Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS 0 5 1 0 3102 TRIAL TIME 1 0 600 0 s 0 15 305 3103 DELAY TIME 0 0 120 05 0 15 05 3104 OVERCURRENT 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 DISABLE 3105 AR OVERVOLTAGE O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 DISABLE 3106 AR UNDERVOLTAGE DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 DISABLE 3107 lt DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1
60. 0 3 Ibf ft torque for both frame sizes Control connections To complete the control connections use Cable recommendations in section Power factor compensation capacitors on page 23 Table Hardware description on page 55 ABB Standard macro on page 102 Complete parameter descriptions on page 128 Embedded fieldbus Mechanical and electrical installation EFB on page 220 Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 55 X1 Hardware description 1 SCR Terminal for signal cable screen Connected internally to chassis ground 2 AM Analog input channel 1 programmable Default frequency reference Resolution 0 1 accuracy 1 J1 Al1 OFF 0 10 V Rj 312 2 or J1 Al1 ON 0 20 mA 100 Sp o 318g AGND Analog input circuit common Connected internally to chassis gnd through 1 10V 10V 10 mA reference voltage output for analog input potentiometer 1 10 kohm accuracy 2 gt 5 Al2 Analog input channel 2 programmable Default not used Resolution 0 1 accuracy 1 c J1 Al1 OFF 0 10 V Rj 312k0 2 or 9 J1 Al1 ON 0 20 mA 100 or 09 6 AG
61. 01 OPERATING DATA 0101 SPEED amp DIR 30000 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0102 SPEED 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0104 CURRENT 0 0 2 0 long 0 1A 0105 TORQUE 200 0 200 096 0 196 0106 POWER 2 0 2 0 Phd 0 1 kW 0107 DCBUS VOLTAGE 0 2 5 1V 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0 2 0 1V 0110 DRIVE TEMP 0 0 150 0 C 0 1 C 0111 REF 1 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 0 1 Hz 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 0 0 100 0 0 0 600 0 for torque 0 196 0113 CTRL LOCATION LOCAL 1 EXT1 2 EXT2 1 0114 TIME R 0 9999 h 1h Oh 0115 COUNTER 0 9999 kWh 1 kWh 0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT 0 0 100 0 0 0 600 0 for torque 0 196 0118 Di 1 3 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0119 4 6 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0120 A1 0 0 100 096 0 196 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 116 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Range Resolution Default User 0121 2 0 0 100 096 0 196 0122 Ro 1 3 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0123 4 6 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0124 01 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 0125 02 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 0126 1 OUTPUT 1000 0 1000 096 0 196 0127 PID2 OUTPUT 100 0 100
62. 159 1 103 parameter 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 1502 O1 CONTENT MIN Defined by par 0103 1503 1 CONTENT MAX Defined by par 0103 1504 MINIMUM AO1 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 0 0 mA 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 20 0 mA 1506 FILTER AO1 0 0 10 0 s 0 1s 0 15 1507 2 CONTENT SEL 99 159 1 104 parameter 0104 CURRENT 1508 2 CONTENT MIN Defined by par 0104 1509 2 CONTENT MAX Defined by par 0104 1510 MINIMUM 2 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 0 0 mA 1511 MAXIMUM 2 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 20 0 mA 1512 FILTER 2 0 0 10 0 s 0 15 0 15 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 119 Code Range Resolution Default User S Group 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS 1601 RUN ENABLE 6 7 1 0 NOT SEL Y 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 0 LOCKED 1 OPEN 2 NOT SAVED 1 1 OPEN 1603 55 CODE 0 65535 1 0 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 6 8 1 KEYPAD 1605 USER PAR SET CHG 6 6 1 0 NOT SEL 1606 LOCAL LOCK 6 8 1 NOT SEL 1607 SAVE DONE 1 SAVE 1 DONE 1608 START ENABLE 1 6 7 1 0 NOT SEL Y 1609 START ENABLE 2 6 7 1 0 NOT SEL Y 1610 DISPLAY ALARMS 0 NO 1 YES 1 0 NO Group 20 LIMITS 2001 MINIMUM SPEED 30000 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0 rpm Y 2002 M
63. 2 programmable connection example of a two wire 23 RO2A Default operation sensor is shown on page 770 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable 26 RO3A Default operation 27 ROS3B Fault 1 2225 connected to 27 Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Two analog references 11 2 Analog output AO1 Speed J1 Start stop and direction DI1 2 Speed torque control DI3 Constant speed selection 014 Relay output 2 Running or Ramp pair 1 2 selection DI5 Runenable DI6 Analog output AO2 Current Sp 0 10 V Relay output 1 Ready 9 y AI2 0 4 20 mA Relay output 3 Fault 1 J1 o 11 0 10 V v 107 2 0 4 20 mA Application macros Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 110 Connection example of a two wire sensor ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Many applications use process PI D and need a feedback signal from the process The feedback signal is typically connected to analog input 2 AI2 The macro wiring diagrams in this chapter show the connection when a separately powered sensor is used The figure below gives an example of a connection using a two wire sensor X1 control board 6 AGND Process actual value measurement 0 4 20 mA Rin 100 ohm
64. 2 and 4 selected in the timer 28 3 4 Booster and Time Periods 3 and 4 selected in the timer 29 1 3 4 Booster and Time Periods 1 and 4 selected in the timer 30 2 3 4 Booster and Time Periods 2 3 and 4 selected in the timer 31 1 2 3 4 Booster and Time Periods 1 2 3 and 4 selected in the timer 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC See parameter 3626 3628 TIMED FUNC 3 SRC See parameter 3626 3629 TIMED FUNC 4 SRC See parameter 3626 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 187 Group 37 USER LOAD CURVE This group defines supervision of user adjustable load curves motor torque as a function of frequency The curve is defined by five points Code Description 3701 05 LOAD MODE Motor torque Supervision mode for the user adjustable load A Sees Overload area This functionality replaces the former underload supervision in Group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS To P3706 P3709 emulate it see section Correspondence with the P3712 3048 obsolete underload supervision on page 188 P3714 P3717 0 NOT SEL Supervision is not active 1 UNDERLOAD Supervision for the torque dropping below the underload curve 2 OVERLOAD Supervision for the torque exceeding the overload curve P3705 3 BOTH Supervision for
65. 2s 00 00 00 3608 START DAY 2 1 7 1 1 MONDAY 3609 STOPDAY2 1527 1 1 MONDAY 3610 ISTART TIME 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3611 STOP TIME 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3612 START DAY 3 14 4 1 1 MONDAY 3613 sroP DAY quy 1 1 MONDAY 3614 ISTART TIME 4 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3615 sTOP TIME 4 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3616 START DAY 4 1 7 1 1 MONDAY 3617 sTOP DAY 4 1 7 1 1 MONDAY 3622 BOOSTER SEL 6 6 1 0 NOT SEL 3623 TIME 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 4 SRC 0 31 1 NOT SEL 3629 Group 37 USER LOAD CURVE 3701 USER LOAD C MODE 0 3 1 0 NOT SEL 3702 USER LOAD C FUNC 1 FAULT 2 ALARM 1 1 FAULT 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 10 400 s 1s 20s 3704 LOAD FREQ 1 0 500 Hz 1Hz 5 Hz 3705 TORQ LOW 1 0 60096 196 1096 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 0 60096 196 300 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 0 500 Hz 1 Hz 25 Hz 3708 LOAD TORQ LOW 2 0 600 1 15 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 0 600 1 300 3710 LoAD FREQ 0 500 Hz 1 Hz 43 Hz 3711 TORQ Low 0 600 1 25 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 0 600 1 300 3713 FREQ 4 0 500 Hz 1 Hz 50 Hz 3714 TORQ Low 4 0 600 1 30 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 0 600 1 300 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 0 500 Hz 1 Hz 500 Hz 3717 LoAD TORQ Low 5 0 600 1 30 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 0 600 1 300 Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 4001 0 1 100 0 0 1 1 0 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 360
66. 4 To show the help text press SI Scroll the help text with keys and LOC Check Comm li nes m and connections Ok parameter 3 j After reading the help press 5 to return to the previous display T rameters in groups 0 and 11 EXIT 100 00 OK Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 86 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Time and Date mode In the Time and Date mode you can show or hide the clock change date and time display formats set the date and time enable or disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control The Assistant Control Panel contains a battery to ensure the function of the clock when the panel is not powered by the drive How to show or hide the clock change display formats set the date and time and enable or disable clock transitions due to daylight saving changes Step Action Display 1 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are the Output mode otherwise LOC UMAIN MENU DADAN by pressing repeatedly until you get to the Main menu CHANGED PAR EXIT 100 00 ENTER 2 Go to the Time and Date mode by selecting TIME amp DATE on the menu with i 1 ENTER keys and SY 7 and pressing wh ME FORMAT DATE FORMAT SET TI ME SET DATE EXI
67. 7 and pressing ST 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNAL 04 FAULT HISTORY 10 START STOP DIR 11 REFERENCE SELECT EXIT 100 00 SEL 3 Select the appropriate parameter group with keys and LOC UPAR GROUPS 99 PRISE STD ys CA 5545 99 START UP DATA 01 OPERATING DATA 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 04 FAULT HISTORY 10 START STOP DIR EXIT 00 00 SEL Press LOC CP ARS MET 4 Select the appropriate parameter with keys and SY 7 The current value of the parameter is shown below the selected parameter STANDARD 4 MOTOR RL MOD 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT EXIT 100 00 EDIT Press lt LOC OPAR EDIT ABB STANDARD 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 5 Specify a new value for the parameter with keys a and Cw LOC EDIT Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value Holding the key 9902 APPLIC MACRO down changes the value faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the R E displayed value with the default value 2 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 6 To save the new value press wl sd CANCEL To cancel the new value and keep the original press CZ Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 80 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual How to select the monitored signals Step Action Display 1 You can select which signals are monitored in the Output mode and how they LOC UPAR EDIT ar
68. 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Application macros 114 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Application macros Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Parameters Complete parameter list The following table lists all parameters Table header abbreviations are S Parameters can be modified only when the drive is stopped User Space to enter desired parameter values 115 Some values depend on the construction as indicated in the table by O2 or U2 Refer to the type code on the drive for example ACS550 02 245A 4 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S Group 99 START UP DATA 9901 LANGUAGE 0 15 0 3 1 O ENGLISH 9902 MACRO 3 8 1 1 ABB STANDARD Y 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 VECTOR SPEED 2 VECTOR TORQUE 1 3 SCALAR FREQ Y 3 SCALAR FREQ 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 02 200 600 V 1V 02 400 V v U2 230 690 V U2 460 V 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 0 2 long 2 0 gt long 0 1A 1 0 long 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 10 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 02 50 0 Hz Y U2 60 0 Hz 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 50 30000 rpm 1 rpm Size dependent Y 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER 0 2 3 0 Pha 02 0 1 kW 1 0 Y U2 0 1 hp 9910 RUN O OFF IDMAGN 1 ON 1 OFF IDMAGN Y Group
69. A B A B Hole 1 Hole 2 Hole 3 Hole 1 Hole 2 Hole 3 mm mm mm mm in in in in Frame size R8 U1 432 387 342 40 17 0 15 2 13 5 1 6 V1 148 5 8 W1 264 10 4 U2 284 239 194 40 11 2 9 4 7 6 1 6 V2 148 5 8 W2 264 10 4 PE terminal hole 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 C mm in 24 0 9 56 2 2 88 3 5 120 4 7 152 6 0 184 7 2 216 8 5 248 9 8 280 11 0 Leading the control cables through the lead through plate 1 Cut holes in the grommets to fit them tightly onto the control cables 2 Lead the control cables through the lead through plate and slide the grommets onto the cables Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 50 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Connecting the cable lugs to the pedestal 1 If the lead through plate is fixed to the floor undo the fixing screws 2 Place the pedestal onto the lead through plate 3 Fasten the pedestal and the lead through plate to the floor with the screws through the same holes 4 Connect the cable lugs to the pedestal U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 and PE 5 Tighten the connections 6 Frame size R7 Fasten the EMC screen between the input and motor cables as shown in the figure on page 43 Frame size R7 Frame sizes R7 and R8 M12 1 2 in bolt Tightening torque 50 75 N m 37 55 Ibf ft WARNING It is not allowed to connect the cables directly to the drive module terminals T
70. ABS 2 5 mm color NCS 1502 Y RAL 90021 PMS 420 C Hot dip zinc coated steel sheet 1 5 2 mm thickness of coating 100 micrometers Extruded aluminum AISi Package Plywood box drives and option modules expanded polystyrene Plastic covering of the package PE LD bands PP or steel Disposal The drive contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve energy and natural resources The package materials are environmentally compatible and recyclable All metal parts can be recycled The plastic parts can either be recycled or burned under controlled circumstances according to local regulations Most recyclable parts are marked with recycling marks If recycling is not feasible all parts excluding electrolytic capacitors and printed circuit boards can be landfilled Plywood box has to be burned in high temperature The DC capacitors contain electrolyte and the printed circuit boards contain lead both of which are classified as hazardous waste within the EU They must be removed and handled according to local regulations For further information on environmental aspects and more detailed recycling instructions please contact your local ABB representative Applicable standards Drive compliance with the following standards is identified by the standard marks on the type code label The compliance with the European Low Voltage Directive is verified according to standards EN 50178 and EN 60204 1
71. ACS550 02 and 60 Hz NEMA compliance ACS550 U2 ACS550 02 z elel S P Pg Parameter a 3 85 8 5 8 se Ig e g c lt jaj Fe A 9902 APPLIC MACRO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 1001 1 COMMANDS 2 4 9 2 2 1 1 2 1002 2 COMMANDS 0 0 0 0 7 6 6 2 1003 DIRECTION 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 0 0 0 0 3 2 3 3 1103 REF1 SELECT 1 1 1 12 1 1 1 1 1106 REF2 SELECT 2 2 2 2 2 19 19 2 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 9 10 9 5 0 9 0 4 1304 MINIMUM AI2 0 0 0 0 20 20 20 20 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 3 3 3 3 3 31 3 1501 1 CONTENT SEL 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 102 1503 1 CONTENT MAX 50 50 50 50 50 50 52 50 1507 2 CONTENT SEL 104 104 104 104 104 104 130 104 1510 MINIMUM AO2 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 1601 RUN ENABLE 0 0 6 6 4 5 2 6 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 50 50 50 50 50 50 52 50 2201 1 2 SEL 5 0 5 0 0 0 0 5 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 102 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 102 4001 10 10 10 10 10 10 25 10 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 60 60 60 60 60 60 3 60 4101 GAIN 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 5 1 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60 60 60 60 60 60 3 60 8123 ENABLE 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Application macros Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773
72. COMM START ENABLE 1 MISSING The control panel displays the word in hex For example all zeros and a 1 in 5 11055 START ENABLE 2 MISSING Bit displays as 0001 All zeros and a 6 Al2LOSS EMERGENCY STOP 1 in Bit 5 8000 7 PANELLOSS ENCODER ERROR 0309 112 8 DEVICE OVERTEMP FIRST START 9 MOTOR TEMP Reserved 10 Reserved USER LOAD CURVE 11 MOTOR STALL START DELAY 12 AUTORESET Reserved 13 AUTOCHANGE Reserved 14 PFCILOCK Reserved 15 Reserved Reserved Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 136 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Group 04 FAULT HISTORY This group stores a recent history of the faults reported by the drive Code Description 0401 LAST FAULT 0 Clear the fault history on panel NO RECORD n Fault code of the last recorded fault The fault code is displayed as a name See section Fault listing on page 274 for the fault codes and names The fault name shown for this parameter may be shorter than the corresponding name in the fault listing which shows the names as they are shown in the fault display 0402 FAULT TIME 1 day on which the last fault occurred Either as e A date if real time clock is operating e The number of days after power on if real time clock is not used or was not set 0403 FAULT TIME 2 Th
73. CW Bit3 1 and gt SW Bit12 1 OPERATION C D ENABLED EIDEM A CW Bit5 0 CW Xxxxx x1xx xxx1 1111 gt i e Bit 4 1 KEY RFG OUTPUT State D ENABLED State change Tu B lt CW Bit6 0 Path described in example x1xx xx11 1111 CW CONTROL WORD gt Len BIt S1 SW STATUS WORD RFG ACCELERATOR RFG Ramp Function Generator ENABLED Param 0104 CURRENT lt f Param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ CW xxxx x1xx x111 1111 n Speed i e Bit 6 1 Indicates the features not in ABB DRV LIM OPERATING SW Bit8 1 This state transition also occurs if the fault is reset from any other source e g digital input D lt Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 248 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Reference scaling ABB Drives and DCU profiles The following table describes REFERENCE scaling for the ABB Drives and DCU profiles ABB Drives and DCU profiles Reference Range Scaling Remarks REF1 32767 Speed 20000 par 1105 Final reference limited by ane frequency 0 0 1104 1105 Actual motor 32767 20000 par 1105 speed limited by 2001 2002 20000 corresponds to 100 speed or 2007 2008 frequency REF2 32767 Speed 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by jug frequency 0 0 1107 1108 Actual motor 32767 10000 par 1108 speed limited by 2001 2002 10000 corresponds to 100 speed
74. Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 101 Application macros Macros change a group of parameters to new predefined values Use macros to minimize the need for manual editing of parameters Selecting a macro sets all other parameters to their default values except Group 99 START UP DATA parameters except parameter 9904 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 1607 PARAM SAVE 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME 9802 COMM PROT SEL Group 50 ENCODER Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG parameters After selecting a macro you can make additional parameter changes manually with the control panel You enable application macros by setting the value for parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO By default 1 ABB STANDARD is the enabled macro The following sections describe each of the application macros and provide a connection example for each macro The last section in this chapter Macro default values for parameters lists the parameters that the macros change and the default values established by each macro Application macros Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 102 ABB Standard macro ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual This is the default macro It provides a general purpose 2 wire I O configuration with three 3 constant speeds Parameter values are t
75. DISABLE 3108 AR EXTERNAL FLT O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 DISABLE Group 32 SUPERVISION 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 100 NOT SELECTED 101 159 1 103 parameter 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO 0 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI 0 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM 100 NOT SELECTED 101 159 1 104 parameter 0104 CURRENT 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM LO 0 3206 SUPERV 2 LIM HI 0 3207 SUPERV PARAM 100 NOT SELECTED 101 159 1 105 parameter 0105 TORQUE 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO 0 3209 SUPERV 3 LIM HI 0 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 122 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Range Resolution Default User S Group 33 INFORMATION 3301 FIRMWARE 0000 FFFF hex 1 Firmware version 3302 LOADING PACKAGE 0000 FFFF hex 1 0 3303 TEST DATE yy ww 1 0 3304 DRIVE RATING 3305 PARAMETER TABLE 0000 FFFF hex 1 Par table version Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 100 NOT SELECTED 101 159 1 103 parameter 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN 1 3403 SIGNAL1 MAX 1 3404 OUTPUT DSP FORM 0 9 1 9 DIRECT 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT 0 127 1 3406 1 MIN 1 3407 OUTPUT1 1 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM 100 NOT SELECTED 101 159 1 104 parameter 0104 CURRENT 3409 SIGN
76. De activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 2 value 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used See DI1 INV above 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL Defines control of the selection between two maximum torque limits 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 and 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 0 MAX TORQUE 1 Selects 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 as the maximum limit used 1 011 Defines digital input 011 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used Activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 2 value De activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 1 value 2 6 7 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used See 011 above 7 COMM Defines bit 15 of the Command Word 1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is parameter 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input di1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used Activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 1 value De activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 2 value 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used See DI1 INV above 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 Sets the first minimum limit for torque 96 Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 Sets th
77. EXT2 selected External control location 1 1 selected 12 EXT RUN ENABLE External Run Enable signal received Oj Oo No External Run Enable signal received 15 13 Unused Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 244 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual DCU profile The following tables describe the STATUS WORD content for the DCU profile DCU profile STATUS WORD See parameter 0303 Bit Name Value Status 0 READY 1 Drive is ready to receive start command 0 Drive is not ready 1 ENABLED 1 External run enable signal received 0 No external run enable signal received 2 STARTED 1 Drive has received start command 0 Drive has not received start command 3 RUNNING 1 Drive is modulating 0 Drive is not modulating 4 ZERO SPEED 1 Drive is at zero speed 0 Drive has not reached zero speed 5 ACCELERATE 1 Drive is accelerating 0 Drive is not accelerating 6 DECELERATE 1 Drive is decelerating 0 Drive is not decelerating 7 AT_SETPOINT 1 Drive is at setpoint 0 Drive has not reached setpoint 8 LIMIT 1 Operation is limited Reference cannot be followed 0 Operation is not limited 9 SUPERVISION 1 A supervised parameter Group 32 SUPERVISION is outside its limits 0 All supervised parameter
78. Fault code reserved for the embedded fieldbus EFB protocol application 32 EEB 2 The meaning is protocol dependent 33 EFB 3 34 MOTOR PHASE Fault in the motor circuit One of the motor phases is lost Check for and correct Motor fault Motor cable fault Thermal relay fault if used Internal fault 35 OUTP WIRING Possible power wiring error detected When the drive is not running it monitors for an improper connection between the drive input power and the drive output Check for and correct Proper input wiring line voltage is NOT connected to drive output The fault can be erroneously declared if the input power is a delta grounded system and motor cable capacitance is large This fault can be disabled using parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT 36 INCOMPATIBLE The drive cannot use the software Sw Internal fault The loaded software is not compatible with the drive Call support representative 37 CB OVERTEMP Drive control board is overheated The fault trip limit is 88 Check for and correct Excessive ambient temperature Fan failure Obstructions in the air flow Not for drives with an OMIO control board 38 USER LOAD Condition defined by parameter 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid CURVE longer than the time defined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME Diagnostics Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com
79. Main menu by pressing Rif you are the Output mode otherwise LOC UMAIN MENU 1 by pressing e repeatedly until you get to the Main menu PARAN R EXIT 100 00 ENTER 2 Go to the Par Backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with keys LOC UPAR BACKUP 1 ENTER UPLOAD TO PANEL C A and lt 2 and pressing Ew BACKUP INFO DOWNLOAD FULL SET DOWNLOAD APPLI CATI ON DOWNLOAD USER 5 EXIT 100 00 SEL 3 Select BACKUP INFO on the Par Backup menu with keys and CY 7 LOC and press ees The display shows the following information about the drive DARE 60 RE where the backup was made VE RATING i DRIVE TYPE type of the drive 3301 FIRMWARE DRIVE RATING rating of the drive in format XXXYZ where EXIT 100 00 XXX nominal current rating If present an A indicates Eu d NF0 a decimal point e g 4A6 means 4 6 A Y 2 2 200V esr Mele RATING 4 400 V 3301 FIRMWARE 6 600 V 300F hex 7 EXIT 100 00 27 i European loading package n US loading package FIRMWARE firmware version of the drive You can scroll the information with keys and Cw 4 Press to return to the Par Backup menu TE BACKUP INFO DOWNLOAD FULL SET DOWNLOAD APPLI CATI ON DOWNLOAD USER 5 EXIT 100 00 SEL Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Settings mode In the I O Settings m
80. Max ref Fieldbus 163 100 Resultant ref reference Max ref 100 163 Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 251 Fieldbus adapter Overview The ACS550 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard serial communication protocols When using serial communication the ACS550 can either receive all of its control information from the fieldbus or be controlled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available control locations such as digital or analog inputs and the control panel Fieldbus controller Fieldbus Other devices Connect using either standard embedded fieldbus EFB at terminals X1 28 32 fieldbus adapter module mounted in slot 2 option Rxxx Two basic serial communications configurations are available embedded fieldbus EFB See chapter Embedded fieldbus on page 219 fieldbus adapter FBA With one of the optional FBA modules in the drive s expansion slot 2 the drive can communicate to a control system using one of the following protocols PROFIBUS DP LonWorks Ethernet Modbus TCP Ethernet IP CANopen DeviceNet ControlNet
81. NOM CURR P 9905 Defines the nominal motor current Must equal the value on the motor rating plate Range allowed 0 2 2 0 ong where hpg is drive current Output 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ frequency Defines the nominal motor frequency P 9907 e Range 10 500 Hz typically 50 or 60 Hz Sets the frequency at which output voltage equals the MOTOR NOM VOLT Field weakening point Nom Freq Supply Volt Mot Nom Volt 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED Defines the nominal motor speed Must equal the value on the motor rating plate 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER Defines the nominal motor power Must equal the value on the motor rating plate 9910 ID RUN This parameter controls a self calibration process called the Motor ID Run During this process the drive operates the motor motor rotating and makes measurements in order to identify motor characteristics and create a model used for internal calculations An ID Run is especially effective when e vector control mode is used parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ and or operation point is near zero speed and or operation requires a torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback i e without a pulse encoder OFF IDMAGN The Motor ID Run process is not run Identification magnetization is performed depending on parameter 9904 and 2101 settings In id
82. NONE 1 2 8 EVEN 1 3 8 ODD 1 5204 MESSAGES 0 65535 1 5205 PARITY ERRORS 0 65535 1 5206 FRAME ERRORS 0 65535 1 5207 BUFFER OVERRUNS 0 65535 1 5208 CRC ERRORS 0 65535 1 Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID 0 0xFFFF 1 0 5302 EFB STATION ID 0 65535 1 1 5303 EFB BAUD RATE 1 2 2 4 4 8 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 76 8 9 6 kbits s kbits s 5304 EFB PARITY 8 NONE 1 1 8 NONE 2 8 NONE 1 2 8 EVEN 1 3 8 ODD 1 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE ABB DRV LIM 1 DCU PROFILE 1 ABB DRV LIM 2 ABB DRV FULL 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES 0 65535 1 0 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS 0 65535 1 0 5308 UART ERRORS 0 65535 1 0 5309 EFB STATUS 0 7 1 IDLE 5310 PAR 10 0 65535 1 NOT SEL 5311 PAR 11 0 65535 1 NOT SEL 5312 PAR 12 0 65535 1 NOT SEL 5313 EFB PAR 13 0 65535 1 NOT SEL 5314 PAR 14 0 65535 1 NOT SEL 5315 PAR 15 0 65535 1 NOT SEL 5316 PAR 16 0 65535 1 NOT SEL 5317 PAR 17 0 65535 1 0 NOT SEL 5318 EFB PAR 18 0 65535 1 0 5319 PAR 19 0 hex 1 0 5320 PAR 20 0 hex 1 0 Group 81 PFC CONTROL 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 0 0 100 096 0 196 0 096 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com
83. Output mode LOC otherwise by pressing 777 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom MENU F WD 2 If the panel is not in the Parameter mode not visible press key LOC A or Kw 2 until you see PAr and then press W The display shows the number of one of the parameter groups MENU FWD LOC 0 1 F WD 3 Use keys and CY to find the desired parameter group LOC F WD 4 Press W The display shows one of the parameters in the selected LOC group PAR F WD 5 Use keys and Cy 2 to find the desired parameter LOC 1 1 3 F WD 6 Press and hold 5 for about two seconds until the display shows the LOC value of the parameter with underneath indicating that changing of the value is now possible PAR F WO Note When is visible pressing keys and Cw 7 simultaneously changes the displayed value to the default value of the parameter T Use keys and amp w 2 to select the parameter value When you have 10 changed the parameter value starts flashing PAR ERAN F WD save the displayed parameter value press LOC 1 1 3 cancel the new value and keep the original press Z PAR F WD Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 98 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual How to select the monitored signals Step Action Display 1 You can select which signals are monitored in the Output mode and
84. PROFILE 0401 LAST FAULT 40401 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 40412 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 40413 Serial communication diagnostics Network problems can be caused by multiple sources Some of these sources are e e e e e loose connections incorrect wiring including swapped wires bad grounding duplicate station numbers incorrect setup of drives or other devices on the network The major diagnostic features for fault tracing on an EFB network include Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters 5306 5309 Section Complete parameter descriptions on page 128 describes these parameters in detail Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 229 Diagnostic situations The sub sections below describe various diagnostic situations the problem symptoms and corrective actions Normal operation During normal network operation 5306 5309 parameter values act as follows at each drive 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES advances advances for each message properly received and addressed to this drive 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS does not advance at all advances when an invalid message CRC is received 5308 EFB UART ERRORS does not advance at all advances when character format errors are detected such as parity or framing errors 5309 EFB STATUS value varies depending on network traffic Loss of communication The
85. Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 151 Group 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS This group defines a variety of system level locks resets and enables Code Description 1601 RUN ENABLE Selects the source of the run enable signal 0 NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external run enable signal 1 011 Defines digital input DI1 as the run enable signal This digital input must be activated for run enable If the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the run enable signal See DI1 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the run enable signal Bit 6 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 activates the run disable signal See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the run enable signal This digital input must be de activated for run enable If this digital input activates the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable signal resumes 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the run enable signal See DI1 INV above 1602 PARAMETER LOCK Determines if the control panel can change parameter values This lock does n
86. See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM LO Sets the low limit for the second supervised parameter See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above 3206 SUPERV 2 LIM HI Sets the high limit for the second supervised parameter See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 175 Code Description 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM Selects the third supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO Sets the low limit for the third supervised parameter See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above 3209 SUPERV 3 LIM HI Sets the high limit for the third supervised parameter See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 176 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Group 33 INFORMATION This group provides access to information about the drive s current programs versions and test date Code Description 3301 FIRMWARE Contains the version of the drive s firmware 3302 LOADING PACKAGE Contains the version of the loading package 3303 TEST DATE Contains the test date yy ww 3304 IDRIVE RATING Indicates the drive s current and voltage rating The format is XXXY where XXX The nominal current rating of the drive in amperes If present an A indicates a decim
87. TIME 4 Defines timer 4 daily stop time See parameter 3603 3616 START DAY 4 Defines timer 4 weekly start day See parameter 3604 3617 STOP DAY 4 Defines timer 4 weekly stop day See parameter 3605 3622 BOOSTER SEL Selects the source for the booster signal NOT SEL Booster signal is disabled 1 011 Defines 011 as the booster signal 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines DI2 DI6 as the booster signal 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the booster signal 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the booster signal 3623 BOOSTER TIME Defines the booster ON time Time is started when booster sel signal is released If parameter value is 01 30 00 booster is Booster active active for 1 hour and 30 minutes after activation is released Activation DI Booster time 8 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC Defines the time periods used by the timer 0 NOT SEL No time periods have been selected 1 T1 Time Period 1 selected in the timer 2 T2 Time Period 2 selected in the timer 3 1 2 Time Periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer 4 T3 Time Period 3 selected in the timer 5 1 3 Time Periods 1 and 3 selected in the timer 6 T2 T3 Time Periods 2 and 3 selected in the timer 7 1 2 3 Time Periods 1 2 and 3 selected in the timer 8 T4 Time
88. The ACS550 can be configured to automatically reset certain faults Refer to parameter Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET WARNING If an external source for start command is selected and it is active the ACS550 may start immediately after fault reset Flashing red LED To reset the drive for faults indicated by a flashing red LED Turn the power off for 5 minutes Hed LED To reset the drive for faults indicated by a red LED on not flashing correct the problem and do one of the following Press RESET from the control panel Turn the power off for 5 minutes Depending on the value of 1604 FAULT RESET SEL the following could also be used to reset the drive Diagnostics Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 280 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual digital input serial communication When the fault has been corrected the motor can be started History For reference the last three fault codes are stored into parameters 0401 0412 0413 For the most recent fault identified by parameter 0401 the drive stores additional data in parameters 0402 0411 to aid in troubleshooting a problem For example parameter 0404 stores the motor speed at the time of the fault The Assistant Control Panel provides additional information about the fault history See section Fault Logger mode on page 85 for more information To clear the fault history all of the Group 04 FAULT
89. To load User Parameter Set 1 Change parameter 9902 to 0 USER S1 LOAD MENU SAVE ENTER Ww Press 7 Assistant Control Panel or Basic Control Panel to load The user parameter set can also be switched through digital inputs see parameter 1605 Note Loading the user parameter set restores the parameter settings including Group 99 START UP DATA and the results of the motor identification Check that the settings correspond to the motor used Hint The user can for example switch the drive between two motors without having to adjust the motor parameters and to repeat the motor identification every time the motor is changed The user needs only to adjust the settings and perform the motor identification once for each motor and then to save the data as two user parameter sets When the motor is changed only the corresponding user parameter set needs to be loaded and the drive is ready to operate Application macros Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 112 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Macro default values for parameters Parameter default values are listed in section Complete parameter list on page 115 Changing from the default macro ABB Standard that is editing the value of parameter 9902 changes the parameter default values as defined in the following tables Note There are two sets of values because the defaults are configured for 50 Hz IEC compliance
90. Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 113 ACS550 U2 v S 9 5 a 2 9 Parameter 8 8 E E 1265 8 8 52 45 2 4 2 iL FO E 9902 APPLIC MACRO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9904 CTRL MODE 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 2 4 9 2 2 1 1 2 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 0 0 0 0 7 6 6 2 1003 DIRECTION 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 0 0 0 0 3 2 3 3 1103 REF1 SELECT 1 1 1 12 1 1 1 1 1106 REF2 SELECT 2 2 2 2 2 19 19 2 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 9 10 9 5 0 9 0 4 1304 AI2 0 0 0 0 20 20 20 20 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 1403 OUTPUT 3 3 3 3 3 3 31 3 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 102 1503 1 CONTENT MAX 60 60 60 60 60 60 62 60 1507 2 CONTENT SEL 104 104 104 104 104 104 130 104 1510 MINIMUM 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 1601 RUN ENABLE 0 0 6 6 4 5 2 6 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 60 60 60 60 60 60 62 60 2201 1 2 SEL 5 0 5 0 0 0 0 5 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 102 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 102 4001 10 10 10 10 10 10 25 10 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 60 60 60 60 60 60 3 60 4101 GAIN 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 5 1 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60 60 60 60 60 60 3 60 8123 ENABLE 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Phone 800
91. Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS 149 This group defines the drive s analog current signal outputs The drive s analog outputs can be any parameter in Group 01 OPERATING DATA limited to programmable minimum and maximum values of output current scaled and or inverted by defining the minimum and maximum values of the source parameter or content Defining an maximum value parameter 1503 or 1509 that is less than the content minimum value parameter 1502 or 1508 results in an inverted output filtered Code Description 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL Defines the content for analog output AO1 99 EXCITE Provides a current source for sensor type Output 1 6 mA See Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS 100 ExciTE PT100 Provides a current source for sensor type PT100 Output 9 1 mA See Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS 101 159 Output corresponds to a parameter in Group 01 OPERATING DATA Parameter defined by value value 102 parameter 0102 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN Sets the minimum content value Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501 Minimum value refers to the minimum content value that will be converted to an analog output These parameters content and current min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the output See the figure 1503 1 CONTE
92. Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 37 Installation procedure Choose the mounting orientation a b or c a b Lifted from above MES p I Symbols required free space mw air inlet surface X wall fixing point recommended Note The drive can also be installed away control panel mounting slot from the wall Frame Mounting Required free space around the drive for mounting maintenance service and cooling size orientation Front Side Above mm in mm in mm in R7 a 500 20 200 7 9 b 500 20 200 7 9 200 7 9 lifting space lifting space R8 a 600 24 300 12 b 600 24 300 12 300 12 lifting space lifting space space for the installer not included space for fan and capacitor replacement not included Preparing the mounting location on concrete floor Bare concrete floor where cables come through openings made on the floor below the drive The floor or floor material of the installation place should not be flammable 1 Lift the drive against the wall into the mounting place 2 Mark the locations for the two fixing points in the wall Mark the bottom edges of the drive to the floor Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 38 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Preparing t
93. ZERO SPEED LOAD Sets the maximum allowable current at zero speed Value is relative to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR P 3008 50 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ Frequency Sets the break point frequency for the motor load curve gt P 3009 Example Thermal protection trip times when parameters 3006 MOT THERM TIME 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE and 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD have default values A lolh A p 1 ON 3 0 60s 254 lo Output current 905 IN Nominal motor current 20 4 fo Output frequency 180 s fgnk Break point frequency 1 5 4 300 s A Trip time 600 s 0 5 4 fol fark 0 r 1 r 0 0 2 04 06 08 10 12 3010 STALL FUNCTION This parameter defines the operation of the Stall function This protection is active if the drive operates in the stall region see the figure for the time defined by 3012 STALL TIME The User Limit is defined in Group 20 LIMITS by 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 2018 MAX TORQUE i 2 or the limit on the COMM input Torque 0 SEL Stall protection is not used Current 1 FAULT When the drive operates in the stall region for the time set by 3012 STALL TIME Stall region The drive coasts to stop 95 A fault indication is displayed U 2 ALARM When the drive operates in the stall region for the time set by 3012 STALL TIME n An alarm indication is displayed The alarm disappears when the drive is out of the stall region for half the time set by parameter 3012 STALL TIME f 3011 ST
94. a defined limit Use Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS to define the relay and whether the relay activates when the signal is too low or too high Code Description 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM Selects the first supervised parameter e Must be a parameter number from Group 01 OPERATING DATA 100 NOT SELECTED No parameter selected e 101 159 Selects parameter 0101 0159 Ifthe supervised parameter passes a limit a relay output is energized The supervision limits are defined in this group The relay outputs are defined in Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS definition also specifies which supervision limit is monitored LO HI Operating data supervision using relay outputs when LOxHI Case A Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 OVER or SUPRV2 OVER Use for monitoring when if the supervised signal exceeds a given limit The relay remains active until the supervised value drops below the low limit Case B Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 UNDER or SUPRV2 UNDER Use for monitoring when if the supervised signal falls below a given limit The relay remains active until the supervised value rises above the high limit LO gt HI Operating data supervision using relay outputs when LO gt HI The lowest limit Hi 3203 is active initially and remains active until the supervised parameter goes above the highest limit LO 3202 makin
95. a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation or an ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start up ID Run is essential only in applications that require the ultimate in motor control accuracy POWER UP Apply input power REM 7 The Basic Control Panel powers up into the Output mode OUTPUT FWD The Assistant Control Panel asks if you want to run the Start ee p up Assistant If you press z the Start up Assistant is not use t he start up run and you can continue with manual start up in a similar assistant manner as described below for the Basic Control Panel m X EXIT 100 00 OK MANUAL ENTRY OF START UP DATA Group 99 START UP DATA If you have an Assistant Control Panel select the language PAR EDIT the Basic Control Panel does not support languages See 9901 LANGUAGE parameter 9901 for the values of the available language ENGLISH alternatives You find parameter descriptions in section 0 CANCEL 100 00 SAVE Complete parameter descriptions starting on page 128 The general parameter setting procedure is described below for the Basic Control Panel You find more detailed instructions for the Basic Control Panel on page 97 Instructions for the Assistant Control Panel are on page 79 The general parameter setting procedure REM F F 1 To go to the Main menu press X 7 if the bottom line shows OUTPUT oth
96. actual signal or drive speed oscillates constantly It may be necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation Reduce GAIN 4001 until the oscillation stops Set GAIN 4001 to 0 4 to 0 6 times the above value e Decrease the INTEGRATION TIME 4002 until the feedback signal or drive speed oscillates constantly It may be necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation Increase INTEGRATION TIME 4002 until the oscillation stops Set INTEGRATION TIME 4002 to 1 15 to 1 5 times the above value If the feedback signal contains high frequency noise increase the value of parameter 1303 FILTER AI1 or 1306 FILTER AI2 until the noise is filtered from the signal Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 192 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description 4002 INTEGRATION TIME Defines the PID controller s integration time R Integration time is by definition the time required to increase the Pme output by the error value D P 4001 10 Error value is constant and 100 e Gain 1 C P 4001 1 Integration time of 1 second denotes that a 10096 change is achieved in 1 second 0 0 SEL Disables integration 1 of controller po 0 1 3600 0 Integration time seconds 4002 gt See 4001 for adjus
97. an input from the drive point of view The meanings of the controller interface words are not restricted by the ACS550 However the profile used may set particular meanings Fieldbus controller Fieldbus Control Word CW p References Process cyclic Status Word SW S Actual Values Service Parameter R W Requests Responses amp gt Li Acyclic A Control Word The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The fieldbus controller sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive The drive switches between states according to the bit coded instructions in the CONTROL WORD Using the CONTROL WORD requires that The drive is in remote REM control Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 253 The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling commands from EXT1 set using parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS and 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL The external plug in fieldbus adapter is activated Parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL 4 EXT The external plug in fieldbus adapter is configured to use the drive profile mode or drive profile objects The content of the CONTROL WORD depends on the protocol profile used See the user s manual provided with the FBA module and or se
98. as the source for controlling commands set using parameters such as 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 1002 ExT2 COMMANDS and 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL The serial communication channel used is configured to use an ABB control profile For example to use the control profile ABB DRV FULL requires both parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL 1 STD MODBUS and parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 2 ABB DRV FULL Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 240 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual ABB Drives profile The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives profile ABB Drives profile CONTROL WORD See parameter 5319 Commanded Name Value state Comments 0 OFF1 1 READY TO OPERATE Enter READY TO OPERATE CONTROL n 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive ramps to stop according to currently active deceleration ramp 2203 or 2205 Normal command sequence Enter OFF1 ACTIVE Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks OFF2 OFF3 are active 1 OFF2 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF2 inactive CONTROL 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive coasts to stop Normal command sequence Enter OFF2 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED 2 OFF3 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF3 inactive CONTROL NETT 7 0 EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within time specified by parameter 2208 Normal
99. channel 28 REQ REF2 1 Reference 2 requested in this channel 0 Reference 2 is not requested in this channel 29 REQ_REF2EXT 1 External PID reference 2 requested in this channel 0 External PID reference 2 is not requested in this channel 30 ACK_STARTINH 1 A start inhibit from this channel is granted 0 A start inhibit from this channel is not granted 31 ACK_OFF_ILCK 1 Start inhibit due to OFF button 0 Normal operation Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 246 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual State diagram ABB Drives profile To illustrate the operation of the state diagram the following example ABB DRV LIM implementation of the ABB Drives profile uses the control word to start the drive First the requirements for using the CONTROL WORD must be met See above When the power is first connected the state of the drive is not ready to switch on See dotted lined path in the state diagram below Use the CONTROL WORD to step through the state machine states until the OPERATING state is reached meaning that the drive is running and follows the given reference See the table below Step CONTROL WORD Value Description 1 CW 0000 0000 0000 0110 This CW value changes the drive state to READY TO SWITCH ON bit 15 bit 0 Wait at least 100 ms before proceeding CW 0000 0000 0000 0111 This CW value changes the drive stat
100. codes for 4xxxx registers Function code Description 03 Read holding 4xxxx registers 06 Preset single 4xxxx register 16 0x10 Hex Preset multiple 4xxxx registers 23 0x17 Hex Read write 4xxxx registers Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 238 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Actual values The contents of the register addresses 40005 40012 are ACTUAL VALUES and are specified using parameters 5310 5317 Read only values containing information on the operation of the drive 16 bit words containing a sign bit and a 15 bit integer when negative values written as the two s complement of the corresponding positive value scaled as described earlier in section Actual value scaling on page 227 Exception codes Exception codes are serial communication responses from the drive The ACS550 supports the standard Modbus exception codes defined below Exception code Name Meaning 01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION Unsupported Command 02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS The data address received in the query is not allowable It is not a defined parameter group 03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE A value contained in the query data field is not an allowable value for the ACS550 because it is one of the following Outside min or max limits Parameter is read only Message is too long Parameter write not allowed when start is active P
101. command sequence Enter OFF3 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED WARNING Be sure motor and driven equipment can be stopped using this mode 3 INHIBIT 1 OPERATION Enter OPERATION ENABLED Note the Run OPERATION ENABLED enable signal must be active See 1601 If 1601 is set to COMM this bit also actives the Run Enable signal 0 OPERATION Inhibit operation Enter OPERATION INHIBITED INHIBITED 4 Unused ABB DRV LIM RAMP_OUT_ 1 NORMAL OPERATION Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ZERO ACCELERATION ENABLED ABB PRY FULL 0 RFG OUT ZERO Force ramp function generator output to Zero Drive ramps to stop current and DC voltage limits in force 5 RAMP_HOLD 1 OUT ENABLED Enable ramp function Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATOR ENABLED 0 RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping Ramp Function Generator output held 6 RAMP_IN_ 1 RFG INPUT ENABLED Normal operation Enter OPERATING ZERO 0 INPUT ZERO Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 241 ABB Drives profile CONTROL WORD See parameter 5319 Commanded Bit Name Value state Comments 7 RESET 0 gt 1 RESET Fault reset if an active fault exists Enter SWITCH ON INHIBITED Effective if 1604 COMM 0 OPERATING Continue normal
102. connectiOns morrera Bue ERU AE DENM ENNIO as 2d 301 ios trud She P AUR P A E p RSE oa RES GRE EE 301 eel M P ole ors bated heh pau Pear ha way 302 Dimensions weights and noise 302 Degrees ol protection perce sio ode eee 302 AmbientconditloFis 25 25 E non ee tm esu e 303 Materials e beret eee ester he drea Res 304 Applicable standards x s dear RE oed Re S ged dt 304 GE MAKINO sss erste etam LR E Uu OW Mota wu Dean 305 G rickemiarklng scd usse vow Redes den RR erm aie aba Cg hd o e 305 PISA 305 IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Definitions 306 Compliance with the IEC EN 61800 3 2004 306 Equipment warranty and liability 307 Product protection in the 5 308 DIMENSION drawings oot wee ha De tee bate da Re EE KA aes 308 Contact ABB Product and service inquiries 311 PROGUGUAFAINING so te a AL ee ae cape cn a te
103. current of the drive when the drive is used for test purposes with no motor connected Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate O ABB Motors C 3 motor M2AA 200 MLA 4 IEC 200 MIL 55 No Ins cl F IP 55 V Hz kW rmin A 690Y 50 30 1475 325 0 83 400D 50 30 1475 56 0 83 660 50 30 1470 34 083 380 V 380D 50 1470 59 083 amp supply 415D 50 30 1475 54 083 440D eo 35 1770 59 0483 voltage 3GAA 202 001 ADA 6312 C3 6210 3 180 kg IEC 34 1 ro motor nominal voltage parameter 9905 motor nominal current parameter 9906 Allowed range 0 2 2 0 long A motor nominal frequency parameter 9907 motor nominal speed parameter 9908 motor nominal power parameter 9909 EAD ME Note Set the motor data to exactly the same value as on the motor nameplate For example if the motor nominal speed is 1470 rpm on the nameplate setting the value of parameter 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED to 1500 rpm results in the wrong operation of the drive 9409 Eu EUR _ 920 Ei Start up control with I O and ID Run Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 64 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Select the motor identification
104. following panel information nev XXXXXX X x Flash Rev X XX Panel FW panel firmware version ROM CRC panel ROM check sum Flash Rev flash content version Flash content comment When you release the key the panel goes to the Output mode XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 76 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual How to start stop and switch between local and remote control You can start stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode To be able to start or stop the drive the drive must be in local control Step Action Display 1 To switch between remote control REM shown on the status line and local LOC Ct MESSAGE control LOC shown on the status line press b f h 17 x t he ilis Note Switching to local control can be disabled with parameter 1606 LOCAL LOCK _100 00 The very first time the drive is powered up it is in remote control REM and controlled through the drive I O terminals To switch to local control LOC and control the drive using the control panel press 2 The result depends how long you press the key If you release the key immediately the display flashes Switching to the local control mode the drive stops Set the local control reference as instructed on page 78 f you press the key for about two seconds th
105. for PID control PID1 and PID2 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 Data received from fieldbus for PID control PID1 and 2 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 134 Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS This group monitors fieldbus communications ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 Read only copy of the Fieldbus Bit 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 Command Word 1 The fieldbus command is the principal pro FBLOCAL CTL means for controlling the drive from a 1 FBLOCAL_REF fieldbus controller The command 2 REVERSE START DISABLE1 consists of two Command Words Bit coded instructions in the Command 3 LOCAL START_DISABLE2 Words switch the drive between 4 RESET Reserved states To control the drive using the EXT Reserved Command Words an external location 6 RUN_DISABLE Reserved EXT1 or EXT2 must be active and set 7 STPMODE Reserved to COMM See parameters 1001 and The control panel displays the word in 9 STPMODE Reserved hex For example all zeros and 1 Bit 0 displays as 0001 All zeros and a 10 RAMP_2 Reserved 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 11 RAMP OUT 0 REF CONST 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 12 RAMP HOLD REF AVE Read only copy of the Fiel
106. inertia load causes the DC bus voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the trip limit the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque by increasing output frequency 0 DISABLE Disables controller 1 ENABLE Enables controller Note If a braking chopper or a braking resistor is connected to the drive this parameter value must be set to 0 DISABLE to ensure proper operation of the chopper 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL Sets the DC undervoltage controller on or off When on fthe DC bus voltage drops due to loss of input power the undervoltage controller decreases the motor speed in order to keep the DC bus voltage above the lower limit When the motor speed decreases the inertia of the load causes regeneration back into the drive keeping the DC bus charged and preventing an undervoltage trip The DC undervoltage controller increases power loss ride through on systems with a high inertia such as a centrifuge or a fan 0 DISABLE Disables controller 1 ENABLE TIME Enables controller with 500 ms time limit for operation 2 ENABLE Enables controller without maximum time limit for operation Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 156 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description MIRIAM ERES
107. inhibited 5014 Button is disabled because drive is faulted 5015 Button is disabled because local mode lock is on 5018 Parameter default value can t be found 5019 Writing a non zero value is prohibited can only write a zero value 5020 Group or parameter does not exist or parameter value is inconsistent 5021 Group or parameter is hidden 5022 Group or parameter is write protected 5023 Modification is not allowed while the drive is running 5024 Drive is busy try again 5025 Write is not allowed while upload or download is in progress 5026 Value is at or below low limit 5027 Value is at or above high limit 5028 Value is invalid doesn t match any values in the discrete values list 5029 Memory is not ready try again 5030 Request is invalid 5031 Drive is not ready e g due to low DC voltage 5032 Parameter error was detected 5040 Selected parameter set can t be found in the current parameter backup 5041 Parameter backup doesn t fit into memory 5042 Selected parameter set can t be found in the current parameter backup 5043 No start inhibit was granted 5044 Parameter backup versions do not match Diagnostics Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 284 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual
108. is OK OITF board V204 green 5 V voltage of the board is OK V309 red Prevention of unexpected start is ON V310 green IGBT control signal transmission to the gate driver control boards is enabled Control panel Cleaning Use a soft damp cloth to clean the control panel Avoid harsh cleaners which could scratch the display window Battery A battery is only used in Assistant Control Panels that have the clock function available and enabled The battery keeps the clock operating in memory during power interruptions The expected life for the battery is greater than ten years To remove the battery use a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the control panel Replace the battery with type CR2032 Maintenance Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 292 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Maintenance Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Technical data Ratings By type code the table below provides ratings for the ACS550 adjustab drive including IEC ratings NEMA ratings shaded columns frame size drive cabinet heat dissipation and air flow 293 le speed AC IEC ratings Ratings 380 480 V AC supply Heat Heavy duty use aed Air f
109. is below Motor cable Drive Boier Cable min 300 mm 12 in Motor cable Input power cable 200 mm 8in 90 E min 500 mm 20 in Control cables Planning the electrical installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 28 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Planning the electrical installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 29 Installation WARNING Only qualified electricians are allowed to carry out the work described in this chapter Follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page 5 Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death Note ACS550 U2 Installation Supplement 3AUA0000004067 English provides more information about the installation of ACS550 U2 drives Moving the drive Move the transport package by pallet truck to the installation site Unpack the package as shown below Lifting when the enclosure extension is included Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 30 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 230 kg 507 Ib Lift the drive by the upper part only using the lifting lugs attached to the top of the drive The lower part will be deformed if used for lifting Do not remove the pedestal bef
110. is not used 1 011 Defines digital input DI1 as the external fault input Activating the digital input indicates a fault The drive displays a fault 14 EXT FAULT 1 and the drive coasts to stop 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the external fault input See 011 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the external fault input De activating the digital input indicates a fault The drive displays a fault 14 EXT FAULT 1 and the drive coasts to stop 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the external fault input See DI1 INV above 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 Defines the External Fault 2 signal input and the drive response to an external fault e See parameter 3003 above 3005 MOT THERM PROT Defines the drive response to motor overheating NOT SEL No response and or motor thermal protection not set up 1 FAULT When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 C displays an alarm 2010 MOTOR TEMP When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 110 displays a fault 9 MOT OVERTEMP and the drive coasts to stop 2 ALARM When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 displays an alarm 2010 MOTOR TEMP 3006 MOT THERM TIME Motor load 4 Sets the motor thermal time constant for the motor temperature model e This is the time required for the motor to reach 63 of the final t temperat
111. lt MIN FUNCTION Defines the drive response if the analog input signal drops below the fault limits and Al is used in reference chain 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT set the fault limits NOT SEL No response 1 FAULT Displays fault 7 Al1 LOSS or 8 AI2 Loss and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP 7 Displays an alarm 2006 A11 Loss or 2007 AI2 LOSS and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 LAST SPEED Displays an alarm 2006 A11 Loss or 2007 AI2 Loss and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds WARNING If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when the analog input signal is lost 3002 PANEL COMM ERR Defines the drive response to a control panel communication error 1 FAULT Displays a fault 10 PANEL LOSS and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP 7 Displays an alarm 2008 PANEL LOSS and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 3 LAST SPEED Displays an alarm 2008 PANEL LOSS and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds WARNING If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when the control panel communication is lost 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 Defines the External Fault 1 signal input and the drive response to an external fault NOT SEL External fault signal
112. motor sizes do not need to be the same copy USER S1 parameters from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD USER SET1 A user set includes Group 99 START UP DATA parameters and the internal motor parameters The function is only shown on the menu when User Set 1 has been first saved using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO see section User parameter sets on page 111 and then uploaded to the control panel with UPLOAD TO PANEL copy USER S2 parameters from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD USER SET2 As DOWNLOAD USER SET1 above start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual How to upload and download parameters For the upload and download functions available see above Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing x if you are in the Output mode otherwise LOC UMAIN MENU 1 b 2 DARAM y pressing repeatedly until you get to the Main menu EXIT 100 00 ENTER 2 Go to the Par Backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with keys LOC PAR BACKUP 1 ENTER UPLOAD TO PANEL A and SY 2 and pressing ST BACKUP INFO DOWNLOAD FULL SET DOWNLOAD APPLICATI ON DOWNLOAD USER SETI EXIT 100 00 SEL 3 copy all parameters including user sets and internal parameters from the L
113. multiple input registers For the ACS550 the 2 analog input Registers channels are mapped as input registers 1 amp 2 Force Single Coil 0x05 Write a single discrete output For the ACS550 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Write Single 0x06 Write single holding register For the ACS550 the entire Holding Register parameter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Diagnostics 0x08 Perform Modbus diagnostics Subcodes for Query 0x00 Restart 0x01 amp Listen Only 0x04 are supported Force Multiple Coils OxOF Write multiple discrete outputs For the ACS550 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Write Multiple 0x10 Write multiple holding registers For the ACS550 the entire Holding Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Read Write Multiple 0x17 This function combines functions 0x03 and 0x10 into a single command Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 232 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Mapping summary The following table summarizes the mapping between the ACS550 parameters and 1 0 and Modbus reference space For detail
114. on the heat sink Excessive ambient temperature Excessive motor load SHORT CIRC Fault current Check for and correct Ashort circuit in the motor cable s or motor Supply disturbances RESERVED Not used DC UNDERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient Check for and correct Missing phase in the input power supply Blown fuse Undervoltage on mains AI1 LOSS Analog input 1 loss Analog input value is less than 1 FAULT LIMIT 3021 Check for and correct Source and connection for analog input Parameter settings for 1 FAULT LIMIT 3021 and 3001 AIXMIN FUNCTION AI2 LOSS Analog input 2 loss Analog input value is less than AI2 FAULT LIMIT 3022 Check for and correct Source and connection for analog input Parameter settings for AI2 FAULT LIMIT 3022 and 3001 AIXMIN FUNCTION MOT OVERTEMP Motor is too hot based on either the drive s estimate or on temperature feedback Check for overloaded motor Adjust the parameters used for the estimate 3005 3009 e Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS parameters 10 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either Drive is in local control mode the control panel displays LOC or Drive is in remote control mode REM and is parameterized to accept start stop direction or reference from the control panel To correct check Communication li
115. operation 8 9 Unused 10 Unused ABB DRV LIM REMOTE_CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled Ig CW 0 or Ref 0 Retain last CW and Ref CW 0 and Ref 0 Fieldbus control enabled Ref and deceleration acceleration ramp are locked 11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 EXT2 SELECT Select external control location 2 2 Effective if 1102 comm 0 EXT1 SELECT Select external control location 1 EXT1 Effective if 1102 COMM 12 Unused 15 DCU Profile The following tables describe the CONTROL WORD content for the DCU profile DCU profile CONTROL WORD See parameter 0301 Bit Name Value Command Req Comments 0 STOP 1 Stop Stops according to either the stop mode 0 parameter or the stop mode requests bits 7 no op and 8 1 START 1 Start Simultaneous STOP and START commands result in a stop command 0 no op 2 REVERSE 1 Reverse direction This bit XOR d with the sign of the reference Ium defines direction 0 Forward direction 3 LOCAL 1 Local mode When the fieldbus sets this bit it steals 0 Ext control and the drive moves to fieldbus local ASI moge control mode 4 RESET gt 1 Reset Edge sensitive other no op 5 EXT2 1 Switch to EXT2 0 Switch to EXT1 6 RUN DISABLE 1 Run disable Inverted run enable 0 Run enable on 7 STPMODE R 1 Normal ramp stop mode 0 no op Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com
116. or 4 x 500 MCM Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Cable entries 299 Mains and motor cable maximum sizes per phase accepted at the cable terminals and the tightening torques are listed below U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 Earthing PE size Number of Max cable Bolt Tightening Bolt Tightening cable lead diameter size torque size torque poses mm in Nm ibit R7 2 58 2 28 M12 50 75 35 55 M8 15 22 10 16 R8 3 58 2 28 M12 50 75 35 55 M8 15 22 10 16 00467918 xls Input power mains connection Input power mains connection specifications Voltage U4 400 415 440 460 480 V AC 3 phase 10 15 for 400 V AC drives Short circuit withstand strength IEC 60439 1 Maximum allowable prospective short circuit current when protected by IEC fuses given in the fuse table on page 295 is for 02 drives 65 keo for U2 drives with enclosure extension lwl 18 m 50 kA 105 kA Short circuit current protection UL 508 US and Canada According to UL 508 the drive is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 kA symmetrical amperes rms at 600 V maximum when protected by UL fuses given in the fuse table on page 295 Frequency 48 63 Hz Imbalance Max 3 of no
117. profile technical data 262 Generic profile technical data 270 Diagnostics Diagnostic displays 613 bau eee ORT Gor d 273 Correcting faults so ated d ea DIR bord tes does a d ACen mr nce 274 Table of contents Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 11 Correctrigelartris var stood au ocu ACE I Tenn Era 280 Maintenance Maintenance intervals 285 Heatsink 4 4 TP 286 BOR ME ROA C IDE Me EE 286 23 Reus nea oe bbb Ru qp Udo Ser Sid pe t 289 Ln cnn 291 Control panel be xU es Xr age V LE YOUR ATI ed LATO p aee 291 Technical data cinta A rela orbe ens qoa d gens 293 Fuses and circuit breakers 295 Cable types 182s PEL 297 Cableinlfi8s 6 et ON EE E Na E ud cos atus 299 Input power mains connection 299 Motor CONNECHIONS 5 on erae ay ander a mamie i ean ate 300 Control
118. reference Reference scaling The following table describes REFERENCE scaling for the ABB Drives profile ABB Drives Profile FBA Reference Range Scaling Remarks REF 1 32767 Speedor 20000 par 1105 Final reference limited by 32767 frequency 0 0 1104 1105 Actual motor 20000 par 1105 speed limited by 2001 2002 20000 corresponds to 100 speed or 2007 2008 frequency REF2 32767 Speedor 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 32767 frequency 0 0 1107 1108 Actual motor 10000 par 1108 speed limited by 2001 2002 10000 corresponds to 100 speed or 2007 2008 frequency Torque 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 0 0 2015 2017 torque1 or 10000 par 1108 2016 2018 torque2 10000 corresponds to 10096 PID 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by Reference 0 0 4012 4013 PID set1 or 10000 par 1108 4112 4113 PID set2 10000 corresponds to 100 Note The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on the scaling of references When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM AI1 or 1 the reference is scaled as follows ABB Drives profile FBA Reference Value setting Al reference scaling REF1 1 COMM 96 Al 96 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus reference A correction coefficient 100 0 5 Par 110596 100 input signal 100 0 5 par 1105 gt
119. reference input Normally EXT REF2 is used as the PFC reference drive uses the feedback signal defined by 4014 FBK SEL or 4114 for the PFC frequency reference figure shows the relation between the control signal 4014 FBK SEL OR 4114 and the speed regulated motor s frequency in a three motor system Example In the diagram below the pumping station s P4014 Y A No auxiliary motors running B One auxiliary motor running C Two auxiliary motors running Mains 3 3 Contactors Outlet 1 gt Outlet pipe2 Inlet pipe Outlet pipe3 8122 PFC START DELAY Sets the start delay for speed regulated motors in the system Using the delay the drive works as follows e Switches on the contactor of the speed regulated motor connecting the motor to the ACS550 power output e Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFC START DELAY Starts the speed regulated motor Starts auxiliary motors See parameter 8115 for delay AN WARNING Motors equipped with star delta starters require a PFC Start Delay e After the ACS550 relay output switches a motor on the star delta starter must switch to the star connection and then back to the delta connection before the drive applies power So the PFC Start Delay must be longer than the time setting of the star delta starter 8123 PFC ENABLE Selects PFC control
120. three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI3 and D14 e See above 11 2 for code 10 014 5 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI4 and 015 See above 11 2 for code 11 015 6 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI5 and DI6 See above 011 2 for code 12 011 2 3 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using 011 012 and 013 Uses three digital inputs as defined below 0 de activated 1 activated DI2 Function 0 0 0 constant speed 1 0 0 Constant speed 1 1202 0 1 0 Constant speed 2 1203 1 1 0 Constant speed 3 1204 0 0 1 Constant speed 4 1205 1 0 1 Constant speed 5 1206 0 1 1 Constant speed 6 1207 1 1 1 Constant speed 7 1208 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 143 Code Description 13 DI3 4 5 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using 013 014 and Di5 See above 011 2 3 for code 14 014 5 6 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using 014 015 and DI6 See above 011 2 3 for code 15 18 TIMED FUNC 1 4 Selects Constant Speed 1 when Timed Function is active See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 19 TIMED FUN1 amp 2 Selects a constant speed depending on the state of Timed Functions 1 amp 2 See parameter 1209 1 DI1 INV Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input D11 Inverse o
121. to highlight then press 4 if you want to make the panel ask or not ask the question about running the Start up Assistant again the next time you switch on the power to the drive SELECTING THE LANGUAGE If you decided to run the Start up Assistant the display then asks REM UPAR EDIT you to select the language Scroll to the desired language with 9901 LANGUAGE keys and press lt to accept ENGLI SH If you press E the Start up Assistant is stopped 00 00 SAVE STARTING THE GUIDED SET UP The Start up Assistant now guides you through the set up tasks REM UPAR EDIT starting with the motor set up Set the motor data to exactly the 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT same value as on the motor nameplate 220 V Scroll to the desired parameter value with keys CA SZ and EYXTT 100 00 SAVE press lt lt to accept and continue with the Start up Assistant Note At any time if you press gt the Start up Assistant is stopped and the display goes to the Output mode Start up control with I O and ID Run Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 67 After completing a set up task the Start up Assistant suggests the ae F next one continue wi tH Press X when MAMETA is highlighted to continue with the suggested t
122. types of safety instructions throughout this manual Notes draw attention to a particular condition or fact or give information on subject Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death and or damage to the equipment They also tell you how to avoid the danger The warning symbols are used as follows Dangerous voltage warning warns of high voltage which can cause physical injury and or damage to the equipment General warning warns about conditions other than those caused by electricity which can result in physical injury and or damage to the equipment WARNING The ACS550 adjustable speed AC drive should ONLY be installed by a qualified electrician WARNING Even when the motor is stopped dangerous voltage is present at the power circuit terminals U1 V1 W1 and U2 V2 W2 and UDC UDC WARNING Dangerous voltage is present when input power is connected After disconnecting the supply wait at least 5 minutes to let the intermediate circuit capacitors discharge before removing the cover WARNING Even when power is switched off from the input terminals of the ACS550 there may be dangerous voltage from external sources on the terminals of the relay outputs RO1 RO3 and if the relay extension board is included in the installation RO4 RO6 as well as terminals X1 19 X1 27 on the control board WARNING When the control terminals of two or more drives
123. use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set acceleration compensation 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN Starts automatic tuning of the speed controller 0 Disables the Autotune creation process Does not disable the operation of Autotune settings 1 ON Activates speed controller autotuning Automatically reverts to OFF Procedure Note The motor load must be connected Run the motor at a constant speed of 20 to 40 of the rated speed Change the autotuning parameter 2305 to ON The drive Accelerates the motor Calculates values for proportional gain integration time and acceleration compensation Changes parameters 2301 2302 and 2304 to these values Resets 2305 to orr Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Group 24 TORQUE CONTROL This group defines variables used for torque control operation 165 Code Description 2401 TORQ RAMP UP Defines the torque reference ramp up time The minimum time for the reference to increase from zero to the nominal motor torque 2402 TORQ RAMP DOWN Defines the torque reference ramp down time The minimum time for the reference to decrease from the nominal motor torque to zero Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 166 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Group 25 CRITICAL
124. when PFC control is used Selection activated deactivated when drive is not running 32 AUTOCHANGE Energize relay when autochange operation is performed Use this option only when PFC control is used 33 FLUX READY Energize relay when the motor is magnetized and able to supply nominal torque motor has reached nominal magnetizing 34 USER MACRO 2 Energize relay when User Parameter Set 2 is active Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 147 Code Description 35 COMM Energize relay based on input from fieldbus communication Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energize relay 1 relay 6 according to the following 0134 Binary RO6 RO5 RO4 RO2 RO1 0 000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 000001 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 000010 0 0 0 0 1 0 3 000011 0 0 0 0 1 1 4 000100 0 0 0 1 0 0 63 111111 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 De energize relay 1 Energize relay 36 COMM 1 Energize relay based on input from fieldbus communication Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energize relay 1 relay 6 according to the following 0134 RO6 5 RO4 ROS3 RO2 RO1 0 000000 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 000001 1 1 1 1 1 0 2 000010 1 1 1 1 0 1 3 000011 1 1 1 1 0 0 4 000100 1 1 1 0 1 1 63 1111
125. 0 0 s 0 1s 60 0 s 4003 DERIVATION TIME 0 0 10 0 s 0 15 0 05 4004 PID DERIV FILTER 0 0 10 0 s 0 15 1 05 4005 ERROR VALUE INV 0 NO 1 YES 1 0 No 4006 UNITS 0 127 1 4 4007 UNIT SCALE 0 4 1 1 4008 0 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 0 0 4007 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 124 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Range Resolution Default User 4009 100 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 100 0 4007 4010 SET POINT SEL 0 2 8 17 19 20 1 1 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 40 0 4007 4012 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 0 0 1 0 0 4013 MAX 500 0 500 0 0 1 100 0 4014 FBK SEL 1 13 1 1 1 4015 MULTIPLIER 0 000 NOT SEL 32 768 32 767 0 001 0 000 NOT SEL 4016 1 INPUT 1 7 1 2 AI2 4017 2 INPUT 1 7 1 2 12 4018 1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4019 1 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4020 2 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4021 2 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4022 SLEEP SELECTION 6 7 1 0 NOT SEL 4023 SLEEP LEVEL 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 0 rpm 0 0 Hz 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 60 05 4025 WAKE U
126. 02 U2 User s Manual 153 Code Description 1608 START ENABLE 1 Selects the source of the start enable 1 signal Note Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality 0 NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal 1 011 Defines digital input DI1 as the start enable 1 signal This digital input must be activated for start enable 1 signal If the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2021 on the panel display The drive will not start until start enable 1 signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 1 signal See 011 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 1 signal Bit 2 of the Command word 2 parameter 0302 activates the start disable 1 signal See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the start enable 1 signal 2 6 012 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 1 signal See 011 INV above Drive started START STOP COMMAND Group 10 START ENABLE SIGNAL Relay Relay energized de energized Damper l closed 1 gt Damper opening time Damper open lt 1 1 Acceleration time Par 2202
127. 1 B 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 162 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description 2208 EMERG DEC TIME Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for an emergency See parameter 2109 EMERG STOP SEL Ramp is linear 2209 RAMP INPUT 0 Defines control for forcing the ramp input to O 0 NOT SEL Not selected 1 011 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the ramp input to 0 Activating the digital input forces ramp input to 0 Ramp output will ramp to 0 according to the currently used ramp time after which it will stay at O De activating the digital input ramp resumes normal operation 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for forcing the ramp input to 0 See 011 above 7 COMM Defines bit 13 of the Command Word 1 as the control for forcing the ramp input to 0 The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is parameter 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the ramp input to 0 De activating the digital input forces ramp input to O Activating the digital input ramp resumes normal operation 2 6 DIZ INv DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for forcing the ramp function generator input to 0
128. 11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 De energize relay 1 Energize relay 37 TIMED FUNC 1 Energize relay when Timed Function 1 is active See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 38 40 TIMED FUNC 2 4 Energize relay when Timed Function 2 4 is active See TIMED FUNC 1 above 41 MNT TRIG FAN Energize relay when cooling fan counter is triggered See Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 42 MNT TRIG REV Energize relay when revolutions counter is triggered See Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 43 MNT TRIG RUN Energize relay when run time counter is triggered See Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 44 MNT TRIG MWH Energize relay when MWh counter is triggered See Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 46 START DELAY Energize relay when a start delay is active 47 USER LOAD C Energize relay when a user load curve fault or alarm occurs 52 JOG ACTIVE Energize relay when the jogging function is active 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 2 what relay output 2 means See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 3 what relay output 3 means See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 1 Control event EE _ On off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to PFC 1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY zie oe Defines the switch off delay for relay 1 Relay st
129. 132 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 203 Group 52 PANEL COMM This group defines the communication settings for the control panel port on the drive Normally when using the supplied control panel there is no need to change settings in this group In this group parameter modifications take effect on the next power up Code Description 5201 STATION ID Defines the address of the drive Two units with the same address are not allowed on line Range 1 247 5202 BAUD RATE Defines the communication speed of the drive in kbits per second kb s 9 6 kb s 19 2 kb s 38 4 kb s 57 6 kb s 115 2 kb s 5203 PARITY Sets the character format to be used with the panel communication 0 8 NONE 1 8 data bits no parity one stop bit 1 8 NONE 2 8 data bits no parity two stop bits 2 8 EVEN 1 8 data bits even parity one stop bit 3 8 ODD 1 8 data bits odd parity one stop bit 5204 MESSAGES Contains a count of valid Modbus messages received by the drive During normal operation this counter is increasing constantly 5205 PARITY ERRORS Contains a count of the characters with a parity error that is received from the bus For high counts check e Parity settings of devices connected on the bus they must not differ Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise level
130. 14 014 014 10037 015 015 015 10038 016 016 016 1 Active low For the 1xxxx registers Additional discrete inputs are added sequentially The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for discrete inputs Function code Description 02 Read input status 3xxxx Mapping Modbus inputs The drive maps the following information to the 3xxxx Modbus addresses called Modbus input registers any user defined analog inputs The following table summarizes the input registers Modbus ACS550 reference all profiles Remarks 30001 Alt This register shall report the level of Analog Input 1 0 100 30002 Al2 This register shall report the level of Analog Input 2 0 100 The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for 3xxxx registers Function code Description 04 Read 3xxxx input status 4xxxx Register mapping The drive maps its parameters and other data to the 4xxxx holding registers as follows e 40001 40099 map to drive control and actual values These registers described in the table below 40101 49999 map to drive parameters 0101 9999 Register addresses that do not correspond to drive parameters are invalid If there is an attempt to read or write outside the parameter addresses the Modbus interface returns an exception code to the controller Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 47
131. 2 SETPOINT MIN 0 e P 4013 SETPOINT MAX 0 e B varies along the horizontal axis Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 141 Code Description 1104 REF1 MIN A Sets the minimum for external reference 1 The minimum analog input signal as a percent of the full signal in volts or amperes corresponds to REF1 MIN in Hz rpm MAX e Parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1 or 1304 MINIMUM AI2 sets the minimum analog input signal These parameters reference and analog min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the reference P 1104 1105 REF1 MAX MIN Sets the maximum for external reference 1 P 1301 P 1302 The maximum analog input signal as a percent of full or 1304 or 1305 the signal in volts or amperes corresponds to REF1 MAX in Hz rpm Ext ref Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM 11 or 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 sets A the maximum analog input signal P 1104 MIN Analog input signal P 1105 MAX 259 Analog T T P 1301 P 1302 input signal or 1304 or 1305 1106 REF2 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF2 0 17 Same as for parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT 19 PID10UT The reference is taken from the PID1 output See Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 and Group 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 20 21 Same as for pa
132. 2007 2008 frequency Torque 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 0 0 2015 2017 torque1 2016 10000 par 1108 2018 torque2 10000 corresponds to 100 PID 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by Reference 0 0 4012 4013 PID set1 or 10000 par 1108 4112 4113 PID set2 10000 corresponds to 100 Note The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on the scaling of references When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM AI1 or 11 the reference is scaled as follows ABB Drives and DCU profiles Value Reference setting Al reference scaling REF1 1 COMM 96 96 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus reference correction coefficient 100 0 5 Par 1105 96 100 77 777 input signal 100 0 5 par 1105 gt p Pox 50 100 Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 249 ABB Drives and DCU profiles Reference eating Al reference scaling REF1 COMM AI1 COMM 96 Al 96 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus reference correction coefficient 20096 i 100 input signal 100 0 5 p
133. 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 gt 50 depending on which limit is in use according to parameter 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL Check that the Run Enable signal is on parameter 7601 Ensure that the panel is in local control LOC shown on the left at the top Press key to switch between local and remote control PRE CHECK WARNING The motor will run at up to approximately 50 80 of the nominal speed during the ID Run The motor will rotate in the forward direction Ensure that it is safe to run the motor before performing the ID Run Start up control with I O and ID Run Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 70 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual ID RUN WITH THE ASSISTANT CONTROL PANEL Change parameter 9970 ID RUN to 1 ON Save the new setting SAVE by pressing wir If you want to monitor actual values during the ID Run go to EXIT the Output mode by pressing CZ repeatedly until you get there Press to start the ID Run The panel keeps switching between the display that was shown when you started the ID Run and the alarm display presented on the right In general it is recommended not to press any control panel keys during the ID Run However you can stop the ID Run at any time by pressing CQ After the ID Run is completed the alarm display is not shown any more If the ID Run fails the fa
134. 253 6 977 449 7 034 510 7 082 374 7 176 779 7 262 577 D512 026 D548 182 Other patents pending 5 463 302 5 799 805 6 175 256 6 305 464 6 448 735 6 774 758 6 934 169 6 984 958 7 036 223 7 084 604 7 190 599 D503 931 D512 696 D548 183 5 521 483 5 940 286 6 184 740 6 313 599 6 498 452 6 844 794 6 956 352 6 985 371 7 045 987 7 098 623 7 215 099 D510 319 D521 466 The dimensions are given in millimetres and inches 5 532 568 5 942 874 6 195 274 6 316 896 6 552 510 6 856 502 6 958 923 6 992 908 7 057 908 7 102 325 7 221 152 D510 320 D541 743S ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 5 589 754 5 952 613 6 229 356 6 335 607 6 597 148 6 859 374 6 967 453 6 999 329 7 059 390 7 109 780 7 227 325 D511 137 0541 7445 Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 309 Frame size R7 1 j 9c l E c B g S DA zu cored LI BS tj 5 a 08 le E NE S N 5 N amp uos elo ale ae E amp 0010 lbi cul ol imn
135. 3 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 139 Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT This group defines how the drive selects between command sources characteristics and sources for REF1 and REF2 Code Description 1101 REF SEL Selects the reference controlled in local control mode 1 REF1 Hz rpm Reference type depends on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE Speed reference rpm if 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ Frequency reference Hz if 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ 2 REF2 1102 1 2 SEL Defines the source for selecting between the two external control locations EXT1 or EXT2 Thus defines the source for Start Stop Direction commands and reference signals 0 ExT1 Selects external control location 1 EXT1 See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS for EXT1 s Start Stop Dir definitions e See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT for EXT1 s reference definitions 1 011 Assigns control to 1 or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 011 activated EXT2 011 de activated EXT1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input See 011 above 7 EXT2 Selects external control location 2 EXT2 See parameter 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS for EXT2 s Start Stop Dir definitions See parameter 1106 REF2 SELECT for EXT2 s reference definitions 8 COMM Assigns control of the drive via external control location EX
136. 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 Defines the frequency value of the third load curve definition point e Must be smaller than 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 3711 LOAD TORQ LOW 3 Defines the torque value of the third underload curve definition point e Must be smaller than 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH Defines the torque value of the third overload curve definition point Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 188 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 Defines the frequency value of the fourth load curve definition point Must be smaller than 3716 LoAD FREQ 5 3714 LOAD TORQ LOW 4 Defines the torque value of the fourth underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 Defines the torque value of the fourth overload curve definition point 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 Defines the frequency value of fifth load curve definition point 3717 LOAD TORQ LOW 5 Defines the torque value of the fifth underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 Defines the torque value of the fifth overload curve definition point Correspondence with the obsolete underload supervision The now obsolete parameter 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE provided five selectable curves shown in t
137. 6 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC Compliance with the EMC Directive The Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical equipment used within the European Union The EMC product standard IEC EN 61800 3 2004 covers requirements stated for drives Compliance with IEC EN 61800 3 2004 See page 306 C Tick marking The drive carries C Tick marking C Tick marking is required in Australia and New Zealand A C Tick mark is attached to the drive to verify compliance with the relevant standard IEC 61800 3 2004 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods mandated by the Trans Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme The Trans Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme EMCS was introduced by the Australian Communication Authority ACA and the Radio Spectrum Management Group RSM of the New Zealand Ministry of Economic Development NZMED in November 2001 The aim of the scheme is to protect the radio frequency spectrum by introducing technical limits for emission from electrical electronic products Compliance with IEC EN 61800 3 2004 See page 306 UL markings An UL mark is attached to ACS550 drives to verify that the drive follows the ONUS provisions of UL 508C The ACS550 is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 kA rms symmetrical amperes 480 V maximum The ampere rating is based
138. 73 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual The following table summarizes the 4xxxx drive control registers 40001 40099 for 4xxxx registers above 40099 see the drive parameter list e g 40102 is parameter 0102 Modbus register Access Remarks 40001 CONTROL WORD R W Maps directly to the profile s CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 0 or 2 ABB Drives profile Parameter 5319 holds a copy in hex format 40002 Reference 1 R W Range 0 20000 scaled to 0 1105 REF1 or 20000 0 scaled to 1105 REF1 MAX 0 40003 Reference 2 R W Range 0 10000 scaled to 0 1108 REF2 or 10000 0 scaled to 1108 REF2 MAX 0 40004 STATUS WORD R Maps directly to the profile S STATUS WORD Supported only if 5305 0 or 2 ABB Drives profile Parameter 5320 holds a copy in hex format 40005 Actual 1 R By default stores a copy of 0103 OUTPUT FREQ Use select using 5310 parameter 5310 to select a different actual value for this register 40006 Actual 2 R By default stores a copy of 0104 CURRENT Use parameter select using 5311 5311 to select a different actual value for this register 40007 Actual 3 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5312 to select an select using 5312 actual value for this register 40008 Actual 4 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5313 to select an sel
139. 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 223 Activate drive control functions EFB Controlling the drive Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function define as a fieldbus input any drive data required for control define as a fieldbus output any control data required by the drive The following sections describe at a general level the configuration required for each control function For the protocol specific details see the document supplied with the FBA module Start Stop Direction control Using the fieldbus for start stop direction control of the drive requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent o Modbus protocol reference Drive parameter Value Description ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 10 Start Stop by fieldbus 40001 bits 0 3 40031 bits O 1 with Ext1 selected 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 10 COMM Start Stop by fieldbus 40001 bits 0 3 40031 bits O 1 with Ext2 selected 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Direction by fieldbus 4002 4003 40031 bit 3 1 For Modbus the protocol reference can depend on the profile used hence two columns in these tables On
140. 9 Group 42 EXT TRIM PID This group defines the parameters used for the second PID controller PID2 which is used for the External Trimming PID The operation of parameters 4201 4221 is analogous with Process PID set 1 PID1 parameters 4001 4021 Code Description 4201 4221 See 4001 4021 4228 ACTIVATE Defines the source for enabling the external PID function Requires 4230 TRIM MODE 0 NOT SEL 0 NOT SEL Disables external PID control 1 011 Defines digital input 011 as the control for enabling external PID control Activating the digital input enables external PID control De activating the digital input disables external PID control 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control See 011 above 7 DRIVE RUN Defines the start command as the control for enabling external PID control Activating the start command drive is running enables external PID control 8 ON Defines the power on as the control for enabling external PID control Activating power to the drive enables external PID control 9 12 TIMED FUNC 1 4 Defines the Timed function as the control for enabling external PID control Timed function active enables external PID control See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for enabling external PID control Activating the digital
141. ABB Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts Reforming Reform re age spare part capacitors once a year according to Guide for Capacitor Reforming in ACS50 ACS55 ACS150 ACS350 ACS550 and ACH550 3 68735190 English available on the Internet go to ABB website and enter the code in the Search field Replacing the capacitor pack R7 Replace the capacitor pack as described in section Replacing the fan R7 on page 287 Maintenance Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 290 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Replacing the capacitor pack R8 1 Remove power from the drive 2 Remove the upper front cover and the side plate equipped with control panel mounting slot 3 Disconnect the discharging resistor wire 4 Undo the fastening screws 5 Lift the capacitor pack out 6 4 pcs M6 Capacitor pack out 6 Install the capacitor pack in reverse order to the above 7 Restore power Maintenance Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 291 LEDs This table describes LEDs of the drive Where LED When the LED is lit Control board Red blinking Drive in fault state Green The power supply on the board is OK Control panel mounting platform Red Drive in fault state Green The main 24 V power supply for the control panel and the control board
142. ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 137 Group 10 START STOP DIR This group defines external sources EXT1 and EXT2 for commands that enable start stop and direction changes locks direction or enables direction control To select between the two external locations use the next group parameter 1102 Code Description 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS Defines external control location 1 EXT1 the configuration of start stop and direction commands 0 NOT SEL No external start stop and direction command source 1 011 Two wire Start Stop Start Stop is through digital input 011 011 activated Start 011 de activated Stop Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FORWARD 2 011 2 Two wire Start Stop Direction Start Stop is through digital input 011 011 activated Start 011 de activated Stop Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DI2 DI2 activated Reverse de activated Forward 3 DI1P 2P Three wire Start Stop Start Stop commands are through momentary push buttons the P stands for pulse Start is through a normally open push button connected to digital input DI1 In order to start the drive the digital input DI2 must be activated prior to the pulse in DI1 Connect multiple Start push buttons in parallel Stop is through a normally closed push button connected to digital input DI2
143. ACS550 behavior if communication is lost was configured earlier in section Communication fault on page 226 The parameters are 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Section Complete parameter descriptions on page 128 describes these parameters in detail No master station on line If no master station is on line Neither the EFB OK MESSAGES nor the errors 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS increase on any of the stations To correct Check that a network master is connected and properly programmed on the network Verify that the cable is connected and that it is not cut or short circuited Duplicate stations If two or more stations have duplicate numbers Two or more drives cannot be addressed Everytime there is a read or write to one particular station the value for 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS or 5308 EFB UART ERRORS advances To correct Verify the station numbers of all stations Change conflicting station numbers Swapped wires If the communication wires are swapped terminal A on one drive is connected to terminal B on another The value of 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES does not advance The values of 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS are advancing To correct Check that the RS 485 lines are not swapped Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 230 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Fault 28 Serial 1 Err If the drive
144. AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 19 INTERNAL A constant value set using parameter 4011 provides reference 20 200 Defines PID controller 2 output parameter 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT as the reference source Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 194 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description Analog input reference correction Parameter values 9 10 and 14 17 use the formula in the following table Value setting Calculation of the Al reference C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value 5096 of reference value B value C B value 50 of reference value value Where A Main reference value 120 COMM for values 9 10 and AI for values 14 17 e Correcting reference AM for values 9 10 and 12 for values 14 17 Example figure shows the reference source curves for value settings 9 10 and 14 17 where e C 25 4012 SETPOINT MIN 0 e P 4013 SETPOINT MAX 0 e B varies along the horizontal axis 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT Sets a constant value used for the process reference Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 4012 SETPO
145. AL2 MIN 1 3410 SIGNAL2 MAX 1 3411 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM 0 9 1 9 DIRECT 3412 DUTPUT2 UNIT 0 127 1 3413 0 0 2 MIN 1 3414 DUTPUT2 1 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM 100 NOT SELECTED 101 159 1 105 parameter 0105 TORQUE 3416 SIGNAL3 MIN 1 3417 SIGNAL3 MAX 1 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM 0 9 1 9 DIRECT 3419 OUTPUTS UNIT 0 127 1 3420 OUTPUT3 MIN 1 3421 DUTPUT3 MAX 1 Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS 3501 SENSOR TYPE 0 6 1 NONE 3502 SELECTION 1 8 1 1 3503 ALARM LIMIT Par 3501 1 3 10 200 1 110 1500 ohm 0 Par 3501 4 0 5000 ohm Par 3501 5 6 0 1 3504 LIMIT Par 3501 1 3 10 200 1 130 C 4000 ohm 0 Par 3501 4 0 5000 ohm Par 3501 5 6 0 1 Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 3601 5 ENABLE 6 7 1 0 NOT SEL 3602 START TIME 1 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3603 STOP TIME 1 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3604 START DAY 1 LEA 1 1 MONDAY 3605 sTOP DAY 1 1 7 1 1 MONDAY 3606 ISTART TIME 2 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 123 Code Range Resolution Default User S 3607 STOP TIME 2 00 00 00 23 59 58
146. ALL FREQUENCY P 3011 This parameter sets the frequency value for the Stall function Refer to Stall frequency the figure 3012 STALL TIME This parameter sets the time value for the Stall function 3017 EARTH FAULT Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 172 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description 3018 FAULT FUNC Defines the drive response if the fieldbus communication is lost NOT SEL No response 1 FAULT Displays a fault 28 SERIAL 1 ERR and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP 7 Displays an alarm 2005 I o COMM and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 This alarm speed remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value LAST SPEED Displays an alarm 2005 1 0 comm and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds This alarm speed remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value WARNING If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when fieldbus communication is lost 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Sets the communication fault time used with 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC e Brief interruptions in the fieldbus communication are not treated as faults if they are less than the COMM FAULT TIME value 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT Sets a fault level for analog input 1 e See 3001 AI lt MIN
147. AXIMUM SPEED 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 02 1500 rpm Y U2 1800 rpm 2003 CURRENT 0 1 8 0 1 1 8 long 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 ENABLE 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL DISABLE 1 ENABLE TIME 1 1 ENABLE TIME 2 ENABLE 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 500 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz Y 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 02 50 0 Hz U2 60 0 Hz 2013 TORQUE SEL 6 7 1 MIN TORQUE 1 2014 TORQUE SEL 6 7 1 MAX TORQUE 1 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 600 0 0 0 0 1 300 0 2016 TORQUE 2 600 0 0 0 0 1 300 0 2017 TORQUE 1 0 0 600 0 0 1 300 0 2018 TORQUE 2 0 0 600 0 0 1 300 0 Group 21 START STOP 2101 ISTART FUNCTION Vector control modes 1 2 8 1 8 RAMP Scalar control mode 1 5 8 2102 FUNCTION 1 COAST 2 RAMP 1 1 COAST 2103 MAGN TIME 0 00 10 00 s 0 015 0 305 2104 HOLD CTL 0 NOT SEL 1 DC HOLD 1 NOT SEL Y 2 DC BRAKING 2105 DC HOLD SPEED 0 360 rpm 1 rpm 5 rpm 2106 CURR REF 0 100 1 30 2107 DC BRAKE TIME 0 0 250 0s 0 15 0 05 2108 START INHIBIT OFF 1 ON 1 OFF 2109 EMERG STOP SEL 6 6 1 NOT SEL 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR 15 300 1 100 2112 ZERO SPEED DELAY 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 60 0 s 0 15 0 0 s NOT SEL 2113 START DELAY 0 00 60 00 s 0 01s 0 00 s Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com
148. At motor temperatures above this limit the drive displays a fault 9 OVERTEMP and stops the drive For thermistors or PTC connected to digital input 0 de activated 1 activated Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 183 Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS This group defines the timed functions The timed functions include four daily start and stop times four weekly start stop and boost times four timers for collecting selected periods together A timer can be connected to multiple time periods and a time period can be in multiple timers Time Period 1 3602 START TIME 1 3603 STOP TIME 1 3604 START DAY 1 3605 STOP DAY 1 Time Period 2 3606 START TIME 2 3607 STOP TIME 2 3608 START DAY 2 3609 STOP DAY 2 Time Period 3 3610 START TIME 3 3611 STOP TIME 3 3612 START DAY 3 3613 STOP DAY 3 Time Period 4 3614 START TIME 4 3615 STOP TIME 4 3616 START DAY 4 3617 STOP DAY 4 Booster 3622 BOOSTER SEL 3623 BOOSTER TIME Timer 1 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC Timer 2 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC Timer 3 3628 TIMED FUNC 3 SRC Timer 4 3629 TIMED FUNC 4 SRC A parameter can be connected to only one timer Timer 1 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC Timer 2 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC gt lt 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET 1001 EXT1 COMMAN
149. BITED OFF3 CONTROL OPERATING Continue operation OFF3 inactive EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within in time specified by parameter 2208 Normal command sequence Enter OFF3 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED WARNING Be sure motor and driven equipment can be stopped using this mode INHIBIT OPERATION OPERATION ENABLED Enter OPERATION ENABLED Note the Run enable signal must be active See 1601 If 1601 is set to COMM this bit also actives the Run Enable signal OPERATION INHIBITED Inhibit operation Enter OPERATION INHIBITED RAMP OUT _ ZERO NORMAL OPERATION Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATION ENABLED RFG OUT ZERO Force ramp function generator output to Zero Drive ramps to stop current and DC voltage limits in force Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 263 ABB Drives profile FBA CONTROL WORD Bit Name Value Commanded state Comments RAMP_HOLD 1 RFG OUT ENABLED Enable ramp function Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATOR ENABLED RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping Ramp Function Generator output held RAMP_IN_ ZERO RFG INPUT ENABLED Normal operation Enter OPERATING RFG INPUT ZERO Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero RESET 0 gt 1 RESET Fault reset
150. Bit Name Value Correspond to boss the state diagram 4 OFF 2 STA 1 OFF2 inactive 0 OFF2 ACTIVE 5 OFF 3 STA 1 OFF3 inactive 0 OFF3 ACTIVE 6 SWC_ON_INHIB 1 SWITCH ON INHIBIT ACTIVE 0 SWITCH ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE 7 ALARM 1 Alarm See section Alarm listing on page 280 for details on alarms No alarm 8 AT_SETPOINT 1 OPERATING Actual value equals within tolerance limits the reference value 0 Actual value is outside tolerance limits not equal to reference value 9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location REMOTE EXT1 or EXT2 0 Drive control location LOCAL 10 ABOVE_LIMIT 1 Supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit Bit remains 1 until supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit See Group 32 SUPERVISION 0 Supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit Bit remains 0 until supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit See Group 32 SUPERVISION 11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 External control location 2 2 selected 0 External control location 1 ExT1 selected 12 EXT RUN ENABLE 1 External Run Enable signal received 0 No External Run Enable signal received 13 15 Unused Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 265 The state diagram below describes the start stop function of CONTROL WORD CW and STATUS WORD SW bits From any state From any state From any state Emergency Stop Em
151. D RUN has value 0 OFF IDMAGN and parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ or parameter 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ and parameter 2101 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST In most applications there is no need to perform a separate ID Run 9910 ID RUN 1 ON The ID Run should be selected if vector control mode is used parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ and or the operation point is near zero speed and or operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback is required Note If motor parameters Group 99 START UP DATA are changed after the ID Run it must be repeated ID Run procedure The general parameter setting procedure is not repeated here For Assistant Control Panel see page 79 and for Basic Control Panel page 97 in chapter Control panels AN De couple the motor from the driven equipment Check that the values of the motor data parameters 9905 9909 are equivalent to those on the motor nameplate as shown in the steps on page 63 If parameter values Group 01 OPERATING DATA to Group 98 OPTIONS are changed before the ID Run check that the new settings meet the following conditions 2001 MINIMUM SPEED lt 0 rpm 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED gt 80 of the motor rated speed 2003 MAXIMUM CURRENT gt long 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 gt 50 or
152. DC 2A d ELM Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 mA 24 RO2B _ 25 gt Relay output 3 programmable Default Fault 26 Maximum 250 VAC 30V DC 2A Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 mA 27 1 Digital input impedance 1 5 kohm Maximum voltage for digital inputs is 30 V Default values depend on the macro used Values specified are for the default macro See chapter Application macros on page 101 Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 56 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Note Terminals 3 6 and 9 are at the same potential Note For safety reasons the fault relay signals a fault when the drive is powered down WARNING All ELV Extra Low Voltage circuits connected to the drive must be used within a zone of equipotential bonding i e within a zone where all simultaneously accessible conductive parts are electrically connected to prevent hazardous voltages appearing between them This is accomplished by a proper factory grounding The terminals on the control board as well as on the optional modules attachable to the board fulfill the Protective Extra Low Voltage PELV requirements stated in EN 50178 provided that the external circuits connected to the terminals also fulfill the requirements and the installation site is below 2000 m 6562 ft You can wire the digital input termi
153. DS 1002 2 COMMANDS 1102 1 2 SEL 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6 8126 TIMED AUTOCHNG Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 184 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description 3601 TIMERS ENABLE Selects the source for the timer enable signal NOT SEL Timed functions are disabled 1 011 Defines digital input DI1 as the timed function enable signal digital input must be activated to enable the timed function 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the timed function enable signal 7 ACTIVE Timed functions are enabled 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the timed function enable signal This digital input must be de activated to enable the timed function e 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the timed function enable signal 3602 START TIME 1 Defines the daily start time 20 30 00 time can be changed in steps of 2 seconds Time period 2 If parameter value is 07 00 00 the timer is activated 17 00 00 at 7 a m Time period 4 The figure shows multiple timers on different 19 09 00 weekdays 13 00 00 12 00 00 Time period 3 10 30 00 Time period 1 09 00 00 00 00 00 Mo
154. Example Three faults have occurred in Sets the number of allowed automatic resets within a trial period defined trial time The last is reset only if the by 3102 TRIAL TIME value for 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS is 3 or If the number of automatic resets exceeds this limit within the trial more time the drive prevents additional automatic resets and remains stopped Trial time Starting then requires a successful reset performed from the control Time panel or from a source selected by 1604 FAULT RESET SEL x ha cal esti UNE x Automatic reset Sets the time period used for counting and limiting the number of resets See 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS 3103 DELAY TIME Sets the delay time between a fault detection and attempted drive restart If DELAY TIME zero the drive resets immediately 3104 AR OVERCURRENT Sets the automatic reset for the overcurrent function on or off 0 DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault OVERCURRENT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 3105 AR OVERVOLTAGE Sets the automatic reset for the overvoltage function on or off 0 DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault DC OVERVOLT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 3106 AR UNDERVOLTAGE Sets
155. FUNCTION 3022 2 FAULT LIMIT Sets a fault level for analog input 2 e See 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION 3023 WIRING FAULT Defines the drive response to cross wiring faults and to ground faults detected when the drive is NOT running When the drive is not running it monitors for Improper connections of input power to the drive output the drive can display fault 35 OUTPUT WIRING if improper connections are detected Ground faults the drive can display fault 16 EARTH FAULT if a ground fault is detected Also see parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT 0 DISABLE No drive response to either of the above monitoring results 1 ENABLE The drive displays faults when this monitoring detects problems 3024 CB TEMP FAULT Defines the drive response to control board overheating Not for drives with an OMIO control board 0 DISABLE No response 1 ENABLE Displays fault 37 CB OVERTEMP and the drive coasts to stop Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 173 Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET This group defines conditions for automatic resets An automatic reset occurs after a particular fault is detected The drive holds for a set delay time then automatically restarts You can limit the number of resets in a specified time period and set up automatic resets for a variety of faults Code Description 3101 OF TRIALS
156. HISTORY parameters Using the control panel in the Parameters mode select parameter 0401 Press EDIT or ENTER on the Basic Control Panel Press UP and DOWN at the same time Press SAVE quc nx Correcting alarms The recommended corrective action for alarms is Determine if the alarm requires any corrective action action is not always required Use the table in section Alarm listing below to find and address the root cause of the problem Alarm listing The following table lists the alarms by code number and describes each Alarm E code Display Description 2001 OVERCURRENT Current limiting controller is active Check for and correct Excessive motor load Insufficient acceleration time parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 Faulty motor motor cables or connections 2002 OVERVOLTAGE Overvoltage controller is active Check for and correct Static or transient overvoltages in the input power supply Insufficient deceleration time parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and 2206 DECELER TIME 2 2003 UNDERVOLTAGE Undervoltage controller is active Check for and correct Undervoltage on mains Diagnostics Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 281 Alarm code Display Description 2004 DIR LOCK The change in direction being attempted is not allowed Either Do
157. I firmware revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter configuration file Format is xyz where e major revision number e y minor revision number e 2 correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 5129 FILE CONFIG ID Displays the revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter module s configuration file identification e File configuration information is drive application program dependent 5130 FILE CONFIG REV Contains the revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter module configuration file Example 1 revision 1 5131 FBA STATUS Contains the status of the adapter module 0 IDLE Adapter not configured 1 EXECUT INIT Adapter is initializing 2 TIME OUT A timeout has occurred in the communication between the adapter and the drive 3 CONFIG ERROR Adapter configuration error The revision code of the adapter s CPI firmware revision is older than required CPI firmware version defined in the drive s configuration file parameter 5132 5128 OFF LINE Adapter is off line 5 ON LINE Adapter is on line 6 RESET Adapter is performing a hardware reset 5132 FBA CPI FW REV Contains the revision of the module s CPI program Format is xyz where e major revision number e y minor revision number e z correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 5133 FBA APPL FW REV Contains the revision of the module s application program Format is xyz see parameter 5
158. INT 10009 STATUS WORD Bit 8 SETPOINT LIMIT 10010 STATUS WORD Bit 9 REMOTE SUPERVISION 10011 STATUS WORD Bit 10 ABOVE LIMIT REV REF 10012 STATUS WORD Bit 11 EXT2 REV ACT 10013 STATUS WORD Bit 12 RUN ENABLE PANEL LOCAL 10014 STATUS WORD Bit 13 N A FIELDBUS LOCAL 10015 STATUS WORD Bit 14 N A EXT2 ACT 10016 STATUS WORD Bit 15 N A FAULT 10017 STATUS WORD Bit 16 Reserved ALARM 10018 STATUS WORD Bit 17 Reserved REQ_MAINT 10019 STATUS WORD Bit 18 Reserved DIRLOCK 10020 STATUS WORD Bit 19 Reserved LOCALLOCK 10021 STATUS WORD Bit 20 Reserved CTL_MODE 10022 STATUS WORD Bit 21 Reserved Reserved 10023 STATUS WORD Bit 22 Reserved Reserved 10024 STATUS WORD Bit 23 Reserved Reserved 10025 STATUS WORD Bit 24 Reserved Reserved 10026 STATUS WORD Bit 25 Reserved Reserved 10027 STATUS WORD Bit 26 Reserved REQ_CTL Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 235 Modbus Internal location ABB DRV DCU PROFILE ref all profiles 5305 0 OR 2 5305 1 10028 STATUS WORD Bit 27 Reserved REQ REF1 10029 STATUS WORD Bit 28 Reserved REQ REF2 10030 STATUS WORD Bit 29 Reserved REQ REF2EXT 10031 STATUS WORD Bit 30 Reserved ACK STARTINH 10032 STATUS WORD Bit 31 Reserved ACK OFF ILCK 10033 011 011 011 10034 012 012 012 10035 013 DI3 DI3 10036 0
159. INT MIN Sets the minimum value for the reference signal source See parameter 4010 4013 SETPOINT MAX Sets the maximum value for the reference signal source See parameter 4010 4014 FBK SEL Defines the PID controller feedback actual signal You can define a combination of two actual values ACT1 and ACT2 as the feedback signal Use parameter 4016 to define the source for actual value 1 ACT1 Use parameter 4017 to define the source for actual value 2 ACT2 1 ACT Actual value 1 ACT1 provides the feedback signal 2 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 3 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 plus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 4 ACT1 ACT2 ACT times ACT2 provides the feedback signal 5 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 divided by ACT2 provides the feedback signal 6 MIN ACT1 2 The smaller of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal 7 MAX ACT1 2 The greater of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal 8 sqrt ACT1 2 Square root of the value for ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 9 sqA1 sqA2 Square root of AcT1 plus the square root of ACT2 provides the feedback signal 10 sqrt AcT1 Square root of ACT1 provides the feedback signal 11 COMM 1 Signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 provides the feedback signal 12 COMM FBK 2 Signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 provides the feedback signal 13 AVE ACT1 2 The average of ACT1 and ACT2 provides th
160. Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current The normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time This selection guarantees the highest possible break away torque SCALAR FREQ mode Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current The normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time 3 SCALAR FLYST Selects the flying start mode Vector control modes Not applicable SCALAR FREQ mode The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency to start a rotating motor useful if the motor is already rotating and if the drive will start smoothly at the current frequency 4 TORQ BOOST Selects the automatic torque boost mode SCALAR FREQ mode only May be necessary in drives with high starting torque Torque boost is only applied at start ending when output frequency exceeds 20 Hz or when output frequency is equal to reference In the beginning the motor magnetizes within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current See parameter 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR 5 FLY BOOST Selects both the flying start and the torque boost mode SCALAR FREQ mode only Flying start routine is performed first and the motor is magnetized If the speed is found to be zero the torque boost is done 8 RAMP Immediate start from zero frequency 2102 STOP FUNCTION Selects th
161. Main menu ZW Fault mode e Lower right Indicators FWD forward REV reverse direction of the motor rotation Flashing slowly stopped Flashing rapidly running not at setpoint Steady running at setpoint Displayed value can be modified the Parameter and Reference modes 2 RESET EXIT Exits to the next higher menu level without saving changed values Resets faults in the Output and Fault modes 3 MENU ENTER Enters deeper into menu level In the Parameter mode saves the displayed value as the new setting 4 Up Scrolls up through a menu or list Increases a value if a parameter is selected Increases the reference value in the Reference mode Holding the key down changes the value faster 5 Down Scrolls down through a menu or list Decreases a value if a parameter is selected Decreases the reference value in the Reference mode Holding the key down changes the value faster LOC REM Changes between local and remote control of the drive DIR Changes the direction of the motor rotation STOP Stops the drive in local control START Starts the drive in local control o Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Operation 93 You operate the control panel with menus and keys You select an optio
162. NCE STEP 1 8109 START FREQ 1 Sets the frequency limit used to start the first auxiliary motor The first auxiliary motor starts if No auxiliary motors are running f Hz ACS550 output frequency exceeds the limit I 8109 1 Hz 4 P815 lt Output frequency stays above a relaxed limit 8109 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX START D 8109 1 After the first auxiliary motor starts 8109 Output frequency decreases by the value 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 P81124 In effect the output of the speed regulated motor drops to D compensate for the input from the auxiliary motor See the figure where 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 B Output frequency increase during the start delay C C Diagram showing auxiliary motor s run status as frequency 1 increases 1 On 0 Note 8109 START FREQ 1 value must be between e 8112 LOW FREQ 1 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 1 8110 START FREQ 2 Sets the frequency limit used to start the second auxiliary motor See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The second auxiliary motor starts if One auxiliary motor is running ACS550 output frequency exceeds the limit 8110 1 Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit 8110 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D 8111 START FREQ 3 Sets the frequency limit used to start the third auxiliary moto
163. ND Analog input circuit common Connected internally to chassis through 1 MQ 7 AO1 Analog output programmable Default frequency 0 20 mA load lt 500 Q 8 2 Analog output programmable Default current 0 20 mA load lt 500 Q 9 AGND Analog output circuit common Connected internally to chassis through 1 MQ 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 250 mA reference to GND Short circuit protected 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common Connected internally as floating 12 DCOM Digital input common To activate a digital input there must be 24 10 V or lt 10 V between that input and DCOM The 24 V may be provided by the E ACS550 X1 10 or by an external 12 24 V source of either polarity 5 13 DI1 Digital input 1 programmable Default start stop 5 14 012 Digital input 2 programmable Default fwd rev 15 DI3 Digital input 3 programmable Default constant speed sel code 16 014 Digital input 4 programmable Default constant speed sel code 17 DI5 Digital input 5 programmable Default ramp pair selection code 18 016 Digital input 6 programmable Default not used 19 RO1C 4 Relay output 1 programmable Default Ready 20 Maximum 250 V AC 30V DC 2A Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 mA 21 RO1B j o 2 22 RO2ZC Relay output 2 programmable Default Running 5 23 2 Maximum 250 V AC 30V
164. NGE D parameter is removed from the list of changed parameters 1 9 To cancel the new value and keep the original press 204 0 J 5 E 902 APPLIC MA EXIT 100 0 Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Fault Logger mode In the Fault Logger mode you can 85 view the drive fault history of maximum ten faults after a power off only the three latest faults are kept in the memory see the details of the three latest faults after a power off the details of only the most recent fault is kept in the memory read the help text for the fault start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to view faults Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing x if you are in the Output mode otherwise LOC UMAIN MENU 1 EXIT DARDAN by pressing CZ repeatedly until you get to the Main menu EXIT 100 00 ENTER 2 Go to the Fault Logger mode by selecting FAULT LOGGER on the menu with keys and SY 2 and pressing The display shows the fault log starting with the latest fault The number on the row is the fault code according to which the causes and corrective actions are listed in chapter Diagnostics 3 To see the details of a fault select it with keys A and Cw 2 and press DETAIL
165. NT Sets the maximum content value Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501 Maximum value refers to the maximum content value that will be converted to an analog output 1504 MINIMUM AO1 Sets the minimum output current 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 Sets the maximum output current 1506 FILTER AO1 Defines the filter time constant for Ao1 The filtered signal reaches 6396 of a step change within the time specified See the figure in parameter 1303 1505 P 1511 P 1504 P 1510 P 1505 P 1511 P 1504 P 1510 AAO mA 1502 1508 AO mA AO CONTENT P 1503 1509 AO CONTENT P 1502 1508 P 1503 1509 1507 2 CONTENT SEL Defines the content for analog output 2 See AO1 CONTENT SEL above 1508 AO2 CONTENT MIN Sets the minimum content value See AO1 CONTENT MIN above 1509 2 CONTENT Sets the maximum content value See 1 CONTENT MAX above 1510 MINIMUM 2 Sets the minimum output current See MINIMUM AO1 above Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 150 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description 1511 MAXIMUM 2 Sets the maximum output current See MAXIMUM AO1 above 1512 FILTER AO2 Defines the filter time constant for A02 See FILTER AO1 above Parameters
166. NT SEL Set 1 4110 SET POINT SEL Set 2 9 COMM AI1 4210 SET POINT SEL Ext Trim 10 coMM AI 8 COMM VALUE 1 AM Setpoint is input reference 2 Communication fault When using fieldbus control specify the drive s action if serial communication is lost 2 CONST SP7 3 LAST SPEED Drive parameter Value Description 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 NOT SEL Set for appropriate drive 1 FAULT response 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Set time delay before acting on a communication loss Feedback from the drive Inputs to the controller drive outputs have pre defined meanings established by the protocol This feedback does not require drive configuration The following table lists a sample of feedback data For a complete listing see all parameters listed in section Complete parameter descriptions on page 128 Drive parameter Protocol reference 0102 SPEED 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 0104 CURRENT 0105 TORQUE 0106 POWER 0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0301 CMD WORD 1 bit 0 STOP 0301 CMD WORD 1 bit 2 REV 0118 DI 1 3 STATUS bit 0 013 Scaling To scale the drive parameter values see the following sections as appropriate Actual Value scaling on page 269 ABB Drives profile technical data Actual Value sca
167. OC BACKUP drive to the control panel select UPLOAD TO PANEL on the Par Backup menu with keys and SY 2 and press xl During the transfer the display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion Press if you want to stop the operation After the upload is completed the display shows a message about the completion Press SI to return to the Par Backup menu perform downloads select the appropriate operation here DOWNLOAD FULL SET is used as an example on the Par Backup menu with keys CAN and S w 2 and press The display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion Press 7 if you want stop the operation After the download is completed the display shows a message about the completion Press lt to return to the Par Backup menu Copying parameters E 50 bebaarde damea ABORT 00 00 LOC MESSAGE Parameter upload successful OK 1 00 00 LOC UPAR BACKUP Downl oadi ng parameters fu set EE 50 doc eme ABORT 100 00 LOC UMESSAGE Parameter download successfully compl eted OK 00 00 Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 90 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual How to view information about the backup Step Action Display 1 Go to the
168. OR SPEED or 2 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ if 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ Add Ramped ref N Trimmed ref Switch Select par 4230 Trim scale Mul Mul gt Ext ref 1 max A off X S E Ext ref 2 max B proportional Abs max speed direct Select freq C par 4232 Trimming PID2 ref PID2 ref PID 2 9 Trimming PID2 out Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 201 Group 50 ENCODER This group defines the setup for encoder use Sets the number of encoder pulses per shaft revolution Enables the encoder operation Defines how mechanical angle and revolution data is reset See also User s Manual for Pulse Encoder Interface Module OTAC 01 3AUA0000001938 English Code Description 5001 PULSE NR Sets the number of pulses provided by an optional encoder for each full motor shaft revolution ppr 5002 ENCODER ENABLE Enables disables an optional encoder 0 DISABLE Drive uses speed feedback derived from the internal motor model applies for any setting of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 ENABLE Drive uses feedback from an optional encoder This function requires the Pulse Enc
169. P DEV Unit and scale defined by par 4006 0 0 4007 4026 WAKE UP DELAY 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 s 0 50 s 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET 6 14 1 0 SET 1 Group 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 4101 0 1 100 0 0 1 1 0 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 0 0 7 NOT SEL 0 1 3600 0 s 0 15 60 05 4103 DERIVATION TIME 0 0 10 0s 0 15 0 05 4104 PID DERIV FILTER 0 0 10 0s 0 15 1 05 4105 ERROR VALUE INV 0 NO 1 YES 1 0 4106 UNITS 0 127 1 4 96 4107 UNIT SCALE 0 4 1 1 4108 0 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 0 0 4107 4109 110096 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 100 0 4107 4110 SET POINT SEL 0 2 8 17 19 20 1 1 4111 INTERNAL SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 40 0 4107 4112 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 0 0 1 0 0 4113 500 0 500 0 0 1 100 0 4114 SEL 1 13 1 1 1 4115 MULTIPLIER 0 000 NOT SEL 32 768 32 767 0 001 0 000 NOT SEL 4116 1 INPUT 1 7 1 2 12 4117 2 INPUT 1 7 1 2 12 4118 1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4119 1 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4120 2 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4121 2 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com
170. Period 4 selected in the timer 9 1 4 Time Periods 1 and 4 selected in the timer 10 2 4 Time Periods 2 and 4 selected in the timer 11 1 2 4 Time Periods 1 2 and 4 selected in the timer 12 3 4 Time Periods 3 and 4 selected in the timer 13 T1 T3 T4 Time Periods 1 3 and 4 selected in the timer 14 2 3 4 Time Periods 2 and 4 selected in the timer 15 1 2 3 4 Time Periods 1 2 and 4 selected in the timer 16 BOOSTER Booster selected in the timer 17 1 Booster and Time Period 1 selected in the timer 18 T2 B Booster and Time Period 2 selected in the timer 19 1 2 Booster and Time Periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer 20 T3 B Booster and Time Period 3 selected in the timer Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 186 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description 21 T1 T3 B Booster and Time Periods 1 and selected in the timer 22 T2 T3 B Booster and Time Periods 2 and selected in the timer 23 1 2 3 Booster and Time Periods 1 2 and selected in the timer 24 T4 B Booster and Time Period 4 selected in the timer 25 1 4 Booster and Time Periods 1 and 4 selected in the timer 26 2 4 Booster and Time Periods 2 and 4 selected in the timer 27 1 2 4 Booster and Time Periods 1
171. RATING DATA signals signal at a time start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control You get to the Output mode by pressing CZ until the display shows text OUTPUT at the bottom The display shows the value of one Group 01 49 OPERATING DATA signal The unit is shown on the REM right Page 98 tells how to select up to three signals to joutput FWD be monitored in the Output mode The table below shows how to view them one at a time How to browse the monitored signals Step Action Display 1 If more than one signals have been selected to be monitored see page 4 1 98 you browse them the Output mode RE hz To browse the signals forward press key repeatedly To browse OUTPUT FWD them backward press key lt _ 2 repeatedly 0 D RE OUTPUT F WD 101 OUTPUT F WD Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 96 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Reference mode In the Reference mode you can set the speed frequency or torque reference start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to set the speed frequency or torque reference Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing X if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing 77 repeatedly u
172. RO3A Default operation 1 0 SPEED 1 1202 27 RO3B Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 277 7 5 SPEED 2 1203 Fault gt 25 connected to 26 1 1 CONST SPEED 3 1204 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Analog reference 11 Analog output AO1 Frequency J1 Start stop and direction DI1 2 Analog output AO2 Current 9 11 0 10 V e Constant speed selection 013 4 Relay output 1 Ready 9 gt AI2 0 4 20 mA Ramp pair 1 of 2 selection 015 Relay output 2 Running or Relay output 3 Fault 1 v1 o 1 0 10 V w 117 AI2 0 4 20 mA Application macros Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 3 wire macro 103 This macro is used when the drive is controlled using momentary push buttons It provides three 3 constant speeds To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 2 3 WIRE Note When the stop input DI2 is deactivated no input the control panel start stop buttons are disabled Connection example X1 1 10 kohm d1 SCR Signal cable shield screen nf 2 Al External speed reference 1 0 10 V 3 AGND Analog input circui
173. S WORD 2 1 0 0305 WORD 1 1 0 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 117 Code Range Resolution Default User S 0306 FAULT WORD 2 1 0 0307 FAULT WORD 1 0 0308 ALARM WORD 1 1 0 0309 ALARM WORD 2 1 0 Group 04 FAULT HISTORY 0401 LAST FAULT Fault codes panel displays as text 1 0 0402 FAULT TIME 1 Date dd mm yy power on time in days 1 day 0 0403 FAULT TIME 2 Time hh mm ss 2s 0 0404 SPEED AT FLT 32768 32767 1 rpm 0 0405 FREQ AT FLT 3276 8 3276 7 0 1 Hz 0 0406 VOLTAGE AT FLT 0 0 6553 5 0 1V 0 0407 CURRENT AT FLT 0 0 6553 5 01 0 0408 TORQUE AT FLT 3276 8 3276 7 0 1 0 0409 STATUS AT FLT 0 0xFFFF hex 1 0 0410 1 3 AT FLT 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0 0411 4 6 AT FLT 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 par 0401 1 0 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 par 0401 1 0 Group 10 START STOP DIR 1001 1 COMMANDS 0 14 1 2 011 2 Y 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 0 14 1 0 NOT SEL Y 1003 DIRECTION 1 FORWARD 2 REVERSE 1 3 REQUEST Y 3 REQUEST 1004 JOGGING SEL 6 6 1 NOT SEL Y Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT 1101 REF SEL 1 REF1 Hz rpm 2 REF2 1 1 REF1 Hz rpm 1102 ExT EXT2
174. SEL 6 12 1 0 ExT1 Y 1103 REF1 SELECT 0 17 20 21 1 1 KEYPAD Y 1104 REF1 MIN 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 0 0 Hz 0 rpm 1105 REF1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 02 50 0 Hz 1500 rpm U2 60 0 Hz 1800 rpm 1106 REF2 SELECT 0 17 19 21 1 2 12 Y 1107 2 MIN 0 0 100 0 0 0 600 0 for torque 0 196 0 096 1108 REF2 0 0 100 0 0 0 600 0 for torque 0 1 100 096 Group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 14 19 1 9 DI3 4 Y 1202 CONST SPEED 1 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 02 300 rpm 5 0 Hz U2 360 rpm 6 0 Hz 1203 8 SPEED 2 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 02 600 rpm 10 0 Hz U2 720 rpm 12 0 Hz 1204 CONST SPEED 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 02 900 rpm 15 0 Hz U2 1080 rpm 18 0 Hz 1205 CONST SPEED 4 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 02 1200 rpm 20 0 Hz U2 1440 rpm 24 0 Hz 1206 CONST SPEED 5 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 02 1500 rpm 25 0 Hz U2 1800 rpm 30 0 Hz Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 118 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Range Resolution Default User S 1207 CONST SPEED 6 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 H
175. SP FORM CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Signal 2 parameter 3411 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM Signal 3 parameter 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM 3 Select the units to be displayed for the signals This has no effect if parameter LOC UPAR EDIT 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT For details see parameter 3405 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Signal 1 parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT H Z Signal 2 parameter 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT 3 Signal 3 parameter 3419 OUTPUTS UNIT CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 4 Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the minimum and maximum LOC UPAR EDIT display values This has no effect if parameter 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN DIRECT For details see parameters 3406 and 3407 H Z Signal 1 parameters 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN and 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX Signal 2 parameters 3473 OUTPUT2 MIN and 3414 OUTPUT2 MAX CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Signal 3 parameters 3420 OUTPUT3 MIN and 3421 OUTPUT3 MAX LOC UPAR EDIT 3407 OUTPUTI MAX 500 0 Hz CANCEL 1 00 00 SAVE Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 81 Assistants mode When the drive is first powered up the Start up Assistant guides you through the setup of the basic parameters The Start up Assistant is divided into assistants each of which guides you through the task of specifying a related parameter set for example Motor Set up or PID Control You can activate the assistants one after the other as the Start up Assista
176. SPEEDS This group defines up to three critical speeds or ranges of speeds that are to be avoided due for example to mechanical resonance problems at certain speeds Code Description 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL foutput Sets the critical speeds function on or off The critical speed A function avoids specific speed ranges 0 Disables the critical speeds function SZ 1 ON Enables the critical speeds function 46 Example To avoid speeds at which a fan system vibrates badly Determine problem speed ranges Assume they are found to 23 18 23 2 46 52 2 18 Set 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL 1 1 Set 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 18 Hz Set 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 23 Hz r gt frer Hz Set 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO 46 Hz fil Set 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 52 Hz 18 23 46 52 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 1 The value must be less than or equal to 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI Units are rpm unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ then units are Hz 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 1 e The value must be greater than or equal to 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO Units are rpm unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ then units are Hz 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 2 See parameter 2502 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI
177. SS PID SET 2 You can select between the two different sets by using parameter 4027 Typically two different PID controller sets are used when the load of the motor changes considerably from one situation to another You can use External PID PID2 defined in Group 42 EXT TRIM PID in two different ways Instead of using additional PID controller hardware you can set outputs of the 5550 to control a field instrument like a damper or a valve In this case set parameter 4230 to value O 0 is the default value You can use External PID PID2 to trim or fine tune the speed of the ACS550 Code Description 4001 GAIN Defines the PID controller s gain The setting range is 0 1 100 At 0 1 the PID controller output changes one tenth as much as the error value At 100 the PID controller output changes one hundred times as much as the error value Use the proportional gain and integration time values to adjust the responsiveness of the system Alow value for proportional gain and a high value for integral time ensures stable operation but provides sluggish response If the proportional gain value is too large or the integral time too short the system can become unstable Procedure Initially set 4001 GAIN 0 1 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 7 20 seconds Start the system and see if it reaches the setpoint quickly while maintaining stable operation If not increase GAIN 4001 until the
178. See DI1 INV above Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 163 Group 23 SPEED CONTROL This group defines variables used for speed control operation Code Description 2301 PROP GAIN 1 Sets the relative gain for the speed controller Integration time 0 Larger values may cause speed oscillation i Tp Derivation time 0 The figure shows the speed controller output after an error step error remains constant Error value Note You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set the proportional gain Controller output Controller output Error value Kp e j gt Sets the integration time for the speed B controller Gain K 1 The integration time defines the rate at which T Integration time gt 0 the controller output changes for a constant Kp e Tp Derivation time 0 error value Shorter integration times correct continuous errors faster Control becomes unstable if the integration time is too short The figure shows the speed controller output after an error step error remains constant Note You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set the integration time e Error value 2303 DERIVATION TIME Sets the derivation time for the speed controller Derivative action makes the control more res
179. T 100 00 SEL 3 To show hide the clock select CLOCK VISIBLILITY on the menu press LOC 0 VI SI B 1 X3 select Show clock Hide clock and press X or if you want return de cloc to the previous display without making changes press e EXIT 100 00 SEL To specify the date format select DATE FORMAT on the menu press 4 LOC DATE FORMAT and select a suitable format Press SI to save or to cancel your mm dd yy dd mm yyyy changes mm dd yyyy ANCEL 00 00 OK To specify the time format select TIME FORMAT on the menu press SI LOC UTI ME FORMAT 3 OK CANCEL and select a suitable format Press wi to save or CT to cancel your 12 hour changes CANCELI00 00 OK To set the time select SET TIME on the menu and press S Specify the LOC USET TIME OK A hours with keys and lt w 2 and press Then specify the minutes p OK y CANCEL 5 15 4 1 ress lt to save or wa to cancel your changes CANCEL 1 00 00 OK Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 87 Step Action To set the date select SET DATE on the menu and press Specify the first part of the date day or month depending on the selected date format with keys A and SY 7 and press X Repeat for the second part After Ok CANCEL s
180. T1 EXT2 based on the fieldbus control word Bit 5 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 defines the active external control location EXT1 or EXT2 See Fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 9 TIMED FUNC 1 Assigns control to EXT or EXT2 based on the state of the Timed Function Timed Function activated EXT2 Timed Function de activated ExT1 See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 10 12 TIMED FUNC 2 4 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the Timed Function See TIMED FUNC 1 above 1 DIT INV Assigns control to EXT or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 D11 activated EXT1 011 de activated EXT2 2 6 DIZ INV DIG INV Assigns control to EXT or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 INV above 1103 REF1 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF1 0 KEYPAD Defines the control panel as the reference source 1 Al1 Defines analog input 1 A11 as the reference EXT REF 1 MIN source gt 2 Al2 Defines analog input 2 12 as the reference EXT REF 1 MIN source 3 Al1 JoYST Defines analog input 1 11 configured for joystick operation as the reference source EXT REF 1 MAX minimum input signal runs the drive at the maximum 2V 4 mA reference in the reverse direction Define the minimum 0 V 0 mA using parameter 1104 The maximum input signal runs the drive at maximum reference in the forward d
181. U 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Defines the minimum expected value for the first display parameter Use parameters 3402 3403 3406 and 3407 for example to convert a Group 01 OPERATING DATA parameter such as 0102 sPEED in P 3407 i rpm to the speed of a conveyor driven by the motor in ft min For such a conversion the source values in the figure are the min and max motor speed and the display values are the corresponding min T Display value and max conveyor speed Use parameter 3405 to select the proper 3406 units for the display Note Selecting units does not convert values Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT 3403 SIGNAL1 MAX Defines the maximum expected value for the first display parameter Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT 3404 1 DSP FORM l gt P3402 P 3403 Source value Defines the decimal point location for the first display parameter P 0 7 Defines the decimal point location Signed Enter the number of digits desired to the right of the decimal 1 3 1 Sig point 2 3 14 See the table for an example using pi 3 14159 3 3 142 8 BAR METER Specifies a bar meter display 4 3 0 65535 9 DIRECT Decimal point location and units of measure are 5 3 1 Unsigned identical to the source signal See G
182. US EU US 10 32 38 17 41 50 23 50 60 30 500 500 30 20 31 37 30 42 50 40 50 60 50 500 500 50 30 31 37 43 42 50 57 50 60 70 500 500 70 10 73 88 17 98 117 23 120 144 30 500 500 30 20 71 86 30 99 119 40 120 144 50 500 500 50 New parameters BR N aj a aj OO Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 190 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 This group defines a set of parameters used with the Process PID PID1 controller Typically only parameters in this group are needed PID controller Basic set up In PID control mode the drive compares a reference signal setpoint to an actual signal feedback and automatically adjusts the speed of the drive to match the two signals The difference between the two signals is the error value Typically PID control mode is used when the speed of a motor needs to be controlled based on pressure flow or temperature In most cases when there is only 1 transducer signal wired to the ACS550 only parameter group 40 is needed The following is a schematic of setpoint feedback signal flow using parameter group
183. Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1601 RUN ENABLE 7 COMM Run enable by fieldbus 40001 bit 3 40031 bit 6 inverted 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 8 COMM Fault reset by fieldbus 40001 bit 7 40031 bit 4 1606 LOCAL LOCK 8 COMM Source for local lock selection is Does not 40031 bit 14 the fieldbus apply 1607 PARAM SAVE 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters to 41607 memory then value returns to 0 1608 START ENABLE 1 7 COMM Source for start enable 1 is the Does not 40032 bit 2 fieldbus Command word apply 1609 START ENABLE 2 7 COMM Source for start enable 2 is the 40032 bit 3 fieldbus Command word 2013 MIN TORQUE SEL 7 COMM Source for minimum torque 40031 bit 15 selection is the fieldbus 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL 7 COMM Source for maximum torque selection is the fieldbus 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL 7 COMM Source for ramp pair selection is 40031 bit 10 the fieldbus Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 225 Relay output con
184. a Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 302 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Cooling Cooling Specifications Method Internal fan flow direction from front to top Free space around the drive See the table on page 29 for required free space around the drive Dimensions weights and noise The dimensions and mass for the ACS550 depend on the frame size and enclosure type refer to section Dimension drawings on page 308 Frame H D Weight Noise size mm in mm in mm in kg Ib dB R7 1507 59 33 250 9 84 520 20 47 115 254 71 R8 2024 79 68 347 13 66 617 24 29 230 507 72 00467918 xls B Degrees of protection Available enclosures P21 UL type 1 enclosure The site must be free of airborne dust corrosive gases or liquids and conductive contaminants such as condensation carbon dust and metallic particles Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Ambient conditions 303 The following table lists the ACS550 environmental requirements Ambient environment requirements Installation site Storage and transportation in the protective package Altitude 0 1000 m 0 3 300 ft 1000 2000 m 3 300 6 600 ft if and hy derated 1 every 100 m above 1000 m 300 ft above 3 300 ft A
185. a character error received by the drive 5309 EFB STATUS Contains the status of the EFB protocol 0 IDLE EFB protocol is configured but not receiving any messages 1 EXECUT INIT EFB protocol is initializing 2 TIME OUT A timeout has occurred in the communication between the network master and the EFB protocol 3 CONFIG ERROR EFB protocol has a configuration error 4 OFF LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are NOT addressed to this drive 5 ON LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are addressed to this drive 6 RESET EFB protocol is performing a hardware reset 7 LISTEN ONLY EFB protocol is in listen only mode 5310 EFB PAR 10 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40005 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 205 Code Description 5311 EFB PAR 11 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40006 5312 EFB PAR 12 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40007 5313 EFB PAR 13 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40008 5314 EFB PAR 14 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40009 5315 EFB PAR 15 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40010 5316 EFB PAR 16 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40011 5317 EFB PAR 17 S
186. al communication diagnostics Besides the drive fault codes the FBA module has diagnostic tools Refer to the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 262 ABB Drives profile technical data Overview ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple protocols including protocols available on the FBA module This section describes the ABB Drives profile implemented for FBA modules Control Word As described earlier in section Control interface on page 252 the CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives profile ABB Drives profile FBA CONTROL WORD Bit Name Value Commanded state Comments OFF1 CONTROL 1 READY TO OPERATE Enter READY TO OPERATE 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive ramps to stop according to currently active deceleration ramp 2203 or 2205 Normal command sequence Enter OFF1 ACTIVE Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks OFF2 OFF3 are active OFF2 CONTROL OPERATING Continue operation OFF2 inactive EMERGENCY OFF Drive coasts to stop Normal command sequence Enter OFF2 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCHON INHI
187. al input enable the LOC selection 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for setting the local lock See 011 above 7 ON Sets the lock The control panel cannot select LOC and cannot control the drive 8 coMM Defines bit 14 of the Command Word 1 as the control for setting the local lock The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input 011 as the control for setting the local lock De activating the digital input locks out local control Activating the digital input enable the LOC selection 2 6 DIZ INv DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for setting the local lock See DI1 INV above 1607 PARAM SAVE Saves all altered parameters to permanent memory Parameters altered through a fieldbus are not automatically saved to permanent memory To save you must use this parameter If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 2 NOT SAVED parameters altered from the control panel are not saved To save you must use this parameter If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 1 OPEN parameters altered from the control panel are stored immediately to permanent memory DONE Value changes automatically when all parameters are saved 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters to permanent memory Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550
188. al point in the rating for the current For example XXX 8A8 indicates a nominal current rating of 8 8 A e Y The voltage rating of the drive where Y 2 indicates a 208 240 V rating 4 indicates a 380 480 V rating 6 indicates a 500 600 V rating 3305 PARAMETER TABLE Contains the version of the parameter table used in the drive Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 177 Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY This group defines the content for control panel display middle area when the control panel is in the Output mode Code Description 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM P 3404 P 3405 Selects the first parameter by number displayed on the control panel LOC Y Definitions in this group define display content when the control P3401 137 4 49 11 Hz panel is in the control mode P3408 138 0 5 Any parameter number in Group 01 OPERATING DATA can be 0 selected P3415 139 10 7 Using the following parameters the display value can be scaled DIR 00 00 MENU converted to convenient units and or displayed as a bar graph The figure identifies selections made by parameters in this group 7 a 100 NOT SELECTED First parameter not displayed ee 101 159 Displays parameter 0101 0159 If parameter does not P 3404 1 0 4 exist the display shows n a 24 4 _ DIR 100 00 MEN
189. al voltage 400 V or 460 V Heavy duty use 50 overload capability long continuous rms current 50 overload is allowed for one minute in ten minutes Pha typical motor power The power ratings apply to most IEC 34 or NEMA 4 pole motors at the nominal voltage 400 V or 460 V Sizing The current ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage range To achieve the rated motor power given in the table the rated current of the drive must be higher than or equal to the rated motor current Note 1 The maximum allowed motor shaft power is limited to 1 5 Pha If the limit is exceeded motor torque and current are automatically restricted The function protects the input bridge of the drive against overload Note 2 The ratings apply in ambient temperature of 40 104 F Derating The load capacity current and power decreases if the installation site altitude exceeds 1000 meters 3300 ft or if the ambient temperature exceeds 40 C 104 F Temperature derating In the temperature range 40 C 50 C 104 F 122 F the rated output current is decreased 1 for every 1 C 1 8 F above 40 104 F Calculate the output current by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor Example If the ambient temperature is 50 C 122 F the derating factor is 100 1 C 10 C 90 or 0 90 The output current is then 0 90 hy or 0 90 bong Altitude
190. alue faster LOC REM Changes between local and remote control of the drive Help Displays context sensitive information when the key is pressed The information displayed describes the item currently highlighted in the center of the display STOP Stops the drive in local control START Starts the drive in local control Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 73 Status line The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive LOC SG 49 LHz LOC UMAIN MENU 1 0 4 00 9 4 No Field Alternatives Significance 1 Control location LOC Drive control is local that is from the control panel REM Drive control is remote such as the drive I O or fieldbus 2 State vU Forward shaft direction S Reverse shaft direction Rotating arrow Drive is running at setpoint Dotted rotating arrow Drive is running but not at setpoint Stationary arrow Drive is stopped Dotted stationary arrow Start command is present but the motor is not running e g because start enable is missing 3 Panel operation Name of the current mode mode Name of the list or menu shown Name of the operation state e g PAR EDIT 4 Reference value Reference value in the Output mode or number of the Number of the highlighted item
191. ameter 1401 0 NOT SEL Defines the control panel using parameter 9902 as the only control for changing User Parameter Sets 1 011 Defines digital input 011 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the falling edge of the digital input The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the rising edge of the digital input The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets See 011 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the rising edge of the digital input The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the falling edge of the digital input The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets See DI1 INV above 1606 LOCAL LOCK Defines control for the use of the LOC mode The LOC mode allows drive control from the control panel When LOCAL LOCK is active the control panel cannot change to LOC mode 0 NOT SEL Disables the lock The control panel can select LOC and control the drive 1 011 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for setting the local lock Activating the digital input locks out local control De activating the digit
192. analog input for 0 20 mA current signal Calculate the minimum 4 mA as a percent of full range 20 mA 4 mA 20 mA 100 20 1302 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum value of the analog input Define value as a percent of the full analog signal range The maximum analog input signal corresponds to 1105 REF1 MAX or 1108 REF2 MAX See the figure at parameter 1104 1303 FILTER AH y Defines the filter time constant for analog input 1 11 The filtered signal reaches 63 of a step change within the time 2 specified 100 4 Unfiltered signal Bears Filtered signal Se Time constant 1304 MINIMUM AI2 Defines the minimum value of the analog input See MINIMUM AI1 above 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 Defines the maximum value of the analog input e See MAXIMUM AI1 above 1306 FILTER Al2 Defines the filter time constant for analog input 2 12 e See FILTER AI1 above Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 146 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS This group defines the condition that activates each of the relay outputs Code Description 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 1 what relay output 1 means 0 NOT SEL Relay is not used and is de energized 1 READY Energize relay when drive is ready to function Requires
193. and Activation starts the drive 14 DI2 EXT1 EXT2 selection Activation selects PID control 15 DI3 Constant speed selection 1 Not used in PID control 16 014 Constant speed selection 2 Not used in PID control 17 015 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 18 DIG Start Stop PID Activation starts the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A Default operation Note 2 Code 21 RO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 0 open 1 connected 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable DI31DI4 Output 23 RO2A x Default operation 0 10 Reference through 24 RO2B P Running gt 22 connected to 24 H 0 CONST SPEED 1 1202 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable 0 1H CONST SPEED 2 1203 26 RO3A A Default operation 27 RO3B Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 1 1 CONST SPEED 9 1204 Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Analog reference 11 Analog output AO1 Speed J1 Actual value 12 Analog output AO2 Current gy Alt 0 10V Start stop hand PID 011 6 Relay output 1 Ready 9 Al2 0 4 20 mA EXT1 EXT2 selection DI2 Relay output 2 Running or Constant speed selection DI3 4 Relay output 3 Fault 1 J1 Run enable DI5 EN o Al 0 10 V 2107 Al2 0 4 20 mA Note Use the following switch on order 1 EXT1 EXT2 2 Run Enable 3 Start Application macros Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cl
194. ant speed 3 when both Timed functions 1 and 2 are active TIMER1 TIMER2 Function 0 0 External reference 1 0 Constant speed 1 1202 0 1 Constant speed 2 1203 1 1 Constant speed 3 1204 2 CS1 2 3 4 Selects Constant speed 1 when no timer is active selects Constant speed 2 when only Timed function 1 is active selects Constant speed 3 when only Timed function 2 is active selects Constant speed 4 when both Timed functions are active TIMER1 TIMER2 Function 0 0 speed 1 1202 1 0 Constant speed 2 1203 0 1 Constant speed 3 1204 1 1 Constant speed 4 1205 S Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 145 Group 13 ANALOG INPUTS This group defines the limits and the filtering for analog inputs Code Description 1301 MINIMUM Al1 Defines the minimum value of the analog input Define value as a percent of the full analog signal range See example below The minimum analog input signal corresponds to 1104 REF1 MIN or 1107 REF2 MIN MINIMUM AI cannot be greater than MAXIMUM Al These parameters reference and analog min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the reference See the figure at parameter 1104 Example To set the minimum analog input value to 4 mA Configure the
195. ar 1105 p go 50 100 REF2 COMM AI1 COMM 96 Al 96 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus reference correction coefficient 100 0 5 Par 1108 1000 7774 7 77 l i Al1 input signal 100 0 5 par 1108 gt o 50 100 REF2 1 COMM 96 Al 96 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus reference correction coefficient 20096 1005 7774 77777 l Al input signal 0 gt 0 50 100 Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 250 Reference handling ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Use Group 10 START STOP DIR parameters to configure for control of rotation direction for each control location EXT1 and EXT2 The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce REFERENCE values REF1 and REF2 Note fieldbus references are bipolar that is they can be positive or negative ABB Drives profile Parameter Value setting Al referen ce scaling 1003 DIRECTION 1 FORWARD Max ref 1 1 Fieldbus Resultant ref reference 1 63 100 100 163 1003 DIRECTION 2 REVERSE Fieldbus 163 100 Resultant ref 100 163 reference Max ref 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST
196. arameter write not allowed when factory macro is selected Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 239 ABB control profiles technical data Overview ABB Drives profile The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple protocols including Modbus and the protocols available on the FBA module Two implementations of the ABB Drives profile are available e ABB DRV FULL This implementation standardizes the control interface with ACS600 and ACS800 drives ABB DRV LIM This implementation standardizes the control interface with ACS400 drives This implementation does not support two control word bits supported by ABB DRV FULL Except as noted the following ABB Drives Profile descriptions apply to both implementations DCU profile The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits It is the internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus environment Control Word The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The fieldbus master station sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive The drive switches between states according to the bit coded instructions in the CONTROL WORD Using the CONTROL WORD requires that e e e The drive is in remote REM control The serial communication channel is defined
197. are connected in parallel the auxiliary voltage for these control connections must be taken from a single source which can either be one of the drives or an external supply Safety Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com gt gt gt gt EB ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual WARNING Disconnect the EMC filter frame size R7 and the varistor network frame sizes R7 and R8 when installing the drive on an IT system an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohm power system otherwise the system will be connected to earth potential through the EMC filter capacitors or varistor network This may cause danger or damage the drive Disconnect the EMC filter frame size R7 and the varistor network frame sizes R7 and R8 when installing the drive on a corner grounded TN system otherwise the drive will be damaged WARNING Do not control the motor with the disconnecting device disconnecting means instead use the control panel start and stop keys and CQ or commands via the I O board of the drive The maximum allowed number of charging cycles of the DC capacitors i e power ups by applying power is five in ten minutes WARNING The ACS550 02 U2 is a field repairable drive In case of service or repair of malfunctioning drive contact your local Authorized Service Centre for service WARNING The ACS550 will start up automatically after an inp
198. ask 99 EXIT 00 00 00 Press key lt lt to highlight and then press 4 to move to the following task without doing the suggested task EXIT Press tz to stop the Start up Assistant SAVING A USER PARAMETER SET AND FINAL CHECK The start up is now completed However it might be useful at this stage to set the parameters required by your application and save the settings as a user parameter set as instructed in section User parameter sets on page 111 After the whole set up is completed check there are no faults or alarms shown on the display and the panel LED is green and does not blink The drive is now ready for use Start up control with I O and ID Run Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 68 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual How to control the drive through the I O interface The table below instructs how to operate the drive through the digital and analog inputs when the motor start up is performed and the default standard parameter settings are valid Displays of the Basic Control Panel are shown as an example PRELIMINARY SETTINGS If you need to change the direction of rotation check that parameter 1003 is set to 3 REQUEST Ensure that the control connections are wired according to the See section ABB Standard connection diagram given for the ABB Standard macro macro on page 102 Ensure that the drive i
199. ating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command De activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for Emergency stop command De activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command Activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command See DI1 INV above 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR Sets the maximum supplied current during torque boost See parameter 2101 START FUNCTION Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 160 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description 2112 ZERO SPEED DELAY Defines the delay for the Zero Speed Delay function If parameter value is set to zero the Zero Speed Delay function is disabled The function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick restarting is essential During the delay the drive knows accurately the rotor position No Zero Speed Delay With Zero Speed Delay Speed Speed Speed controller switched off Motor coasts to stop Speed controller remains live Motor is decelerated to true 0 speed lt gt Delay Zero speed delay can be us
200. ation about the installation of ACS550 U2 drives Checking the compatibility of the motor 1 2 Select the motor according to the needs of the application Select the drive according to the rating tables in chapter Technical data on page 293 Use the DriveSize PC tool if the default load cycles are not applicable Check that the motor ratings lie within the allowed ranges of the drive control program e motor nominal voltage is 1 2 2 Uy of the drive e motor nominal current is 1 6 2 ong of the drive in vector control and 0 2 in scalar control The control mode is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE Consult the motor manufacturer before using a motor in a drive system where the motor nominal voltage differs from the AC power source voltage Ensure that the motor insulation system withstands the maximum peak voltage in the motor terminals See section Requirements table on page 16 for the required motor insulation system and drive filtering Example 1 When the supply voltage is 440 V the maximum peak voltage in the motor terminals can be approximated as follows 440 V 1 35 2 1190 V Check that the motor insulation system withstands this voltage Protecting the motor winding and bearings The output of the drive comprises regardless of output frequency pulses of approximately 1 35 times the mains network voltage with a very short rise time This is the case with all drives emplo
201. ation is not needed with AC drives However if a drive is to be connected in a system with compensation capacitors installed note the following restrictions WARNING Do not connect power factor compensation capacitors or surge absorbers to the motor cables between the drive and the motor They are not meant to be used with AC drives and can cause permanent damage to the drive or themselves If there are power factor compensation capacitors in parallel with the three phase input of the drive Do not connect a high power capacitor to the power line while the drive is connected The connection will cause voltage transients that may trip or even damage the drive If capacitor load is increased decreased step by step when the AC drive is connected to the power line Ensure that the connection steps are low enough not to cause voltage transients that would trip the drive Check that the power factor compensation unit is suitable for use in systems with AC drives i e harmonic generating loads In such systems the compensation unit should typically be equipped with a blocking reactor or harmonic filter Planning the electrical installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 24 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Equipment connected to the motor cable Installation of safety switches contactors connection boxes etc To minimize the emission level when safety switches conta
202. ation stops constant speed motor 18 DI6 Start Stop PFC Activation starts the drive 19 1 Relay output 1 programmable Note 2 20 RO1A x Default operation The sensor needs to be powered 21lRO1B Running gt 19 connected to 214 See the manufacturer s instructions 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable A connection Saint OE DNO WIRG 23 RO2A Default operation sensor is shown on page 110 24 RO2B Fault 1 gt 22 connected to 24 Fault gt 22 connected to 23 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable 26 RO3A Default operation 27 j Auxiliary motor switched on gt 25 connected to 27 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Analog ref and actual 1 2 Start stop manual PFC DI1 6 Analog output AO1 Frequency J1 Analog output AO2 Actual 1 Q Al1 0 10V Runenable DI2 Relay output 1 Running 9 y 2 0 4 20 mA EXT1 EXT2 selection 013 Relay output 2 Fault 1 or Interlock 014 5 e Relay output 3 Aux motor ON J1 o 1 0 10 V w 117 AI2 0 4 20 mA Note Use the following switch on order 1 EXT1 EXT2 2 Run Enable 3 Start Application macros Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Torque Control macro 109 This macro provides parameter settings for applications that require torque control of the motor C
203. atus On off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to PFC m 1404 ON DELAY 1405 OFF DELAY 1406 RO 2 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 2 e See RO 1 ON DELAY 1407 RO 2 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 2 See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1408 RO 3 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 3 See RO 1 ON DELAY Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 148 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description 1409 RO 3 OFF DELAY Switch off delay for relay 3 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1410 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 4 6 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 4 6 what relay output 4 6 means See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1413 RO 4 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 4 See RO 1 ON DELAY 1414 RO 4 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 4 See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1415 RO 5 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 5 See RO 1 ON DELAY 1416 RO 5 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 5 See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1417 RO 6 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 6 See RO 1 ON DELAY 1418 RO 6 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 6 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773
204. be near R7 and R8 100 C 212 F Check for and correct Fan failure Obstructions in the air flow Dirt or dust coating on the heat sink Excessive ambient temperature Excessive motor load 2010 MOTOR TEMP Motor is hot based on either the drive s estimate or on temperature feedback This alarm warns that a MOT OVERTEMP fault trip may be near Check Check for overloaded motor Adjust the parameters used for the estimate 3005 3009 e Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS 2011 RESERVED Not used 2012 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in the stall region This alarm warns that a MOTOR STALL fault trip may be near Diagnostics Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 282 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Alarm coda Display Description 2013 AUTORESET This alarm warns that the drive is about to perform an automatic fault Note 1 reset which may start the motor To control automatic reset use Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET 2014 AUTOCHANGE This alarm warns that the PFC autochange function is active Note 1 Tocontrol PFC use Group 81 PFC CONTROL and the PFC macro on page 108 2015 PFC I LOCK This alarm warns that the PFC interlocks are active which means that the drive cannot start the following Any motor when Autochange is used
205. be unique 5303 EFB BAUD RATE Defines the communication speed of the RS485 link in kbits per second kb s 1 2 kb s 2 4 kb s 4 8 kb s 9 6 kb s 19 2 kb s 38 4 kb s 57 6 kb s 76 8 kb s 5304 EFB PARITY Defines the data length parity and stop bits to be used with the RS485 link communication The same settings must be used in all on line stations 0 8 NONE 1 8 data bits no parity one stop bit 1 8 NONE 2 8 data bits no parity two stop bits 2 8 EVEN 1 8 data bits even parity one stop bit 3 8 ODD 1 8 data bits odd parity one stop bit 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE Selects the communication profile used by the EFB protocol ABB DRV Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used ACS400 1 DCU PROFILE Operation of Control Status Words conforms to 32 bit DCU Profile 2 ABB DRV FULL Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS600 800 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES Contains a count of valid messages received by the drive During normal operation this counter is increasing constantly 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error received by the drive For high counts check Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors e CRC calculations for possible errors 5308 EFB UART ERRORS Contains a count of the messages with
206. ccelerating using Group 22 frequency ramp This PFC deceleration ramp ACCEL DECEL parameters 2202 or 2205 Applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary B speed regulated motor decelerating using Group motor is switched on 22 ACCEL DECEL parameters 2203 or 2206 Replaces the deceleration ramp defined in Group 22 At aux motor start speed regulated motor decelerates ACCEL DECEL using 8125 DEC IN AUX START Applies only until the output of the regulated motor At aux motor stop speed regulated motor accelerates decreases by an amount equal to the output of the using 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP auxiliary motor Then the deceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies 0 NOT SEL 0 1 1800 Activates this function using the value entered as the deceleration time 8126 TIMED AUTOCHNG Sets the autochange using a Timed function See parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL O NOT SEL 1 TIMED FUNC 1 Enables autochange when Timed function 1 is active 2 4 TIMED FUNC 2 4 Enables autochange when Timed function 2 4 is active 8127 MOTORS Sets the actual number of PFC controlled motors maximum 7 motors 1 speed regulated 3 connected direct on line and 3 spare motors This value includes also the speed regulated motor This value must be compatible with the number of relays allocated to PFC if the Autochange function is used If Autochange function is not used the speed regulated motor does not ne
207. ch set contains parameter settings including Group 99 START UP DATA and the results of the motor identification run USER S1 LOAD 2 USER S2 LOAD With these the user parameter sets can be taken back in use 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE Selects the motor control mode 1 VECTOR SPEED sensorless vector control mode Reference 1 is speed reference in rpm Reference 2 is speed reference in 100 is absolute maximum speed equal to the value of parameter 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 2001 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the maximum speed 2 VECTOR TORQ Reference 1 is speed reference in rpm Reference 2 is torque reference in 100 is nominal torque 3 SCALAR FREQ scalar control mode Reference 1 is frequency reference in Hz Reference 2 is frequency reference in 10096 is absolute maximum frequency equal to the value of parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ or 2007 MINIMUM FREQ if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the maximum speed Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 129 Code Description 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT Defines the nominal motor voltage Must equal the value on the motor rating plate Output voltage The ACS550 cannot supply the motor with a voltage greater than the input A power mains voltage 9906 MOTOR
208. ck signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFC Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays P 8118 P 8118 0 011 013 Free Not allowed DI4 Speed Reg Motor DI5 DI6 Free 1 011 013 Free DI1 DI3 Free DI4 Speed Reg Motor DI4 First PFC Relay 015 First PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 2 011 013 Free DI1 DI3 Free DI4 Speed Reg Motor DI4 First PFC Relay DI5 First PFC Relay 015 Second PFC Relay DI6 Second PFC Relay DI6 Free 3 Not allowed DI1 DI3 Free DI4 First PFC Relay 015 Second PFC Relay DI6 Third PFC Relay 4 6 Notallowed Not allowed Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 215 Code Description 5 015 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI5 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled 015 Speed Reg Motor DI6 Free No PFC Autochange disabled Aut
209. coder s position feedback This parameter is self clearing 0 DISABLE Inactive 1 ENABLE Resets the encoder position feedback Parameters reset depends on the state of parameter 5010 z PLS ENABLE 5010 0 DISABLE Reset applies to parameters 0147 MECH REVS and 0146 MECH ANGLE 5010 1 ENABLE Reset applies only to parameter 0147 MECH REVS Ph Parameters one 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 202 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE This group defines set up variables for a fieldbus adapter FBA communication module For more information on these parameters refer to the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Code Description 5101 FBA TYPE Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module NOT DEFINED Module not found or not properly connected or parameter 9802 is not set to 4 EXT 1 PROFIBUS DP 16 INTERBUS 21 LONWORKS 32 CANopen 37 DEVICENET 64 MODBUS PLUS 101 CONTROLNET 128 ETHERNET 5102 5126 FB PAR 2 FB PAR 26 Refer to communication module documentation for more information on these parameters 5127 FBA PAR REFRESH Validates any changed fieldbus parameter settings DONE Refreshing done 1 REFRESH Refreshing After refreshing the value reverts automatically to DONE 5128 FILE CPI FW REV Displays the CP
210. ction ABB Drives profile technical data on page 262 Status Word The STATUS WORD is a 16 bit word containing status information sent by the drive to the fieldbus controller The content of the STATUS WORD depends on the protocol profile used See the user s manual provided with the FBA module and or section ABB Drives profile technical data on page 262 Reference The contents of each REFERENCE word can be used as speed or frequency reference isa 16 bit word comprised of a sign bit and a 15 bit integer Negative references indicating reversed rotation direction are indicated by the two s complement of the corresponding positive reference value The use of a second reference REF2 is supported only when a protocol is configured for the ABB Drives profile Reference scaling is fieldbus type specific See the user s manual provided with the FBA module and or the following sections as appropriate Heference scaling on page 266 ABB Drives profile technical data Reference scaling on page 270 Generic profile technical data Actual Values Planning Actual Values are 16 bit words containing information on selected operations of the drive Drive Actual Values for example Group 10 START STOP DIR parameters can be mapped to Input Words using Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE parameters protocol dependent but typically parameters 5104 5126 Network planning should address the following questions Whattypes and quantiti
211. ctor and the Protective Earth conductor using a measuring voltage of 500 V DC The insulation resistance of an ABB motor must exceed 10 Mohm reference value at 25 C or 77 F For the insulation resistance of other motors please consult the manufacturer s instructions Note Moisture inside the motor casing will reduce the insulation resistance If moisture is suspected dry the motor and repeat the measurement Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 36 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Power cable connection diagram INPUT OUTPUT n Ground the other end of the input cable shield PE conductor at the distribution board 1 An alternative to the grounding of the drive and the motor through the cable shield or armour Note Connecting the fourth conductor of the motor cable at the motor end increases bearing currents and causes extra wear 2 Used if the conductivity of the cable shield is lt 50 of the conductivity of the phase conductor 3 For minimum radio frequency interference at the motor end ground the cable shield 360 degrees at the lead through of the motor terminal box 360 degrees grounding or ground the cable by twisting the shield as follows flattened width gt 1 5 length In the figure below b gt 1 5 a Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773
212. ctors connection boxes or similar equipment are installed in the motor cable i e between the drive and the motor EU Install the equipment in a metal enclosure with 360 degrees grounding for the screens of both the incoming and outgoing cable or connect the screens of the cables otherwise together US Install the equipment in a metal enclosure in a way that the conduit or motor cable shielding runs consistently without breaks from the drive to the motor Bypass connection WARNING Never connect the supply power to the drive output terminals U2 V2 and W2 If frequent bypassing is required employ mechanically connected switches or contactors Mains line voltage applied to the output can result in permanent damage to the drive Before opening a contactor sensorless vector control SVC mode selected If an output isolator or contactor is used supply either stop signal or RUN ENABLE see parameter 1601 signal from an auxiliary contact of the isolator to the drive in order to make sure that the drive will coast to stop immediately when the isolator opens Improper use of the isolator may damage the drive and the isolator itself Planning the electrical installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 25 Protecting the relay output contacts and attenuating disturbances in case of inductive loads Inductive loads relays contactors mo
213. dbus 13 RAMP IN 0 LINK ON Command Word 2 See parameter 0301 14 LOCALLOC REQ STARTINH 15 TORQLIM2 OFF INTERLOCK 0303 FB STS WORD 1 neac only copy of the Status Word 1 Bit 0303 FB STS WORD 1 0304 FB STS WORD 2 The drive sends status information to the fieldbus controller The status READY ALARM consists of two Status Words 1 ENABLED NOTICE e The control panel displays the word in 2 STARTED DIRLOCK hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit 0 displays as 0001 All zeros and a RUNNING LOCALLOCK 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 4 ZERO_SPEED CTL_MODE 0304 FB STS WORD 2 5 ACCELERATE Reserved Read only copy of the Status Word 2 6 IDECELERATE Reserved S ter 0303 7 AT_SETPOINT CTL 8 LIMIT CPY REF1 9 SUPERVISION CPY REF2 10 REV REF REQ CTL 11 REV REQ 12 PANEL LOCAL REQ REF2 13 FIELDBUS LOCAL REQ REF2EXT 14 EXT2 ACT IACK_STARTINH 15 FAULT ACK OFF ILCK Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 135 Code Description 0305 FAULT WORD 1 only copy of the Fault Word 1 Bit 0305 FAULT WORD 1 0306 FAULT WORD 2 0307 FAULT WORD When a fault is active the 0 OVERCURRENT Obsolete EFB 1 corresponding bit for the active fa
214. death Note There are parts carrying dangerous voltages near the control board when the drive is powered Note ACS550 U2 Installation Supplement 3AUA0000004067 English provides more information about the maintenance of ACS550 U2 drives Maintenance intervals If installed in an appropriate environment the drive requires very little maintenance This table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by ABB Interval Maintenance Instruction Every year when stored Capacitor reforming See Reforming on page 289 Every 6 to 12 months depending on the dustiness of the environment Heatsink temperature check and cleaning See Heatsink on page 286 Every 6 years Cooling fan replacement See Fanon page 286 Every 9 to 10 years Capacitor replacement See Capacitors on page 289 Every 10 years Assistant Control Panel battery replacement See Control panel on page 291 Maintenance Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 286 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Heatsink The heatsink fins pick up dust from the cooling air The drive runs into overtemperature alarms and faults if the heatsink is not clean In a normal environment not dusty not clean the heatsink should be checked annually in a dusty environment more often Clean the heatsink as follows when necessary 1 Remove the cooling fan
215. derating In altitudes from 1000 4000 m 3300 13 200 ft above sea level the derating is 1 for every 100 m 330 ft If the installation site is higher than 2000 m 6600 ft above sea level please contact your local ABB distributor or office for further information Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 295 Fuses and circuit breakers Fuses Branch circuit protection must be provided by the end user sized per national and local electric codes Recommendations for fuses for short circuit protection on the input cable and the drive are below Verify that the fuse operates rapidly enough by checking that the short circuit current of the installation is at least the minimum short circuit current given in the table below The short circuit current of the installation can be calculated as follows U lk2 ph 2 R Ze X where Ik2 pn Short circuit current in symmetrical two phase short circuit A U network line to line voltage V R cable resistance ohm Zk zy UI Sy transformer impedance ohm zy transformer impedance UN transformer rated voltage V Sy nominal apparent power of the transformer kVA Xe cable reactance ohm If the calculated short circuit current of the installation is smaller than the minimum short circuit current given in the table below the fuse does not operate rapidly enough t
216. drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied analog value s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 135 COMM VALUE 1 Analog Output 1 controlled by writing to 0135 COMM VALUE 1 parameter 0135 40135 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 136 COMM VALUE 2 Analog Output 2 controlled by writing to 0136 COMM VALUE 2 parameter 0136 40136 Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com PID control setpoint source ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Using the following settings to select the fieldbus as the setpoint source for PID loops Modbus protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 4010 SET POINT SEL 8 COMM VALUE 1 Setpoint is input reference 2 40003 Set 1 4110 SET POINT SEL 9 COMM AI1 Set 2 4210 SET POINT SEL Ext Trim 10 COMMFAI1 AM Communication fault When using fieldbus control specify the drive s action if serial communication is lost 2 CONST SP7 3 LAST SPEED Drive parameter Value Description 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 NOT SEL Set for appropriate drive response 1 FAULT
217. e ABB Drives profile Parameter Value setting Al reference scaling 1003 DIRECTION 1 FORWARD ref 1 1 1 1 1 1 Fieldbus Resultant ref reference 163 100 ref 100 163 1003 DIRECTION 2 REVERSE Max ref Fieldbus Resultant ref 163 100 reference Max ref 100 163 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Resultant ref Max ref Fieldbus 163 100 reference Max ref 163 Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Actual Value 269 As described earlier in section Control interface on page 252 Actual Values are words containing drive values Actual Value scaling The scaling of the integers sent to the fieldbus as Actual Values depends on the resolution of the selected drive parameter Except as noted for ACT1 ACT2 below scale the feedback integer using the resolution listed for the parameter in section Complete parameter list on page 115 For example Feedback integer Parameter resolution Scaled Value 1 0 1 mA 1 0 1 mA 0 1 mA 10 0 1 10 0 1 1 Data words 5 and 6 scaled as follows ABB Drives profile Contents Scaling ACT1 ACTUAL SPEED 20000 20000
218. e EU EMC Directive see Technical data CE marking on page 305 Option manual if optional equipment is included Installation Moving the drive on page 29 and Delivery check on page 31 If the drive has been non operational for more than one year the drive DC link capacitors need to be reformed see Heforming on page 289 Installation Requirements for the installation site on page 33 Technical data Ambient conditions on page 303 Installation Checking the insulation of the installation on page 35 Installation Drive identification on page 31 and instructions for disconnecting the EMC filter and varistor starting from page 44 Routing the cables on page 27 Installation on page 29 Installation checklist on page 59 Start up control with I O and ID Run on page 61 Installation and commissioning flowchart Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 15 Planning the electrical installation Note The installation must always be designed and made according to applicable local laws and regulations ABB does not assume any liability whatsoever for any installation which breaches the local laws and or other regulations Furthermore if the recommendations given by ABB are not followed the drive may experience problems that the warranty does not cover Note ACS550 U2 Installation Supplement 3AUA0000004067 English provides more inform
219. e IR compensation voltage used for 0 Hz When enabled IR compensation provides an extra Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE voltage boost to the motor at low speeds Use IR 3 SCALAR FREQ compensation for example in applications that require a Keep IR compensation as low as possible to prevent high breakaway torque overheating 4 Motor Typical IR compensation values are voltage 380 480 V drives KW 3 7 5 15 37 132 comp V 18 15 12 8 3 A IR compensated B No compensation P 2603 2604 IIR COMP FREQ f Hz Sets the frequency at which IR compensation is 0 V in B E of motor frequency 5 Tm 2605 U F RATIO Selects the form for the U f voltage to frequency ratio below field weakening point 1 LINEAR Preferred for constant torque applications 2 SQUARED Preferred for centrifugal pump and fan applications SQUARED is more silent for most operating frequencies 2606 SWITCHING FREQ Sets the switching frequency for the drive Also see parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL Higher switching frequencies mean less noise Available switching frequencies 1 and 4 kHz Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 168 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL The switching frequency may be
220. e RS485 channel in reset disabling communication 5303 EFB BAUD RATE When this protocol is selected the Defines the communication speed of the RS485 default value for this parameter is 9 6 link in kbits per second kbits s 1 2 kb s 19 2 kb s 2 4 kb s 38 4 kb s 4 8 kb s 57 6 kb s 9 6 kb s 76 8 kb s 5304 EFB PARITY When this protocol is selected the Defines the data length parity and stop bits to be default value for this parameter is 1 used with the RS485 communication The same settings must be used in all on line stations 0 8 NONE 1 8 data bits no parity one stop bit 1 8 NONE 2 8 data bits no parity two stop bits 2 8 EVEN 1 8 data bits even parity one stop bit 3 8 ODD 1 8 data bits odd parity one stop bit 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE When this protocol is selected the Selects the communication profile used by the default value for this parameter is 0 EFB protocol 0 ABB DRV Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS400 1 DCU PROFILE Operation of Control Status Words conforms to 32 bit DCU Profile 2 ABB DRV FULL Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS600 800 Note After any changes to the communication settings the protocol must be reactivated by either cycling the drive power or by clearing and then restoring the station Id 5302 Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax
221. e chart in section Ratings on page 293 lists technical specifications and identifies the drive s frame size significant since some instructions in this document vary depending on the drive s frame size To read the ratings table you need the Output current rating entry from the type code Also when using the ratings table note that the table is broken into sections based on the drive s Construction 02 or 02 Serial number The format of the drive serial number shown on the labels is described below Serial number is of format CYYWWXXXXX where C Country of manufacture YY Year of manufacture WW Week of manufacture 01 02 03 for week 1 week 2 week 3 XXXXX Integer starting every week from 0001 Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 33 Requirements for the installation site The drive must be installed in an upright position on the floor or wall Check the installation site according to the requirements below Refer to section Dimension drawings on page 308 for frame details See section Ambient conditions on page 303 for the allowed operation conditions of the drive Floor The floor material below the drive must be non flammable The floor must be horizontal Wall The wall material near the drive must be non flammable Check that there is nothing on the wall to inhibit the installation If the drive is mount
222. e column refers to the ABB Drives profile selected when parameter 5305 0 ABB DRV LIM or 5305 2 ABB DRV FULL The other column refers to the DCU profile selected when parameter 5305 1 DCU PROFILE See section ABB control profiles technical data on page 239 The reference provides direction control a negative reference provides reverse rotation Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 224 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Input reference select Using the fieldbus to provide input references to the drive requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied reference word s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1102 1 2 SEL 8 COMM Reference set selection by fieldbus 40001 bit 11 40031 bit 5 1103 SELECT 8 COMM Input reference 1 by fieldbus 40002 1106 REF2 SELECT 8 COMM Input reference 2 by fieldbus 40003 Reference Scaling Where required REFERENCES can be scaled See the following as appropriate Modbus Register 40002 in section Modbus protocol technical data on page 231 Reference scaling in section ABB control profiles technical data on page 239 Miscellaneous drive control
223. e displayed with Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY parameters See page 79 for 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM detailed instructions on changing parameter values OUTPUT FRE Q By default the display shows three signals The particular default signals 103 depend on the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO For macros whose CANCEL 00 00 SAVE default value of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE is 1 VECTOR SPEED the LOC EDIT default for signal 1 is 0102 SPEED otherwise 0103 OUTPUT FREQ The defaults 3408 SI GNAL2 PARAM for signals 2 and 3 are always 0104 CURRENT and 0105 TORQUE respectively CURRENT To change the default signals select up to three signals from Group 01 104 OPERATING DATA to be shown Signal 1 Change the value of parameter 3407 SIGNAL1 PARAM to the index of EUG UPAR EDT the signal parameter in Group 01 OPERATING DATA number of the 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM parameter without the leading zero e g 105 means parameter 0705 TORQUE Value 100 means that no signal is displayed 105 ANCEL 1 00 00 SAVE Repeat for signals 2 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM and 3 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM 2 Select how you want the signals to be displayed as a decimal number LOC UPAR EDIT graph For decimal numbers you can specify the decimal point location 3404 QUTPUT1 DSP FORM the decimal point location and unit of the source signal setting 9 DIRECT For DI RECT details see parameter 3404 9 Signal 1 parameter 3404 OUTPUT D
224. e drive continues as before The drive copies the current remote values for the run stop status and the reference and uses them as the initial local control settings The arrow 5 or 5 on the stop the drive in local control press status lire stops rotating i The arrow or 5 on the status line starts rotating It is dotted until the drive reaches the setpoint start the drive in local control press lt gt Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 77 Output mode In the Output mode you can monitor actual values of up to three signals in Group 01 OPERATING DATA change the direction of the motor rotation setthe speed frequency or torque reference adjust the display contrast start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control You get to the Output mode by pressing repeatedly The top right corner of the t LOC vt JEn display shows the reference 49 1 Hz 50 value The center can be 0 5 A 0 4 configured to show up to three 10 7 24 4 signal values or bar graphs see DIR 00 00 MENU DIR 100 00 MENU page 80 for instructions on selecting and modifying the monitored signals How to change the direction of the motor rotation Step Action Display 1 If you are not in the Out
225. e faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the D 1 1 2 displayed value with the default value 2 CANCEL 00 00 AVE 6 save the new value press ait LOC om SETTI NGS 222 CANCEL T T To cancel the new value and keep the original press 1001 START P EL 9 SDI zi n DIR El EXIT 100 00 Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 92 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Basic Control Panel Features The Basic Control Panel features numeric control panel with an LCD display copy function parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system Overview The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the Basic Control Panel 2 No Use 1 LCD display Divided into five areas a Upper left Control location oc 19 1 1 EU LOC drive control is local that is from the control panel REM drive control is remote such as the drive I O or fieldbus gt 1d OUTPUT FWD b Upper right Unit of the displayed value c Center Variable in general shows parameter and signal values menus or lists Shows also fault and alarm codes d Lower left and center Panel operation state OUTPUT Output mode PAR Parameter mode MENU
226. e feedback signal 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER Defines an extra multiplier for the PID feedback value FBK defined by parameter 4014 Used mainly in applications where the flow is calculated from the pressure difference 0 000 NOT SEL The parameter has no effect 1 000 used as the multiplier 32 768 32 767 Multiplier applied to the signal defined by parameter 4014 SEL Example FBK Multiplier x 1 A2 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 195 Code Description 4016 ACT1 INPUT Defines the source for actual value 1 ACT1 See also parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 1 1 Uses analog input 1 for AcT1 2 AI2 Uses analog input 2 for 1 3 CURRENT Uses current for ACT1 4 TORQUE Uses torque for ACT1 5 POWER Uses power for ACT1 6 COMM ACT 1 Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT1 7 COMM ACT 2 Uses value of signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 for ACT1 4017 ACT2 INPUT Defines the source for actual value 2 ACT2 See also parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM 1 1 Uses analog input 1 for ACT2 2 AI2 Uses analog input 2 for ACT2 3 CURRENT Uses current for ACT2 4 TORQUE Uses torque for ACT2 5 POWER Uses power for ACT2 6 COMM ACT 1 Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT2 7 COMM ACT 2 Uses value of
227. e low frequency limit parameter 8112 8113 or 8114 for this time period before the auxiliary motor stops See 8112 Low FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 209 Code Description 8117 NR OF AUX MOT Sets the number of auxiliary motors Each auxiliary motor requires a relay output which the drive uses to send start stop signals Autochange function if used requires an additional relay output for the speed regulated motor The following describes the set up of the required relay outputs Relay outputs noted above each auxiliary motor requires a relay output which the drive uses to send start stop signals The following describes how the drive keeps track of motors and relays The 5550 provides relay outputs RO1 RO3 An external digital output module can be added to provide relay outputs RO4 RO6 Parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 define respectively how relays RO1 RO6 are used the parameter value 31 defines the relay as used for The ACS550 assigns auxiliary motors to relays in ascending order If the Autochange function is disabled the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting 31 and so on If the Autochange function is used the assignm
228. e motor stop method 1 COAST Selects cutting off the motor power as the stop method The motor coasts to stop 2 RAMP Selects using a deceleration ramp Deceleration ramp is defined by 2203 DECELER TIME 1 or 2206 DECELER TIME 2 whichever is active 2103 DC MAGN TIME Defines the pre magnetizing time for the DC Magnetizing start mode Use parameter 2101 to select the start mode After the start command the drive pre magnetizes the motor for the time defined here and then starts the motor Setthe pre magnetizing time just long enough to allow full motor magnetization Too long a time heats the motor excessively 2104 DC HOLD CTL Motor 4 Selects whether DC current is used for braking or DC Hold speed lee nee 5 0 SEL Disables the DC current operation 1 DC HOLD Enables the DC Hold function See the diagram J A T Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 VECTOR SPEED Stops generating sinusoidal current and injects DC into the motor when both the reference and the motor speed drop below the value of parameter Ref 2105 When the reference rises above the level of parameter 2105 the drive resumes normal operation DC hold 2 DC BRAKING Enables the DC Injection Braking after modulation has speed stopped If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 1 COAST braking is applied after start is removed f parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 2 RAMP braking is applied after ramp Paramete
229. e second minimum limit for torque 96 Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 157 Code Description 2017 TORQUE 1 Sets the first maximum limit for torque Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque 2018 TORQUE 2 Sets the second maximum limit for torque Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 158 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Group 21 START STOP This group defines how the motor starts and stops The ACS550 supports several start and stop modes Code Description 2101 START FUNCTION Selects the motor start method The valid options depend on the value of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 AUTO Selects the automatic start mode Vector control modes Optimal start in most cases The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency to start a rotating motor SCALAR FREQ mode Immediate start from zero frequency 2 DC MAGN Selects the DC Magnetizing start mode Note The DC Magnetizing start mode cannot start a rotating motor Note The drive starts when the set pre magnetizing time parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME has passed even if motor magnetization is not complete Vector control modes
230. e summarizes the key functions and displays on the Assistant Control Panel STOP START Use Status LED Green for normal operation If LED is flashing or red see section Diagnostic displays on page 273 LCD display Divided into three main areas a Status line variable depending on the mode of operation see section Status line on page 73 b Center variable in general shows signal and parameter values menus or lists Shows also faults and alarms c Bottom line shows current functions of the two soft keys and if enabled the clock display Soft key 1 Function depends on the context The text in the lower left corner of the LCD display indicates the function Soft key 2 Function depends on the context The text in the lower right corner of the LCD display indicates the function Up Scrolls up through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display Increments a value if a parameter is selected Increments the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted Holding the key down changes the value faster Down Scrolls down through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display Decrements a value if a parameter is selected Decrements the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted Holding the key down changes the v
231. e time at which the last fault occurred Either as Real time in format hh mm ss if real time clock is operating e The time since power on minus the whole days reported in 0402 in format hh mm ss if real time clock is not used or was not set Format on the Basic Control Panel The time since power on in 2 second ticks minus the whole days reported in 0402 30 ticks 60 seconds E g Value 514 equals 17 minutes and 8 seconds 514 30 0404 SPEED AT FLT motor speed rpm at the time the last fault occurred 0405 FREQ AT FLT frequency Hz at the time the last fault occurred 0406 VOLTAGE AT FLT DC bus voltage V at the time the last fault occurred 0407 CURRENT AT FLT motor current A at the time the last fault occurred 0408 TORQUE AT FLT The motor torque 96 at the time the last fault occurred 0409 STATUS AT FLT The drive status hex code word at the time the last fault occurred 0410 DI 1 3 AT FLT The status of digital inputs 1 3 at the time the last fault occurred 0411 DI 4 6 AT FLT The status of digital inputs 4 6 at the time the last fault occurred 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 Fault code of the second last fault Read only 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 Fault code of the third last fault Read only Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com
232. e to READY TO OPERATE 4 CW 0000 0000 0000 1111 This CW value changes the drive state to OPERATION ENABLED The drive starts but will not accelerate 5 CW 0000 0000 0010 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator RFG output and changes the drive state to RFG ACCELERATOR ENABLED 6 CW 0000 0000 0110 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator RFG output and changes the drive state to OPERATING The drive accelerates to the given reference and follows the reference Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 247 The state diagram below describes the start stop function of CONTROL WORD CW and STATUS WORD SW bits for the ABB Drives profile From any state From any state From any state Emergency Stop Emergency Off Fault OFF3 CW Bit2 0 OFF2 CW Bit1 0 oe OFF3 OFF2 6 FAULT SW Bit3 1 SW Bit5 0 ACTIVE ACTIVE SW Bit4 0 CW Bit7 1 n f 0 0 y gt L From any state OFF1 CW Bit0 0 SWITCH ON af SW Bit1 0 OFF1 MAINS OFF INHIBITED SW Bit6 1 ACTIVE n f 0 1 0 Power ON CW Bit0 0 gt B D NOT READY T TO SWITCH SW Bit0 0 CW Bit3 0 CW 1 x110 OPERATION READY TO SW BitO 1 INHIBITED switcH ON 7 SW 8101 OPERATION INHIBITED CW x1xx xxxx x111 L T pua SW Bit1 1 OPERATE CW Bit4 0
233. e work EU To meet the European Union Directives according to standard EN 60204 1 Safety of Machinery the disconnecting device must be one of the following types e switch disconnector of utilization category AC 23B 60947 3 adisconnector that has an auxiliary contact that in all cases causes switching devices to break the load circuit before the opening of the main contacts of the disconnector EN 60947 3 acircuit breaker suitable for isolation in accordance with EN 60947 2 US The disconnecting means must conform to the applicable safety regulations Fuses See section Fuses and circuit breakers on page 295 Planning the electrical installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 19 Thermal overload and short circuit protection Thermal overload protection of the drive and the input and motor cables The drive protects itself and the input and motor cables against thermal overload when the cables are dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive No additional thermal protection devices are needed WARNING If the drive is connected to multiple motors a separate thermal overload switch or a circuit breaker must be used for protecting each cable and motor These devices may require a separate fuse to cut off the short circuit current Thermal overload protection of the motor According to regulations the mot
234. ecides which consequent tasks it suggests Name Description Set parameters Language select Selecting the language 9901 Motor set up Setting the motor data 9904 9909 Performing the motor identification If the speed limits are notin 9970 Application Selecting the application macro 9902 parameters associated to the macro Option modules Activating the option modules Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS Group 52 PANEL COMM 9802 Speed control Selecting the source for the speed reference 1103 EXT1 If 11 is used Setting analog input 11 limits scale inversion 1301 1303 3001 Setting the reference limits 1104 1105 Setting the speed frequency limits 2001 2002 2007 2008 Setting the acceleration and deceleration times 2202 2203 Speed control Selecting the source for the speed reference 1106 EXT2 If 11 is used Setting analog input AI1 limits scale inversion 1301 1303 3001 Setting the reference limits 1107 1108 Torque control Selecting the source for the torque reference 1106 If AI1 is used Setting analog input AI1 limits scale inversion 1301 1303 3001 Setting the reference limits 1107 1108 Setting the torque ramp up and ramp down times 2401 2402 PID control Selecting the source for the process reference 1106 If AI1 is used Setting analog input Al limits scale inversion 1301 1303 3001 Setting the reference limits 1107 1108 Setting the speed reference limits S
235. ect the RS485 link in a daisy chained bus without dropout lines Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 221 To reduce noise on the network terminate the RS485 network using 120 resistors at both ends of the network Use the DIP switch to connect or disconnect the termination resistors See following diagram and table Terminated Terminated station Station Station station 00000 00000 00000 00000 X1 Identification Hardware description 28 Screen RS485 Multidrop application RS485 interface 29 Positive SCR 28 SCR J2 J2 30 A Negative z ON 31 AGND GND 31 AGND ON 2 SCR 32 Screen SCR 3 OFF position ON position T Bus termination GND Connect the shield at each end of the cable to a drive On one end connect the shield to terminal 28 and on the other end connect to terminal 32 Do not connect the incoming and outgoing cable shields to the same terminals as that would make the shielding continuous For configuration information see the following sections Communication set up EFB on page 221 Activate drive control functions EFB on page 223 The appropriate EFB protocol specific technical data For example Modbus protocol techn
236. ect using 5313 actual value for this register 40009 Actual 5 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5314 to select an select using 5314 actual value for this register 40010 Actual 6 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5315 to select an select using 5315 actual value for this register 40011 Actual 7 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5316 to select an select using 5316 actual value for this register 40012 Actual 8 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5317 to select an select using 5317 actual value for this register 40031 ACS550 CONTROL R W Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU WORD LSW profile s CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0301 40032 ACS550 CONTROL R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU WORD MSW profile s CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0302 40033 ACS550 sTATUS R Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU WORD LSW profile s STATUS WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0303 40034 ACS550 sTATUS R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU WORD MSW profile s STATUS WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0304 Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 237 For the Modbus protocol drive parameters in Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL report the parameter mapping to 4xxxx Register
237. ed e g with jogging function or mechanical brake No Zero Speed Delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp When the motor actual speed falls below an internal limit called Zero Speed the speed controller is switched off The drive modulation is stopped and the motor coasts to standstill With Zero Speed Delay drive receives a stop command decelerates along a ramp When the motor actual speed falls below internal limit called Zero Speed the zero speed delay function activates During the delay the functions keeps the speed controller live The drive modulates motor is magnetized and drive is ready for a quick restart Note Parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION must be 2 RAMP for zero speed delay to operate 0 0 NOT SEL Disables the Zero Speed Delay function Zero Speed gt t Zero Speed gt t 2113 START DELAY Defines the Start delay After the conditions for start have been fulfilled the drive waits until the delay has elapsed land then starts the motor Start delay can be used with all start modes If START DELAY zero the delay is disabled During the Start delay alarm 2028 START DELAY is shown Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 161 Group 22 ACCEL DECEL This group defines ramps that control the rate of acceleration and deceleration Y
238. ed on the wall the wall must be as close to vertical as possible and strong enough to carry the weight of the drive The drive must not be installed without the pedestal on the wall Free space around the drive See section Choose the mounting orientation a b or on page 37 Cooling air flow Provide the drive with the amount of fresh cooling air given in section Ratings on page 293 The cooling air will enter the drive from the front air grating and flow upwards inside the drive Recirculating cooling air into the drive is not allowed Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 34 A ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual IT ungrounded systems The drive is suitable for IT ungrounded systems but you have to disconnect the EMC filter frame size R7 and varistor frame sizes R7 and R8 before connecting the drive to an IT system See the following sections for how to do this e Disconnecting the EMC filter on IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems frame size R7 only on page 44 Disconnecting the varistor on IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems frame size R7 on page 45 Disconnecting the varistor on IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems frame size 8 on page 46 WARNING If a drive with its EMC filter frame size R7 or varistor frame sizes R7 and R8 connec
239. ed to have a relay output allocated to PFC but it needs to be included in this value 8128 AUX START ORDER Sets the start order of the auxiliary motors 1 EVEN RUNTIME Time sharing is active The start order depends on the run times 2 RELAY ORDER The start order is fixed to be the order of the relays Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 218 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Group 98 OPTIONS This group configures for options in particular enabling serial communication with the drive Code Description 9802 PROT SEL Selects the communication protocol NOT SEL No communication protocol selected 1 STD MODBUS The drive communicates with Modbus via the RS485 channel X1 communications terminal See also Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL 4 EXT The drive communicates via a fieldbus adapter module in option slot 2 of the drive See also Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 219 Embedded fieldbus Overview The ACS550 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard serial communication protocols When using serial communication the ACS550 can either receive all of its control information from the fieldbus or be controlled from some combination of fi
240. eference 96 How to change the value of a parameter Parameter 97 How to select the monitored signals Parameter 98 How to reset faults and alarms Output Fault 279 How to copy parameters from the drive to the control panel Copy 100 How to restore parameters from the control panel to the drive Copy 100 Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 94 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual How to start stop and switch between local and remote control You can start stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode To be able to start or stop the drive the drive must be in local control Step Action Display 1 To switch between remote control REM shown on the left and local LOC control LOC shown on the left press 20 Hz Note Switching to local control can be disabled with parameter 1606 OUTPUT F WD LOCAL LOCK After pressing the key the display briefly shows message LoC or rE LOC as appropriate before returning to the previous display 0 F WD The very first time the drive is powered up it is in remote control REM and controlled through the drive I O terminals To switch to local control LOC and control the drive using the control panel press 9 The result depends on how long you press the key If you release the key immediately the display flashes the drive stops Set the local control reference as ins
241. elay output 3 Fault 1 141 jo Al1 0 10 V v 107 AI2 0 4 20 mA Application macros Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 104 Alternate macro ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual This macro provides an I O configuration adopted to a sequence of DI control signals used when alternating the rotation direction of the motor To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 3 ALTERNATE Connection example X1 1 10 konm 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 AM External speed reference 1 0 10 V 25 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 Al2 Not used 6 AGND Analog input circuit common lt D 7 1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA D 8 2 Output current 0 20 mA 119 AGND Analog output circuit common 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 112 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start fwd If DI1 state is the same as DI2 the drive stops 14 DI2 Start reverse 15 DI3 Constant speed selection 16 014 Constant speed selection 17 015 Ramp pair selection Activation selects 2nd acc dec ramp pair L 118 016 Run enable Deactivation alway
242. eldbus control and other available control locations such as digital or analog inputs and the control panel Fieldbus controller Fieldbus Other devices d Connect using either Standard embedded fieldbus EFB at terminals X1 28 32 fieldbus adapter FBA module mounted in slot 2 option Rxxx m Two basic serial communications configurations are available embedded fieldbus EFB Using the RS485 interface at terminals X1 28 32 on the control board a control system can communicate with the drive using the Modbus protocol For protocol and profile descriptions see sections Modbus protocol technical data and ABB control profiles technical data later in this chapter fieldbus adapter FBA See chapter Fieldbus adapter on page 251 Control interface In general the basic control interface between Modbus and the drive consists of Output words Control Word Reference1 Reference2 nput words Status Word Actual value 1 Actual value 2 Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 220 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Actual value 3 Actual value 4 Actual value 5 Actual value 6 Actual value 7 Actual value 8 The content of these words is defined by profiles For details on the pr
243. eldbus type specific However at the drive the meaning of a 10096 REFERENCE value is fixed as described in the table below For a detailed description on the range and scaling of the REFERENCE see the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Generic profile Reference Reference Range type Scaling Remarks REF Fieldbus Speed 100 par 9908 Final reference limited by specific 1104 1105 100 par 9908 Actual motor speed limited by 2001 2002 speed Frequency 100 par 9907 Final reference limited by 0 0 1104 1105 100 par 9907 Actual motor speed limited by 2007 2008 frequency Actual Values As described earlier in section Control interface on page 252 Actual Values are words containing drive values Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Actual Value scaling 271 For Actual Values scale the feedback integer using the parameter s resolution See section Complete parameter list on page 175 for parameter resolutions For example Feedback Feedback integer Parameter resolution integer Parameter resolution Scaled Value 1 0 1 mA 1 0 1 mA 0 1 mA 10 0 196 10 0 196 1 Where parameters are in percent the Complete parameter list section specifies what parameter corresponds to 10096 In such cases to convert from
244. ening torques are OK The motor cable is routed away from other cables Setting of the fan voltage transformer Setting of the auxiliary voltage transformer There are no power factor compensation capacitors in the motor cable The external control connections inside the drive are OK There are no tools foreign objects or dust from drilling inside the drive The input power voltage cannot be applied to the output of the drive especially with bypass connection Drive motor connection box and other covers place Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 61 Start up control with I O and ID Run The chapter instructs how to perform the start up start stop change the direction of rotation and adjust the speed of the motor through the I O interface perform an Identification Run for the drive Using the control panel to do these tasks is explained briefly in this chapter For details on how to use the control panel refer to chapter Control panels starting on page 71 How to start up the drive How you start up the drive depends on the control panel you have f you have an Assistant Control Panel you can either run the Start up Assistant see section How to perform the guided start up on page 66 or perform a limited start up see section How to perform the limited sta
245. entification magnetization the motor model is calculated at first start by magnetizing the motor for 10 to 15 s at zero speed motor not rotating The model is recalculated always at start after motor parameter changes Parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ Identification magnetization is performed Parameter 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ and parameter 2101 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST Identification magnetization is performed Parameter 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ and parameter 2101 has other value than 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST Identification magnetization is not performed 1 oN Enables the Motor ID Run during which the motor is rotating at the next start command After run completion this value automatically changes to 0 Note The motor must be de coupled from the driven equipment Note If motor parameters are changed after ID Run repeat the ID Run WARNING The motor will run at up to approximately 50 80 of the nominal speed during the ID Run The motor will rotate in the forward direction Ensure that it is safe to run the motor before performing the ID Run See also section How to perform the ID Run on page 69 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 130 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Group 01 OPERATING DATA This group contains drive operating data including actua
246. ents rotate Initially the speed regulated motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting 31 the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the second relay with a parameter setting 31 and so on Relay logic ACS550 ACS550 Standard PFC mode PFC with Autochange mode The fourth auxiliary motor uses the same reference step low frequency and start frequency values as the third auxiliary motor Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 210 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description The table below shows the ACS550 PFC motor assignments for some typical settings in the Relay Output parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 where the settings are either 31 PFC or X anything but 31 and where the Autochange function is disabled 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 Parameter setting ACS550 Relay assignment 11111 11 1 1 8 Autochange disabled 44144 4 4 1 Rod RO2 RO4 5 RO6 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1121310111217 1 Aux X X X X X 31131 X X 2 Aux Aux X X X X 31 31 31 X X X 3 Aux Aux Aux X X X X 31 31 X X X 2 X Aux Aux X X X X X X 131 X 31 2 X X X Aux X Aux 31131 X X X X 1
247. epends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 e See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 2203 DECELER TIME 1 B 0 Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 1 Actual deceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ TUO 2204 SHAPE 1 FREO S curve Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp for ramp pair 1 See B in the figure Shape is defined as a ramp unless additional time is specified here to reach the IP ED 1 maximum frequency A longer time provides a softer transition at each end of the slope The shape becomes an s curve Rule of thumb 1 5 is a suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the M T acceleration ramp time 4 0 0 LINEAR Specifies linear acceleration deceleration ramps for ramp pair 1 0 1 1000 0 S CURVE Specifies s curve acceleration deceleration ramps for ramp pair 1 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 Sets the acceleration time for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 2 See 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 Used also as jogging acceleration time See 1004 JOGGING SEL 2206 DECELER TIME 2 Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 2 e See 2203 DECELER TIME 1 Used also as jogging deceleration time See 1004 JOGGING SEL 2207 JRAMP SHAPE 2 Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp for ramp pair 2 See 2204 RAMP SHAFE 1 A 2202 ACCELER TIME
248. ergency Off Fault OFF3 CW Bit2 0 OFF2 CW Bit1 0 OFF2 FAULT SW Bit3 1 SW Bit5 0 ACTIVE SW Bit4 0 CW Bit7 1 n f 0 0 V gt gt From any state OFF1 CW Bit0 0 SWITCH ON SW Bit1 0 OFF1 MAINS OFF INHIBITED SW Bit6 1 ACTIVE n f 0 1 0 Power CW BitO 0 gt A NOT READY Lt TO SWITCH SW Bit0 0 CW Bit3 0 CW 1 110 OPERATION READY TO an SW Bit0 1 eB Ie INHIBITED switcH OW 10 1 OPERATION INHIBITED CW x1xx xxxx X111 gt READY TO SW Bit1 1 OPERATE CW Bit4 0 CW Bit3 1 and gt SW Bit12 1 OPERATION C D ENABLED SW Bit2 1 CW 5 0 CW xxxx 1 1 1111 gt RFG OUTPUT D ENABLED PS B lt CW Bit6 0 CW xxxx 1 11 1111 gt State State change RFG ACCELERATOR CW CONTROL WORD ENABLED SW STATUS WORD G lt 1 Ramp Function Generator x1xx x111 1111 Param 0104 CURRENT SW Bit8 1 f Param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ OPERATING Speed D 1 Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 266 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Reference As described earlier in section Control interface on page 252 the REFERENCE word is a speed or frequency
249. erwise press 77 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom MENU F WD 2 Press keys 2 until you see PAr and press S REM 1 F WD 3 Find the appropriate parameter group with Keys and press REM 2 1 F WD 4 Find the appropriate parameter in the group with Keys 7 REM 2 2 PAR F WD 5 Press and hold for about two seconds until the parameter value is REM shown with under the value rpm PAR Siam F Wo 6 Change the value with keys a w The value changes faster while REM rpm you keep the key pressed down PAR F WD 7 Save the parameter value by pressing X 7 REM 2 2 F WD Start up control with I O and ID Run Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Select the application macro parameter 9902 The general parameter setting procedure is given above The default value 1 ABB STANDARD is suitable in most cases Select the motor control mode parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED is suitable in most cases 2 VECTOR TORQ is suitable for torque control applications 3 SCALAR FREQ is recommended for multimotor drives when the number of the motors connected to the drive is variable when the nominal current of the motor is less than 2096 of the nominal
250. es of devices must be connected to the network What control information must be sent down to the drives What feedback information must be sent from the drives to the controlling system Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 254 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Mechanical and electrical installation WARNING Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from the power source Overview The FBA fieldbus adapter is a plug in module that fits in the drive s expansion slot 2 The module is held in place with plastic retaining clips and two screws The screws also ground the shield for the module cable and connect the module GND signals to the drive control board On installation of the module electrical connection to the drive is automatically established through the 34 pin connector Mounting procedure ee 1 Note Install the input power and motor cables first 1 Insert the module carefully into the drive expansion slot 2 until the retaining clips lock the module into position 2 Fasten the two screws included to the stand offs Note Correct installation of the screws is essential for fulfilling the EMC requirements and for proper operation of the module X00301 3 Open the appropriate knockout in the conduit box and install the cable clamp for the network cable 4 Rou
251. es the frequency reference to stabilize the DC bus voltage and therefore the load torque oscillation 0 DISABLE Disables DC stabilizer 1 ENABLE Enables DC stabilizer Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 169 Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG This group contains usage levels and trigger points When usage reaches the set trigger point a notice displayed on the control panel signals that maintenance is due Code Description 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG Sets the trigger point for the drive s cooling fan counter Value is compared to parameter 2902 value 0 0 Disables the trigger 2902 COOLING FAN ACT Defines the actual value of the drive s cooling fan counter When parameter 2901 has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2901 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 0 Resets the parameter 2903 REVOLUTION TRIG Sets the trigger point for the motor s accumulated revolutions counter Value is compared to parameter 2904 value 0 Disables the trigger 2904 REVOLUTION Defines the actual value of the motor s accumulated revolutions counter When parameter 2903 has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2903 a mainte
252. etting the source and limits for the process actual value 2001 2002 2007 2008 4016 4018 4019 Start Stop control Selecting the source for start and stop signals of the two external control locations EXT1 and EXT2 Selecting between EXT1 and EXT2 Defining the direction control Defining the start and stop modes Selecting the use of Run Enable signal 1001 1002 1102 1003 2101 2103 1601 Timed functions Setting the timed functions Selecting the timed start stop control for external control locations EXT1 and EXT2 Selecting timed EXT1 EXT2 control Activation of timed constant speed 1 Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 1001 1002 1102 1201 Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 83 Name Description Set parameters Selecting timed function status indicated through relay output RO 7407 Selecting timed PID1 parameter set 1 2 control 4027 Protections Setting the current and torque limits 2003 2017 Output signals Selecting the signals indicated through relay output RO Selecting the signals indicated through analog output AO Setting the minimum maximum scaling and inversion Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 84 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Cha
253. f parameter 5010 Z PLS ENABLE 1 ENABLE parameter 5011 POSITION RESET if parameter 5010 Z PLS ENABLE 2 DISABLE e any status change of parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE 0147 MECH REVS signed integer that counts full revolutions of the motor shaft The value increments when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE changes from 32767 to 0 decrements when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE changes from 0 to 32767 0148 Z PLS DETECTED Encoder zero pulse detector When a Z pulse defines the zero position the shaft must pass through the zero position to trigger a Z pulse Until then the shaft position is unknown the drive uses the shaft position at power up as zero This parameter signals when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE is valid The parameter starts at 0 NOT DETECTED on power up and changes to 1 DETECTED only if parameter 5010 z PLS ENABLE 1 ENABLE and an encoder Z pulse has been detected 0150 CB TEMP Temperature of the drive control board in degrees Celsius Note Some drives have a control board OMIO that does not support this feature These drives always show the constant value of 25 0 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 133 Code Description 0151 INPUT KWH R Calculated actual intake energy in kWh 0152 INPUT MWH Calculated actual intake energy in MWh 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 Data received from fieldbus
254. function stopping the drive 4025 e See4023PIDsLEEPLEVELabove M i 4025 WAKE UP DEV Stop g Defines the wake up deviation a deviation from the setpoint Start greater than this value for at least the time period 4026 WAKE UP DELAY re starts the PID controller e Parameters 4006 and 4007 define the units and scale 2 e Parameter 4005 0 4025 4008 1 Wake up level Setpoint Wake up deviation Setpoint e Parameter 4005 1 P 4025 4006 0 Wake up level Setpoint Wake up deviation D Wake up level can be above or below setpoint gt t See the figures e Wake up level when parameter 4005 1 e D Wake up level when parameter 4005 0 E e Feedback is above wake up level and lasts longer than 4026 A WAKE UP DELAY PID function wakes up e F Feedback is below wake up level and lasts longer than 4026 P 4025 WAKE UP DELAY PID function wakes up SCAM P 4026 4026 WAKE UP DELAY tp 2 Defines the wake up delay a deviation from the setpoint greater D than 4025 WAKE UP DEY for at least this time period re starts the i T PID controller 4026 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 197 Code Description 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET Process PID PID1 has two separate sets of parameters PID set 1 and PID set 2 set 1 uses parameters 4001 4026 PID set 2 uses pa
255. g that limit the active limit That limit remains active until the supervised parameter goes below the lowest limit HI 3203 making that limit active Case A Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 OVER or SUPRV2 OVER Initially the relay is de energized It is energized whenever the supervised parameter goes above the active limit Case B Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 UNDER or SUPRV2 UNDER Initially the relay is energized It is de energized whenever the supervised parameter goes below the active limit 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO Sets the low limit for the first supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI Sets the high limit for the first supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above LO x HI Note Case LO x HI represents a normal hysteresis Value of supervised parameter A HI 3203 Lo 3202 y Case A Energized 1 4 4 o ty Case B A Energized 1 1 I 0 gt LO gt HI Note Case LO gt HI represents a special hysteresis with two separate supervision limits Value of supervised parameter LO 3202 HI 3203 Active limit Case A Energized 1 UA Lt 0 gt Case B A Energized 1 i LLL 0 gt 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM Selects the second supervised parameter
256. ger or damage the drive If a drive with its EMC filter connected is installed on a corner grounded TN system the drive will be damaged Only frame size R7 drives have an EMC filter 1 Disconnect the EMC filter by removing the two screws shown in the figure below Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 45 Disconnecting the varistor on IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems frame size R7 WARNING If a drive with its varistor connected is installed on an IT system an N ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohm power system the system will be connected to earth potential through the varistor This may cause danger or damage the drive If a drive with its varistor connected is installed on a corner grounded TN system the drive will be damaged 1 Ensure that the power is removed from the drive 2 Remove the upper front cover by undoing the screws 3 Disconnect the varistor cable 4 Fasten the front cover Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 46 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Disconnecting the varistor on IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems frame size H8 WARNING If a drive with its varistor connected is installed on an IT system an N ungrounded power system
257. h signal Do not use common return for different analog signals A double shielded cable is the best alternative for low voltage digital signals but single shielded twisted multipair cable Figure b is also usable A double shielded twisted A single shielded twisted pair cable multipair cable Run analog and digital signals in separate shielded cables Relay controlled signals providing their voltage does not exceed 48 V can be run in the same cables as digital input signals It is recommended that the relay controlled signals be run as twisted pairs Note Never mix 24 V DC and 115 230 V AC signals in the same cable Note Never ground control cables at both ends Relay cable The cable type with braided metallic screen e g OLFLEX by Lapp Kabel has been tested and approved by ABB Control panel cable In remote use the cable connecting the control panel to the drive must not exceed 3 metres 10 ft The cable type tested and approved by ABB is used in control panel option kits Planning the electrical installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 27 Connection of a motor temperature sensor to the drive I O A WARNING IEC 60664 requires double or reinforced insulation between live parts and the surface of accessible parts of electrical equipment which are either non conductive or conductive but not con
258. he control panel to the drive Parameter Backup 89 How to view backup information Parameter Backup 90 How to edit and change parameter settings related to I O terminals O Settings 91 Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 75 How to get help Step Action Display 1 Press to read the context sensitive help text for the item that is highlighted 0 GROUPS 10 01 OPERATING DATA 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 04 FAULT HI STORY TARTISI ORI DIR EXIT 00 00 SEL If help text exists for the item it is shown on the display defines external sources and EXT2 for commands that enable start stop and EXIT 00 00 2 If the whole text is not visible scroll the lines with keys and Cw LOC WHELP external sources and EXT2 for commands that enable start stop and direction changes EXIT 00 00 3 After reading the text return to the previous display by pressin E LOC UPAR GROUPS 10 1 j ae PLZ 01 OPERATING DATA 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 04 FAULT HI STORY EXIT 100 00 SEL How to find out the panel version Step Action Display 1 If the power is switched on switch it off 2 Keep key pressed down while you switch on the power and read the PANEL VERSI ON INFO information The display shows the
259. he default values defined in section Complete parameter list on page 115 Connection example X1 1 10 kohm41 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 AM External frequency reference 1 0 10 V 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 AI Not used 6 AGND Analog input circuit common D 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 20 mA D 8 2 Output current 0 20 mA 9 AGND Analog output circuit common 41 10124V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 411 GND Auxiliary voltage output common L 112 IDCOM Digital input common for all 13 Start Stop Activate to start 141012 Fwd Rev Activate to reverse rotation direction 15 1013 Constant speed selection 16 014 Constant speed selection 17 DI5 Ramp pair selection Activate to select 2nd acc dec ramp pair 18 016 Not used 19 1 Relay output 1 programmable 1 The IS 20 RO1A Default operation ES P 2 4 reference if a vector 21 RO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 i 22 2 Relay output 2 programmable Note 2 Code 23 RO2A Default operation O open 1 connected 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 DI3 DI4 Output 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable 0 0 Reference through AI1 26
260. he figure The parameter characteristics were as described below Ifthe load drops below the Sel Tor longer than A Underload curve types the time set by parameter 80 3014 UNDERLOAD TIME 1 obsolete the underload protection is activated 60 7 Curves 1 3 reach maximum at the motor 40 rated frequency set by 4 parameter 9907 MOTOR 20 NOM FREQ e Ty nominaltorque ofthe motor fw nominal frequency of the motor If you want to emulate the behavior of an old underload curve with parameters as in the shaded columns set the new parameters as in the white columns in the two tables below Obsolete parameters New parameters Underload supervision with 3013 3014 3701 3702 3703 parameters 3013 3015 obsolete UNDERLOAD UNDERLOAD USER LOAD USER LOAD USER LOAD FUNCTION TIME C MODE C FUNC TIME No underload functionality 0 0 Underload curve fault generated 1 t 1 1 t Underload curve alarm generated 2 t 1 2 2 1 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 189 Obs par 3015 3704 3705 3707 3708 3710 3711 3713 3714 3716 3717 UNDER LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD FREQ1 TORQ FREQ2 FREQ3 TORQ FREQ4 FREQS TORQ CURVE Low 1 Low 2 Low 3 Low 4 Low 5 Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz EU US EU US EU US EU
261. he lead through insulation material is not strong enough to carry the mechanical stress exerted by the cables The cable connections must be performed in the pedestal 7 Wheel the drive frame back on the pedestal Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 51 Fixing the pedestal to the drive frame 1 Fix the fastening screws WARNING The fixing is important because the screws are required for the grounding of the drive 2 Connect the terminals at the top of the pedestal to the terminals at the bottom of the upper part of the drive frame WARNING Be careful not to drop screws inside the pedestal Loose metal pieces inside the drive may cause damage 3 Tighten the connections View of frame size R7 Terminal connection screws R7 M8 5 16 in combi screws Tightening torque 15 22 N m 11 16 Ibf ft R8 M10 3 8 in combi screws Tightening torque 30 44 N m 22 32 Ibf ft 4 Fasten the drive with screws or bolts to the holes in the wall Note In mounting orientation a see page 37 do not fasten the drive to a wall if it is subjected to sideways vibration 5 Connect the control cables as described in section Connecting the contro cables on page 54 Fastening the covers 1 Connect the control panel cables 2 Fasten the upper front cover 3 Fasten the lower front covers Installation Pho
262. he mounting location on a cable channel In this case there are various ways how to fix the drive onto the channel 1 Check that there is a place for the fixing holes 2 Check that there is space under the lead through plate for the cables Preparing the mounting location on a raised floor This method is used in cases when several drives are located in the same space close to each other The pedestal is constructed normally on site 1 Check that there is a place for the fixing holes 2 Check that the route is free for the main cables Preparing the mounting location against a wall Because of its weight it is not recommended to mount the drive on a wall but it can be fastened on a wall for additional support Lift the drive against the wall into the mounting place Check that the cable openings through the floor are in an appropriate place Mark the bottom edges of the drive to the floor SETS DS m Mark the locations of the two fixing points on the wall Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 39 Installation orientation a or b Removing the pedestal frame size R7 1 Remove the lower front covers by undoing the fixing screws 2 Undo the red screws that fix the pedestal to the frame from front 3 Undo the red M8 combi screws 6 pcs that connect the busbars of the pedestal to the upper frame Use a torque wrench with an exte
263. how LOC they are displayed with Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY parameters See page 1 3 79 for detailed instructions on changing parameter values PAR F WD By default you can monitor three signals by browsing see page 95 The LOC 4 particular default signals depend on the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO For macros whose default value of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL PAR F WD MODE is 1 VECTOR SPEED the default for signal 1 is 0102 SPEED otherwise 0103 OUTPUT FREQ The defaults for signals 2 and 3 are always 0704 D CURRENT and 0105 TORQUE respectively PAR F WD To change the default signals select from Group 01 OPERATING DATA up to three signals to be browsed Signal 1 Change the value of parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM to the index of the signal parameter in Group 01 OPERATING DATA number of the parameter without the leading zero e g 105 means parameter 0105 TORQUE Value 100 means that no signal is displayed Repeat for signals 2 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM and 3 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM For example if 3401 0 and 3415 0 browsing is disabled and only the signal specified by 3408 appears in the display If all three parameters are set to 0 i e no signals are selected for monitoring the panel displays text n A 2 Specify the decimal point location or use the decimal point location and LOC unit of the source signal setting 9 DIRECT Bar graphs are not available for Basic Operation Panel For deta
264. iary pump The PFC also reduces the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s addition to total output Then as before the PID controller adjusts the speed frequency of the first pump such that the actual value follows the process reference If demand continues to increase PFC adds additional auxiliary pumps using the same process When demand drops such that the first pump speed falls below a minimum limit user defined by a frequency limit the PFC control automatically stops an auxiliary pump The PFC also increases the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s missing output An Interlock function when enabled identifies off line out of service motors and the PFC control skips to the next available motor in the sequence An Autochange function when enabled and with the appropriate switchgear equalizes duty time between the pump motors Autochange periodically increments the position of each motor in the rotation the speed regulated motor becomes the last auxiliary motor the first auxiliary motor becomes the speed regulated motor etc Code Description 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference Example An ACS550 operates three parallel pumps that maintain water pressure in a pipe Applies only when at least one auxiliary constant speed motor is running Default value is 096 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT sets a constant
265. ic unit is sufficient Check EMC limits gt EMC requirements for Category C3 cannot be met with a 150 m 490 ft cable The installation configuration is not possible An EMC plan is recommended to overcome the situation R8 frame size EMC limits not applicable 300 m 980 ft cable Check operational limits for R8 gt for a 300 m 980 ft cable the basic unit is sufficient EMC limits do not need to be checked as there are no EMC requirements Control connections Conirol connection specifications Analog inputs and See the Hardware description table on page 55 Digital outputs outputs Digital inputs Digital input impedance 1 5 Maximum voltage for digital inputs is 30 V Max contact voltage 30 V DC 250 V AC Max contact current power 6 A 30 V DC 1500 VA 250 V AC Relays Max continuous current 2 Arms cos 1 1 Arms cos 0 4 Minimum load 500 mW 12 V 10 mA Contact material Silver nickel AgN Isolation between relay digital outputs test voltage 2 5 kV rms 1 minute Cable specifications See section Power factor compensation capacitors on page 23 Control terminals Frame size Maximum wire size 1 Torque mm AWG N m Ibf ft R8 1 5 16 0 4 0 3 1 Values given for solid wires For stranded wires the maximum size is 1 mm 2 Approximately 98 at nominal power level Technical dat
266. ical data on page 231 Communication set up EFB Serial communication selection To activate the serial communication set parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL 1 STD MODBUS Note If you cannot see the desired selection on the panel your drive does not have that protocol software in the application memory Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 222 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Serial communication configuration Setting 9802 automatically sets the appropriate default values in parameters that define the communication process These parameters and descriptions are defined below In particular note that the station Id may require adjustment Protocol reference Code Description Modbus 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID Do not edit Any non zero value entered Contains the identification and program revision of for parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL the protocol sets this parameter automatically The format is XXYY where XX protocol ID and YY program revision 5302 EFB STATION ID Set each drive on the network with a Defines the node address of the RS485 link unique value for this parameter When this protocol is selected the default value for this parameter is 1 Note For a new address to take affect the drive power must be cycled or 5302 must first be set to 0 before selecting a new address Leaving 5302 0 places th
267. ieldbus provides reference 9 COMM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 10 1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 11 DI3U 4D RNC Digital inputs acting as a motor potentiometer control provide reference 013 increases the speed the U stands for DI4 decreases the reference the D stands for down Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal s rate of change R Stop command resets the reference to zero NC Reference value is not copied 12 0130 40 Same as DI3U 4D RNC above except Stop command does not reset reference to zero At restart the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference 13 DI5U 6D NC Same as DI3U 4D NC above except Uses digital inputs 015 and DI6 14 1 12 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 15 AI1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 16 AI1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 17 AI1
268. if an active fault exists Enter SWITCH ON INHIBITED Effective if 1604 COMM OPERATING Continue normal operation 8 9 Unused 10 REMOTE_CMD Fieldbus control enabled CW 0 or Ref 0 Retain last CW Ref CW 0 and Ref 0 Fieldbus control enabled Refanddeceleration acceleration ramp are locked 11 EXT CTRL LOC EXT2 SELECT Select external control location 2 EXT2 Effective if 1102 COMM EXT SELECT Select external control location 1 EXT1 Effective if 1102 COMM 12 15 Unused Status Word As described earlier in section Control interface on page 252 the contents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the status word content ABB Drives profile FBA STATUS WORD Bit Correspond to the state diagram 0 RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON 0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON 1 RDY_RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE 0 OFF1 ACTIVE 2 RDY_REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED 0 OPERATION INHIBITED 3 TRIPPED 0 1 FAULT 0 No fault Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 264 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual ABB Drives profile FBA STATUS WORD
269. ils see parameter 3404 PAR F WD Signal 1 parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM Signal 2 parameter 3411 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM Signal 3 parameter 3478 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM 3 Select the units to be displayed for the signals This has no effect if LOC parameter 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT For details see parameter 3405 PAR F WD Signal 1 parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Signal 2 parameter 3472 OUTPUT2 UNIT Signal 3 parameter 3479 OUTPUTS UNIT 4 Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the minimum and LOC maximum display values This has no effect if parameter 3404 34 11 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT For details see parameters 3406 and 3407 PAR F WD Signal 1 parameters 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN and 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX LOC 5 Signal 2 parameters 3473 OUTPUT2 MIN 3474 OUTPUT2 MAX Signal 3 parameters 3420 OUTPUT3 MIN and 3427 OUTPUT3 MAX PAR F WD Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 99 Copy mode The Basic Control Panel can store a full set of drive parameters and up to two user sets of drive parameters to the control panel The control panel memory is non volatile In the Copy mode you can copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel uL Upload This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal not adjustable by the user para
270. imits the Basic unit columns define the cable lengths with which the basic drive unit works without problems within the drive specification without installing any further options Column With du dt filters defines the cable lengths when an external du dt filter is used The columns under heading EMC limits show the maximum cable lengths with which the units have been tested for EMC emissions The factory guarantees that these cable lengths meet the EMC standard requirements If external sine filters are installed longer cable lengths can be used With sine filters the limiting factors are the voltage drop of the cable which has to be taken into account in engineering as well as the EMC limits where applicable WARNING Using a motor cable longer than specified in the table above may cause permanent damage to the drive Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Efficiency ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 301 Examples for using the table Requirements Checking and conclusions R7 frame size Category C2 100 m 330 ft cable Check operational limits for R7 gt for a 100 m 330 ft cable the basic unit is sufficient Check EMC limits gt EMC requirements for Category C2 are met with a 100 m 330 ft cable R7 frame size Category C3 150 m 490 ft cable Check operational limits for R7 gt for a 150 m 490 ft cable the bas
271. input disables external PID control De activating the digital input enables external PID control 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control See DI1 INV above 4229 OFFSET Defines the offset for the PID output When PID is activated output starts from this value When PID is deactivated output resets to this value Parameter is active when 4230 TRIM MODE 0 trim mode is not active 4230 TRIM MODE Selects the type of trim if any Using the trim it is possible to combine a corrective factor to the drive reference 0 NOT SEL Disables the trim function 1 PROPORTIONAL Adds a trim factor that is proportional to the rpm Hz reference 2 DIRECT Adds a trim factor based on the control loop s maximum limit 4231 TRIM SCALE Defines the multiplier as a percent plus or minus used in the trim mode Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 200 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description 4232 CORRECTION SRC Defines the trimming reference for the correction source 1 PID2REF Uses appropriate REF MAX SWITCH A oR 1105 REF1 MAX when is active 1108 REF2 MAX when REF2 is active 2 PID2OUTPUT Uses the absolute maximum speed or frequency Switch C 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED if 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 VECT
272. ion status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFC Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 Speed Reg Motor Not allowed DI2 DI6 Free 1 DI1 Speed Reg Motor 011 First PFC Relay DI2 First PFC Relay DI2 DI6 Free DI3 DI6 Free 2 DI1 Speed Reg Motor 011 First PFC Relay DI2 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI3 DI6 Free 014 016 Free 3 DI1 Speed Reg Motor 011 First PFC Relay DI2 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI3 Third PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay DI4 DI6 Free DI5 DI6 Free 4 DI1 Speed Reg Motor 011 First PFC Relay DI2 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI3 Third PFC Relay 014 Third PFC Relay DI4 Fourth PFC Relay 015 Fourth PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 5 DI1 Speed Reg Motor 011 First PFC Relay DI2 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI3 Third PFC Relay 014 Third PFC Relay DI4 Fourth PFC Relay 015 Fourth PFC Relay 015 Fifth PFC Relay 016 Fifth PFC Relay DI6 Free 6 Not allowed 011 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Third PFC Relay 014 Fourth PFC Relay 015 Fifth PFC Relay DI6 Sixth PFC Relay Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 213 Code Description 2 DI2 Enables the Interlock function and assign
273. irection Define the maximum EXT REF 1 MIN using parameter 1105 Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST WARNING Because the low end of the reference range commands full reverse operation do not use 0 V as the lower end of the reference range Doing so means that if the control signal is lost which is a O V input the result is full reverse operation Instead use the following set up so that loss of the analog input triggers a fault stopping the drive Set parameter 1301 MINIMUM 11 1304 MINIMUM AI2 at 20 2 V or 4 mA Set parameter 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT to a value 5 or higher e Set parameter 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION to 1 FAULT 4 AI2 JOYST Defines analog input 2 A12 configured for joystick operation as the reference source e See above AI1 JOYST description EXT REF 1 MAX EXT REF 1 MIN Hysteresis 4 of full scale Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 140 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description 5 DI3U 4D R Defines digital inputs as the speed reference source motor potentiometer control Digital input DI3 increases the speed the u stands for up Digital input D14 decreases the speed the stands for down Stop command resets the reference to zero the stands for reset Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal s rate of change
274. is green and does not blink The drive is now ready for use Start up control with I O and ID Run Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 66 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual How to perform the guided start up To be able to perform the guided start up you need the Assistant Control Panel Before you start ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand SAFETY The start up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician The safety instructions given in chapter Safety must be followed during the start up procedure The drive will start up automatically at power up if the external run command is on Check the installation See the checklist in chapter nstallation page 59 Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger De couple the driven machine if there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation or ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start up ID Run is essential only in applications that require the ultimate in motor control accuracy POWER UP Apply input power The control panel first asks if you want to use Dru Wane the Start up Assistant ee he starts T Press lt s when is highlighted to run the Start up Assistant 0 EXIT 00 00 OK e Press EZ if you do not want to run the Start up Assistant Press key lt lt
275. l location 2 EXT2 the configuration of start stop and direction commands See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS above 1003 DIRECTION Defines the control of motor rotation direction 1 FORWARD Rotation is fixed in the forward direction 2 REVERSE Rotation is fixed in the reverse direction 3 REQUEST Rotation direction can be changed on command 1004 JOGGING SEL Defines the signal that activates the jogging function Jogging uses Constant Speed 7 parameter 1208 for speed reference and ramp pair 2 parameters 2205 and 2206 for accelerating and decelerating When the jogging activation signal is lost the drive uses ramp stop to decelerate to zero speed even if coast stop is used in normal operation parameter 2102 The jogging status can be parameterized to relay outputs parameter 1401 The jogging status is also seen in DCU Profile status bit 21 0 NOT SEL Disables the jogging function 1 011 Activates de activates jogging based on the state of 011 011 activated jogging active 011 de activated jogging inactive 2 6 DI2 DI6 Activates jogging based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Activates jogging based on the state of DI1 011 activated jogging inactive 011 de activated jogging active 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Activates jogging based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 INV above Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 477
276. l signals The drive sets the values for actual signals based on measurements or calculations You cannot set these values Code Description 0101 SPEED amp DIR calculated signed speed of the motor rpm The absolute value of 0101 SPEED amp DIR is the same as the value of 0102 SPEED The value of 0101 SPEED amp DIR is positive if the motor runs in the forward direction The value of 0101 SPEED amp DIR is negative if the motor runs in the reverse direction 0102 SPEED The calculated speed of the motor rpm Parameter 0102 or 0103 is shown by default in the control panel Output mode 0103 OUTPUT FREQ The frequency Hz applied to the motor Parameter 0102 or 0103 is shown by default in the control panel Output mode 0104 CURRENT The motor current as measured by the ACS550 Shown by default in the control panel Output mode 0105 TORQUE Output torque Calculated value of torque on motor shaft in of motor nominal torque Shown by default in the control panel Output mode 0106 POWER measured motor power in kW 0107 BUS VOLTAGE DC bus voltage in V DC as measured by the ACS550 0109 JOUTPUT VOLTAGE The voltage applied to the motor 0110 IDRIVE TEMP temperature of the drive power transistors in degrees Celsius 0111 EXTERNAL REF 1 External reference REF1 in rpm or Hz units determined by parameter 9904 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 External reference REF2 in 96 0113 CTRL LOCATION Active c
277. le and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the STATUS WORD content for the ABB Drives profile ABB Drives profile EFB STATUS WORD See parameter 5320 Bit Name Value Description Correspond to states boxes in the state diagram RDY_ON READY TO SWITCH ON NOT READY TO SWITCH ON RDY_RUN READY TO OPERATE OFF1 ACTIVE RDY_REF OPERATION ENABLED OPERATION INHIBITED TRIPPED FAULT No fault OFF_2_STA OFF2 INACTIVE OFF2 ACTIVE OFF_3 STA OFF3 INACTIVE OFF3 ACTIVE SWC_ON_INHIB SWITCH ON INHIBIT ACTIVE SWITCH ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE ALARM Alarm See section Alarm listing on page 280 for details on alarms No alarm AT_SETPOINT OPERATING Actual value equals within tolerance limits the reference value Actual value is outside tolerance limits not equal to reference value REMOTE Drive control location REMOTE EXT1 or 2 Drive control location LOCAL 10 ABOVE_LIMIT Supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit Bit remains 1 until supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit See Group 32 SUPERVISION Supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit Bit remains 0 until supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit See Group 32 SUPERVISION 11 EXT CTRL LOC External control location 2
278. lication macros Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 107 PID Control macro This macro provides parameter settings for closed loop control systems such as pressure control flow control etc To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 6 PID CONTROL Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting OFF Connection example X1 1 10 kohg41 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 AM External ref 1 Manual or Ext ref 2 PID 0 10 V 3 AGND Analog input circuit common Note 1 3 4 10 Reference voltage 10 V DC Manual 0 10V gt speed reference 5 2 Actual signal PID 4 20 mA PID 0 10V gt 0 100 PID 6 AGND Analog input circuit common setpoint DH H7 1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA mo 8 2 Output current 0 20 mA 9 AGND Analog output circuit common Note 3 The sensor needs to be powered 10 24 Auxiliary voltage output 24 V the manufacturer s instructions 11 IGND Auxiliary voltage output common A connection example of a two wire 12 DCOM Digital input common for all sensor is shown on page 770 13 DI1 Start Stop H
279. ling on page 271 Generic profile technical data Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Diagnostics Fault handling The ACS550 provides fault information as follows e Drive fault code Fieldbus fault code DRIVECOM specification 1 OVERCURRENT 2310h 2 DC OVERVOLT 3210h 3 DEV OVERTEMP 4210h 4 SHORT CIRC 2340h 5 Reserved FF6Bh 6 DC UNDERVOLT 3220h 7 AI1 LOSS 8110h 8 AI2 LOSS 8110h 9 MOT OVERTEMP 4310h 10 PANEL LOSS 5300h 11 ID RUN FAIL FF84h 12 MOTOR STALL 7121h 14 EXT FAULT 1 9000h 15 EXT FAULT 2 9001h 16 EARTH FAULT 2330h 17 Obsolete FF6Ah 18 THERM FAIL 5210h 19 OPEX LINK 7500h 20 OPEX PWR 5414h 21 CURR MEAS 2211h 22 SUPPLY PHASE 3130h 23 ENCODER ERR 7301h 24 OVERSPEED 7310h 25 Reserved FF80h 26 DRIVE ID 5400h 259 The control panel display shows a fault code and text See chapter Diagnostics on page 273 for a complete description Parameters 0401 LAST FAULT 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT1 and 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT2 store the most recent faults For fieldbus access the drive reports faults as a hexadecimal value assigned and coded according to the DRIVECOM specification See the table below Not all profiles support requesting fault codes using this specification For profiles that support this specification the pr
280. ller than a positive difference This keeps feedback values at or below the setpoint Controller does not react to the situation of feedback below setpoint if another zone s feedback is closer to its setpoint 14 2 ZONE AVE The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and feedback 2 In addition it calculates the average of the deviations and uses it to control zone 1 Therefore one feedback is kept above its setpoint and another is kept as much below its setpoint 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input 011 as the control for PID Set selection Activating the digital input selects PID Set 1 De activating the digital input selects PID Set 2 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for PID Set selection See DI1 INV above Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 198 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Group 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 Parameters of this group belong to PID parameter set 2 The operation of parameters 4101 4126 is analogous with set 1 parameters 4001 4026 PID parameter set 2 can be selected by parameter 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET Code Description 4101 4126 See 4001 4026 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 19
281. low Drive parameter Value Protocol reference 0122 RO 1 3 STATUS Relay 1 3 status 0123 RO 4 6 STATUS Relay 4 6 status Analog output control Using the fieldbus for analog output control e g PID setpoint requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied analog value s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Drive parameter Value Description 1501 1 CONTENT SEL 135 COMM VALUE 1 Analog Output 1 controlled by 0135 Fea VALUE x writing to parameter 0135 1502 A01 CONTENT MIN Set appropriate Used for scaling tn M values 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 1506 FILTER AO1 Filter time constant for Ao1 1507 2 CONTENT SEL 136 COMM VALUE 2 Analog Output 2 controlled by 0136 COMMVALUE E writing to parameter 0136 1508 2 CONTENT MIN appropriate Used for scaling ite 6 values 1511 MAXIMUM 2 1512 FILTER 2 Filter time constant for 2 Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 258 PID Control setpoint source ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Using the following settings to select the fieldbus as the setpoint source for PID loops Drive parameter Value Setting Protocol reference 4010 SET POI
282. low Type code y y dissipation Frame ACS550 02 bw 3 size h A kW mu 245A 4 245 132 192 110 3850 540 R7 289A 4 289 160 224 132 4550 540 R7 368A 4 368 200 302 160 6850 1220 R8 486A 4 486 250 414 200 7850 1220 R8 526A 4 526 280 477 250 7600 1220 R8 602A 4 602 315 515 280 8100 1220 R8 645A 4 645 355 590 315 9100 1220 R8 00467918 xls NEMA ratings Ratings 380 480 V AC supply Type code Heat a Normal use Heavy duty use Air flow 5550 02 dissipation Frame L L size UL 1 2N N 2hd hd BTU hr ftS min 5 NEMA 1 A hp A hp 196A 4 1 196 150 162 125 10416 318 R7 245A 4 245 200 192 150 13148 318 R7 316A 4 316 250 240 200 23394 718 R8 368 4 368 300 302 250 23394 718 R8 414A 4 414 350 368 300 26809 718 R8 486A 4 486 400 414 350 26809 718 R8 526A 4 526 450 477 400 25955 718 R8 602A 4 602 500 515 450 27663 718 R8 645A 4 645 550 590 500 31078 718 R8 00467918 xls B 1 ACS550 U2 196A 4 and ACS550 U2 245A 4 will be discontinued Consult US factory Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 294 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Symbols Typical ratings Normal use 10 overload capability lon continuous rms current 10 overload is allowed for one minute in ten minutes PN typical motor power The power ratings apply to most IEC 34 or NEMA 4 pole motors at the nomin
283. lrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 214 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description 3 013 Enables the Interlocks function and assigns a digital input starting with DI3 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFC Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 DI2 Free Not allowed DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI4 DI6 Free 1 DI1 DI2 Free DI1 DI2 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI3 First PFC Relay 014 First PFC Relay DI4 DI6 Free DI5 DI6 Free 2 DI1 DI2 Free DI1 DI2 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI3 First PFC Relay 014 First PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI5 Second PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 3 DI1 DI2 Free 011 012 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI3 First PFC Relay DI4 First PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay 015 Second PFC Relay 015 Third PFC Relay DI6 Third PFC Relay 016 Free 4 Not allowed 011 012 Free DI3 First PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay 015 Third PFC Relay DI6 Fourth PFC Relay 5 6 allowed Not allowed 4 014 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with D14 to the interlo
284. ltage output 24 V DC 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 12 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 011 Start Stop Hand Activation starts the drive 14 012 Forward Reverse Hand Activation reverses rotation direction 15 DI3 EXT1 EXT2 Selection Activation selects auto control 16 014 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 17 DI5 Forward Reverse Auto Activation reverses rotation direction 18 DI6 Start Stop Auto Activation starts the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A x Default operation 21 RO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable 23 RO2A x Default operation 24 2 Running gt 22 connected to 24 Note 1 25 Relay output 3 programmable The sensor needs to be powered 26 Default operation See the manufacturer s instructions 27 Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 A connection example of a two wire Fault gt 25 connected to 26 sensor is shown on page 770 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Two analog references 11 2 Analog output AO1 Speed J1 Start stop hand auto 011 6 Analog output AO2 Current 9 Al1 0 10 V Direction hand auto DI2 5 Relay output 1 Ready 9 p gt 2 0 4 20 mA Control location selection DI3 Relay output 2 Running or Run enable 014 Relay output 3 Fault 1 J1 2D 15 1 0 10 V Y07 AI2 0 4 20 App
285. lues for constant speeds Constant speed selections are ignored if the torque control is active or the process PID reference is followed or the drive is in local control mode or PFC Pump Fan Control is active Note Parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 acts also as a so called fault speed which may be activated if the control signal is lost For example see parameters 3001 lt FUNCTION 3002 PANEL COMM ERR and 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC Code Description 1201 CONST SPEED SEL Defines the digital inputs used to select Constant Speeds See general comments in introduction 0 NOT SEL Disables the constant speed function 1 011 Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI1 Digital input activated Constant Speed 1 activated 2 6 DI2 DI6 Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI2 DI6 See above 7 011 2 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using 011 and 012 Uses two digital inputs as defined below 0 de activated 1 DI activated 011 012 Function 0 0 No constant speed 1 0 Constant speed 1 1202 0 1 speed 2 1203 1 1 speed 3 1204 Can be set up as a so called fault speed which is activated if the control signal is lost Refer to parameter 3001 AI lt MIN function and parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR 8 DI2 3 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI2 and DI3 See above 11 2 for code 9 013 4 Selects one of
286. mbient temperature 15 40 C 5 104 F no frost allowed Max 50 122 F if Py and bw derated to 90 40 70 C 40 158 F Relative humidity lt 95 non condensing Contamination levels IEC 721 3 3 No conductive dust allowed The drive should be installed in clean air according to enclosure classification Cooling air must be clean free from corrosive materials and free from electrically conductive dust Chemical gases Class 3C2 Solid particles Class 352 Storage No conductive dust allowed chemical gases Class 1C2 solid particles Class 152 Transportation Noconductive dust allowed Chemical gases Class 2C2 Solid particles Class 252 Sinusoidal vibration IEC 60068 2 6 Mechanical conditions Class 3M4 IEC 60721 3 3 2 9 Hz 3 0 mm 0 12 in 9 200 Hz 10 m s 33 ft s Storage Max 1 mm 0 04 in 5 to 13 2 Hz max 7 m s 23 ft s 13 2 to 100 Hz sinusoidal Transportation 3 5 mm 0 14 in 2 to 9 Hz max 15 m s 49 ft s 9 to 200 Hz sinusoidal Shock Not allowed max 100 m s 330 ft s 11ms IEC 68 2 29 Free fall Not allowed 100 mm 4 in for weight over 100 kg 220 Ib Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 304 Materials ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Materials specifications Drive enclosure PC
287. ments or improper installation may shorten motor life or damage the motor bearings ACS550 02 U2 devices have common mode filters as standard accessories Planning the electrical installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 17 Random wound ABB motors and generators of series M2_ and M3_ Random wound Uy lt 500 V lt 100 kW Py gt 100 kW Py gt 350 kW or standard motors non Ex and generators IEC 315 lt frame size lt IEC 400 lt frame size lt IEC 355 IEC 450 Standard Standard motor Standard motor motor insulated N bearing insulated N bearing common mode filter Random wound high UN lt 500 V Py lt 55 KW Py gt 55 kW Py gt 200 kW output motors and other non harmonized designs Standard Standard motor Standard motor motor insulated N bearing insulated N bearing common mode filter Random wound motors Uy lt 500 V lt IEC 250 gt IEC 280 gt IEC 355 for hazardous environments Ex motors Standard Standard motor Standard motor motor insulated N bearing insulated N bearing common mode filter Random wound ABB motors and generators of series HX and 0 lt Uy lt 500 V Winding type Protective measures Enamelled wire with fibre glass taping insulated N bearing Form wound low voltage ABB mo tors of series AM and HX
288. meter 5127 is not used changes to parameters 5102 5126 take affect only after the drive power is cycled Parameters 5128 5133 provide data about the FBA module currently installed e g component versions and status See Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE for parameter descriptions Activate drive control functions Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function define as a fieldbus input any drive data required for control define as a fieldbus output any control data required by the drive The following sections describe at a general level the configuration required for each control function The last column in each table below is deliberately blank See the user s manual supplied with the FBA module for the appropriate entry Start Stop Direction control Using the fieldbus for start stop direction control of the drive requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Protocol Drive parameter Value Description r ference 1001 EXT1 10 COMM Start Stop controlled by fieldbus with COMMANDS Ext1 selected Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 256 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual
289. meters such as those created by the ID Run restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive dL A Download All This writes all parameters including the internal non user adjustable motor parameters to the drive It does not include the user sets of parameters Note Only use this function to restore a drive or to transfer parameters to systems that are identical to the original system copy a partial parameter set from the control panel to a drive dL P Download Partial The partial set does not include user sets internal motor parameters parameters 9905 9909 1605 1607 5201 nor any Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE and Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same copy USER S1 parameters from the control panel to the drive dL u1 Download User Set 1 A user set includes Group 99 START UP DATA parameters and the internal motor parameters The function is only shown on the menu when User Set 1 has been first saved using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO see section User parameter sets on page 111 and then uploaded to panel copy USER S2 parameters from the control panel to the drive dL u2 Download User Set 2 As dL u1 Download User Set 1 above start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com
290. method parameter 9970 The default value 0 OFF IDMAGN using the identification magnetization is suitable for most applications It is applied in this basic start up procedure Note however that this requires that parameter 9904 is set to 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ or parameter 9904 is set to 3 SCALAR FREQ and parameter 2707 is set to 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST If your selection is OFF IDMAGN move to the next step Value 1 ON which performs a separate ID Run should be selected if vector control mode is used parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ and or the operation point is near zero speed and or operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback is required If you decide to do the ID Run value 1 ON continue by following the separate instructions given on page 69 in section How to perform the ID Run and then return to step DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION on page 64 IDENTIFICATION MAGNETIZATION WITH ID RUN SELECTION 0 OFF IDMAGN e e As stated above the identification magnetization is performed only if parameter 9904 is set to 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ or parameter 9904 is set to 3 SCALAR FREQ and parameter 2707 is set to 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST Press key gj to switch to local control LOC shown on the left Press to start the drive The
291. minal phase to phase input voltage Fundamental power factor cos phi 0 98 at nominal load Cable temperature rating 70 C 158 F rating minimum Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 300 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Motor connection Motor connection specifications Voltage 02 0 U 3 phase symmetrical Umax at the field weakening point Frequency 0 500 Hz Frequency 0 01 Hz resolution Current See section Ratings on page 293 Power limit 1 5 Phd Field weakening 10 500 Hz point Switching Selectable 1 4 kHz frequency Cable 70 C 158 F rating minimum temperature rating Maximum motor See section Motor cable length below cable length Motor cable length A The table below shows the maximum motor cable lengths for 1 or 4 kHz switching frequencies Examples for using the table are also given Frame EMC limits Operational limits IEC EN 61800 3 IEC EN 61800 3 Basic limits With du dt Second environment First environment filters category C3 category C2 m ft m ft m ft m ft R7 100 330 100 330 300 980 300 980 R8 100 330 300 980 300 980 1 See the new terms in section 61800 3 2004 Definitions on page 306 00577999 xls A Sine filters further extend the cable lengths Under heading Operational l
292. motor model is now calculated by magnetizing the motor for 10 to 15 s at zero speed motor not rotating DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION Check the direction of the motor rotation If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the left LOC switch to local control by pressing X X X Hz To go to the Main menu press S if the bottom line shows EAM FD OUTPUT otherwise press 77 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom Press keys until you see and press Increase the frequency reference from zero to a small value with key Press to start the motor Check that the actual direction of the motor is the same as indicated on the display FWD means forward and REV reverse Press CQ to stop the motor e e Start up control with I O and ID Run Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 65 To change the direction of the motor rotation Disconnect input power from the drive and wait 5 minutes forward for the intermediate circuit capacitors to discharge Measure SN the voltage between each input terminal U1 V1 W1 and earth with a multimeter to ensure that the drive is A discharged y e Exchange the position of two motor cable phase conductors E at the drive output terminals or at the motor connection box z Verify your w
293. n e g operation mode or parameter by scrolling the lt amp and lt lt arrow keys until the option is visible the display and then pressing the x key With the 7 key you return to the previous operation level without saving the made changes The Basic Control Panel has five panel modes Output Reference Parameter Copy and Fault The operation in the first four modes is described in this chapter When a fault or alarm occurs the panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the fault or alarm code You can reset the fault or alarm in the Output or Fault mode see chapter Diagnostics After the power is switched on the panel is in the Output mode where you can start stop change the direction switch between local and remote control and monitor up to three actual values one at a time To do other tasks go first to the Main menu and select the appropriate mode How to do common tasks 49 REM OUTPUT FWD PAT MENU F WD The table below lists common tasks the mode in which you can perform them and the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail Task Mode Page How to switch between local and remote control Any 94 How to start and stop the drive Any 94 How to change the direction of the motor rotation Any 94 How to browse the monitored signals Output 95 How to set the speed frequency or torque reference R
294. n Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun 3603 STOP TIME 1 Defines the daily stop time time be changed in steps of 2 seconds If the parameter value is 09 00 00 the timer is deactivated at 9 a m 3604 START DAY 1 Defines the weekly start day 1 MONDAY 7 SUNDAY If parameter value is 1 timer 1 weekly is active from Monday midnight 00 00 00 3605 STOP DAY 1 Defines weekly stop day 1 MONDAY 7 SUNDAY If parameter value is 5 timer 1 weekly is deactivated on Friday midnight 23 59 58 3606 START TIME 2 Defines timer2 daily start time See parameter 3602 3607 STOP TIME 2 Defines timer 2 daily stop time See parameter 3603 3608 START DAY 2 Defines timer 2 weekly start day See parameter 3604 3609 STOP DAY 2 Defines timer 2 weekly stop day See parameter 3605 3610 START TIME 3 Defines timer 3 daily start time See parameter 3602 3611 STOP TIME 3 Defines timer 3 daily stop time See parameter 3603 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 185 Code Description 3612 START DAY 3 Defines timer 3 weekly start day See parameter 3604 3613 STOP DAY 3 Defines timer 3 weekly stop day See parameter 3605 3614 START TIME 4 Defines timer 4 daily start time See parameter 3602 3615 STOP
295. nals in either a PNP or NPN configuration PNP connection source NPN connection sink x1 x1 10 24V 10 24V 11 GND lt 111 GND 112 DCOM 12 DCOM 13 DI1 13 DI 14 DI2 14 DI2 15 013 15 013 16 014 16 014 17 015 17 015 18 016 18 016 Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 57 Connecting the shield wires at the control board EE Single shielded cables Twist the grounding wires of the outer shield and connect them to the grounding busbar below the 1 terminals Double shielded cables Connect the inner shields and the grounding wires of the outer shield to the grounding busbar below the X1 terminals Do not connect shields of different cables to the same grounding clamp Leave the other end of the shield unconnected or ground it indirectly via a few nanofarads high frequency high voltage capacitor e g 3 3 nF 3000 V The shield can also be grounded directly at both ends if they are in the same ground line with no significant voltage drop between the end points Keep the signal wire pairs twisted as close to the terminals as possible Twisting the wire with its return wire reduces disturbances caused by inductive coupling
296. nance notice is displayed on the panel 0 Resets the parameter 2905 IRUN TIME TRIG Sets the trigger point for the drive s run time counter Value is compared to parameter 2906 value 0 0 Disables the trigger 2906 TIME Defines the actual value of the drive s run time counter When parameter 2905 has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2905 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 0 Resets the parameter 2907 USER MWh TRIG Sets the trigger point for the drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours counter Value is compared to parameter 2908 value 0 0 Disables the trigger 2908 USER MWh ACT Defines the actual value of the drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours counter When parameter 2907 has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2907 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 0 Resets the parameter Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 170 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS This group defines situations that the drive should recognize as potential faults and defines how the drive should respond if the fault is detected Code Description 3001 Al
297. ne 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 52 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Installation orientation c lifting from above Make the installation otherwise as described in nstallation orientation or b on page 39 but leave the pedestal connected to the frame Remove the lead through plate and the lower front and side plates Liftthe drive frame onto the lead through plate from above Fasten the drive to the floor e Connect the cable lugs to the terminals Fasten the lower front and side plates Fasten the drive by top to the wall recommended Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Routing the control signal cables inside the cubicle Frame size R7 Secure the cables with cable ties to the holes in the capacitor pack frame Lead the cables through the cushions This is for mechanical support only No 360 degrees EMC grounding is needed here Secure the x cables with cable ties to these holes 53 Frame size R8 Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 54 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Connecting the control cables Connect the control cables as described below Connect the conductors to the appropriate terminals of the control board Tighten the screws to secure the connection Use 0 4 N m
298. nected to the protective earth To fulfill this requirement the connection of a thermistor and other similar components to the digital inputs of the drive can be implemented in three alternate ways 1 There is double or reinforced insulation between the thermistor and live parts of the motor 2 Circuits connected to all digital and analog inputs of the drive are protected against contact and insulated with basic insulation the same voltage level as the drive main circuit from other low voltage circuits 3 An external thermistor relay is used The insulation of the relay from measuring circuit to output contact must be rated for the same voltage level as the main circuit of the drive Routing the cables Route the motor cable away from other cable routes Motor cables of several drives can be run in parallel installed next to each other It is recommended that the motor cable input power cable and control cables be installed on separate trays Avoid long parallel runs of motor cables with other cables in order to decrease electromagnetic interference caused by the rapid changes in the drive output voltage Where control cables must cross power cables make sure they are arranged at an angle as near to 90 degrees as possible The cable trays must have good electrical bonding to each other and to the grounding electrodes Aluminium tray systems can be used to improve local equalizing of potential A diagram of the cable routing
299. nes and connections Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR Parameters in Group 10 START STOP DIR and Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT if drive operation is REM Diagnostics Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 276 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Fault code Fault name in panel Description and recommended corrective action 11 ID RUN FAIL The Motor ID Run was not completed successfully Check for and correct Motor connections Motor parameters 9905 9909 12 MOTOR STALL Motor or process stall Motor is operating in the stall region Check for and correct Excessive load Insufficient motor power Parameters 3010 3012 13 RESERVED Not used 14 EXT FAULT 1 Digital input defined to report first external fault is active See parameter 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 15 EXT FAULT 2 Digital input defined to report second external fault is active See parameter 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 16 EARTH FAULT Possible ground fault detected in the motor or motor cables The drive monitors for ground faults while the drive is running and while the drive is not running Detection is more sensitive when the drive is not running and can produce false positives Possible corrections Check for correct faults in the input wiring Verify that motor cable does not exceed maximum specified length Adelta grounded input powe
300. ng time since the previous autochange reaches the time set by 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV The PFC input is below the level set by this parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Note The ACS550 always coasts to stop when autochange is performed In an autochange the Autochange function does all of the following see the figure e Initiates a change when the running time since the last 100 autochange reaches 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV and input is below limit 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Stops the speed regulated motor Switches off the contactor of the speed regulated motor Increments the starting order counter to change the starting order for the motors Identifies the next motor in line to be the speed regulated motor Switches off the above motor s contactor if the motor was running Any other running motors are not interrupted PID output A Switches the contactor of the new speed regulated P8118 motor The autochange switchgear connects this motor to the ACS550 power output A Area above 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFC START DELAY autochange not allowed Starts the speed regulated motor B Autochange occurs Identifies the next constant speed motor in the rotation 1PFC etc PID output associated with each motor Switches the above motor on but only if the new speed regulated motor had been running as a constant speed m
301. nged Parameters mode In the Changed Parameters mode you can view a list of all parameters that been changed from the macro default values change these parameters start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to view and edit changed parameters Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing RU if you are the Output mode otherwise LOC W MAIN MENU 1 PADAN by pressing IZ repeatedly until you get to the Main menu EXIT 100 00 ENTER 2 Go to the Changed Parameters mode by selecting CHANGED PAR on the LOC UC NGE D menu with keys and SY 2 and pressing S d 9 NST 204 CONST SPE 3 902 APPLIC MACRO EXIT 00 0 EDIT 3 Select the changed parameter on the list with keys A w 2 The LOC UPAR EDIT value of the selected parameter is shown below it Press Ew to modify the 1202 CONST SPEED 1 value 10 Hz CANCEL 1 00 00 SAVE 4 Specify a new value for the parameter with keys and Cw LOC UPAR EDIT Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value Holding the key 1202 CONST SPEED 1 down changes the value faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the 1 Z displayed value with the default value CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 5 To accept the new value press A If the new value is the default value the LOC UC HA
302. nloaded from the control panel to another drive or the same drive The control panel memory is non volatile and does not depend on the panel battery In the Parameter Backup mode you can copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel UPLOAD TO PANEL This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal not adjustable by the user parameters such as those created by the ID Run view the information about the backup stored to the control panel with UPLOAD TO PANEL BACKUP INFO This includes e g the type and rating of the drive where the backup was made It is useful to check this information when you are going to copy the parameters to another drive with DOWNLOAD FULL SET to ensure that the drives match restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD FULL SET This writes all parameters including the internal non user adjustable motor parameters to the drive It does not include the user sets of parameters Note Only use this function to restore a drive from a backup or to transfer parameters to systems that are identical to the original system copy a partial parameter set part of the full set from the control panel to a drive DOWNLOAD APPLICATION The partial set does not include user sets internal motor parameters parameters 9905 9909 1605 1607 5201 nor any Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE and Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters The source and target drives and their
303. not attempt to change the direction of motor rotation or Change parameter 1003 DIRECTION to allow direction change if reverse operation is safe 2005 IO COMM Fieldbus communication has timed out Check for and correct Fault setup 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Communication settings Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE or Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL as appropriate Poor connections and or noise on line 2006 AI1 LOSS Analog input 1 is lost or value is less than the minimum setting Check nput source and connections Parameter that sets the minimum 3021 Parameter that sets the alarm fault operation 3001 2007 AI2 LOSS Analog input 2 is lost or value is less than the minimum setting Check Input source and connections Parameter that sets the minimum 3022 Parameter that sets the alarm fault operation 3001 2008 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either Drive is in local control mode the control panel displays LOC or Drive is in remote control mode REM and is parameterized to accept start stop direction or reference from the control panel To correct check Communication lines and connections Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR Parameters in Group 10 START STOP DIR and Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT if drive operation is REM 2009 DEVICE OVERTEMP Drive heatsink is hot This alarm warns that a DEVICE OVERTEMP fault may
304. not fulfill the requirements specified in the documentation delivered with the unit and other relevant documentation Units subjected to misuse negligence or accident Units comprised of materials provided or designs stipulated by the purchaser In no event shall the manufacturer its suppliers or subcontractors be liable for special indirect incidental or consequential damages losses or penalties This is the sole and exclusive warranty given by the manufacturer with respect to the equipment and is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties express or implied arising by operation of law or otherwise including but not limited to any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose If you have any questions concerning your ABB drive please contact the local distributor or ABB office The technical data information and specifications are valid at the time of printing The manufacturer reserves the right to make modifications without prior notice Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 308 Product protection in the USA Dimension drawings This product is protected by one or more of the following US patents 4 920 306 5 612 604 6 094 364 6 252 436 6 370 049 6 600 290 6 922 883 6 972 976 7 023 160 7 067 997 7 164 562 7 245 197 D511 150 D541 745S 5 301 085 5 654 624 6 147 887 6 265 724 6 396 236 6 741 059 6 940
305. ns in chapter Safety on page 5 must be followed Diagnostic displays The drive detects error situations and reports them using e e the green and red LED on the body of the drive the status LED on the control panel if an Assistant Control Panel is attached to the drive the control panel display if a control panel is attached to the drive the Fault Word and Alarm Word parameter bits parameters 0305 to 0309 See Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS on page 134 for the bit definitions The form of the display depends on the severity of the error You can specify the severity for many errors by directing the drive to ignore the error situation report the situation as an alarm report the situation as a fault Red Faults The drive signals that it has detected a severe error or fault by e e e e enabling the red LED on the drive LED is either steady on or blinking showing the steady red status LED on the control panel if attached to the drive setting an appropriate bit in a Fault Word parameter 0305 to 0307 overriding the control panel display with the display of a fault code in the Fault mode figures on the right stopping the motor if it was on The fault code on the control panel display is temporary Pressing any of the following keys removes the fault message MENU ENTER UP or DOWN key LOC UFAULT FAULT 7 11 LOSS 00 00 F0007
306. nsion bar 4 Wheel the frame out by using the handle elo _ Wheeling the frame out Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 40 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Removing the pedestal frame size R8 1 Remove the lower front covers by undoing the fixing screws 2 Press the left support leg a little down and turn it left Let it lock down Turn the right leg aside in the same way The legs will prevent the drive from falling down during the installation 3 Undo the screws that fix the pedestal to the frame from front 4 Undo the screws that connect the busbars of the pedestal to the upper frame Use a torque wrench with an extension see the figure on page 47 5 Wheel the drive frame out by using the handle see the figure on page 47
307. nt suggests or independently The tasks of the assistants are listed in the table on page 82 In the Assistants mode you can use assistants to guide you through the specification of a set of basic parameters start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to use an assistant The table below shows the basic operation sequence which leads you through assistants The Motor Set up Assistant is used as an example Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing lt if you are in the Output mode otherwise LOC MAIN MENU 1 by pressing e repeatedly until you get to the Main menu PARAM CHANGED PAR EXIT 1 00 00 ENTER 2 Go to the Assistants mode by selecting ASSISTANTS on the menu with keys LOC WASSI STANTS 1 tart up assistant SY 2 and pressing ST Application Speed control Speed control EXT2 EXIT 100 00 SEL 3 Select the assistant with keys and CY 2 and press SS LOC UPAR EDIT If you select any other assistant than the Start up Assistant it guides you 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT through the task of specification of its parameter set as shown in steps 4 and 5 below After that you can select another assistant on the Assistants menu or exit the Assistants mode The Motor Set up Assistant is used here as an example EXIT 00 00 SAVE If you select the Start up Assistant it activates the first assistant which guides po ae
308. ntil you see MENU at the bottom REM f ME NU F WD 2 If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the left switch to local LOC control by pressing 2 The display briefly shows LoC before switching f to local control MENU FWD Note With Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT you can allow the reference modification in remote control REM 3 If the panel is not in the Reference mode rEF not visible press key LOC CA or Kw 2 until you see and then press Now the display f shows the current reference value with under the value MENU FWD LOC Hz FWD 4 increase the reference value press LOC D decrease the reference value press w 7 The value changes immediately when you press key It is stored in the FWD drive permanent memory and restored automatically after power switch off Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 97 Parameter mode In the Parameter mode you can view and change parameter values select and modify the signals shown in the Output mode start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to select a parameter and change its value Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the
309. nu and select the appropriate mode on the menu DIR 100 00 MENU The status line see section Status line on page 73 shows 10 UMAIN MENU 1 the name of the current menu mode item or state PARAM R CHANGED PAR How to do common tasks EXIT 100 00 ENTER The table below lists common tasks the mode in which you can perform them and the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail Task Mode Page How to get help Any 75 How to find out the panel version At power up 75 How to adjust the display contrast Output 78 How to switch between local and remote control Any 76 How to start and stop the drive Any 76 How to change the direction of the motor rotation Output 77 How to set the speed frequency or torque reference Output 78 How to change the value of a parameter Parameters 79 How to select the monitored signals Parameters 80 How to do guided tasks specification of related parameter sets Assistants 81 with assistants How to view and edit changed parameters Changed Parameters 84 How to view faults Fault Logger 85 How to reset faults and alarms Output Fault 279 How to show hide the clock change date and time formats set the Time and Date 86 clock and enable disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes How to copy parameters from the drive to the control panel Parameter Backup 89 How to restore parameters from t
310. o inference in which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 307 Second environment drives of category C3 1 Frame size R7 drives The internal EMC filter is connected and the EMC screen is installed Frame size R8 drives comply with the demands of category C3 The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual 3 The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual The maximum motor cable length is 100 m 330 ft WARNING A drive of category C3 is not intended to be used on a low voltage public network which supplies domestic premises Radio frequency interference is expected if the drive is used on such a network Note It is not allowed to install a frame size R7 drive with the internal EMC filter connected on IT ungrounded systems The supply network becomes connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors which may cause danger or damage the drive Note It is not allowed to install frame size R7 drive with the internal EMC filter connected to a corner grounded TN system as this would damage the drive Equipment warranty and liability The manufacturer is not responsible for Any costs resulting from a failure if the installation commissioning repair alteration or ambient conditions of the drive do
311. o protect the drive in 0 1 s Select a faster fuse to ensure that the required 0 1 s operation time is met Fuses 52 ea E x dk UL Class n E ACS550 U2 A A A A 196A 4 196 3820 250 OFAF1H250 250 JJS 250 245A 4 245 4510 250 OFAF2H315 400 JJS 300 289A 4 289 4510 315 OFAF2H315 400 JJS 400 316A A 316 400 400 JJS 500 368A 4 368 6180 400 400 400 45 500 414 414 500 600 JJS 500 486A 4 486 10200 500 OFAF3H630 600 JJS 600 526A 4 526 10200 630 OFAF3H630 800 JJS 800 602A 4 602 10200 630 OFAF3H630 800 JJS 800 645A 4 645 13500 800 OFAF3H800 800 JJS 800 00467918 xls B Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 296 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Circuit breakers Use of fuses is preferable but ABB MCCB circuit breakers listed in the table below can also be used Type code Input current ABB Tmax moulded case circuit breaker MCCB ACS550 02 Tmax frame Tmax rating Electronic Prospective short ACS550 U2 release circuit current A A A kA 196A 4 196 T4 250 250 65 245A 4 245 T4 320 320 65 289A 4 289 T4 320 320 65 316A 4 316 T5 630 630 65 368A 4 368 T5 630 630 65 414A 4 414 T5 630 630 65 486A 4 486 T5 630 630 65 526A 4 526 T5 630 630 65 602A 4 602 T5 630 630 65 645A 4 645
312. ochange enabled relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 DI4 Free Not allowed 011 014 Free 015 Speed Reg Motor DI6 First PFC Relay DI1 DI4 Free 015 First PFC Relay DI6 Free 2 Not allowed DI1 DI4 Free 015 First PFC Relay DI6 Second PFC Relay 3 6 Not allowed Not allowed motor Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 6 DI6 Enables the Interlock function and assigns digital input 016 to the interlock signal for the speed regulated No PFC Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays 0 011 015 Free Not allowed DI6 Speed Reg Motor 1 Not allowed DI1 Di5 Free 016 First PFC Relay 2 6 Notallowed Not allowed Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 216 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL without a PID regulator Use Regulator by pass control only in special applications 0 No Disables Regulator by pass control The drive Selects Regulator by pass control When enabled Regulator by pass control provides a simple control mechanism fouT fmax outlet flow is controlled by the measured inlet flow lt A gt lt uses the normal PFC reference 1106 REF2 SELECT 1 5 Enables Regulator by pass control process PID regulator is bypassed Actual value of PID is used as the PFC
313. ode you can check the parameter settings related to any I O terminal 91 edit the parameter setting For example if 1103 REF 1 is listed under Ain1 Analog input 1 that is parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT has value AI1 you change its value to e g AI2 You cannot however set the value of parameter 1106 REF2 SELECT to AI1 start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to edit and change parameter settings related to I O terminals Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing x if you are in the Output mode otherwise LOC MENU 1 b EXIT DARAM y pressing 7 repeatedly until you get to the Main menu EXIT 100 00 ENTER 2 Go the I O Settings mode by selecting I O SETTINGS on the menu with keys A and amp w 2 and pressing NW 3 Select the I O group e g DIGITAL INPUTS with keys and S Y 2 and LOC 51 0 SETTI NGS press E wl After a brief pause the display shows the current settings for the I TART STOP EL selection DI 3 EXIT 100 00 4 Select the setting line with a parameter number with keys and vw LOC UPAR EDIT EDIT and press 7 1001 11 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 5 Specify a new value for the setting with keys A and Cw LOC UPAR EDIT Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value Holding the key 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS down changes the valu
314. oder Interface Module OTAC 01 and an encoder Operation depends on the setting of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED The encoder provides improved speed feedback and improved low speed torque accuracy 9904 2 VECTOR TORQ The encoder provides improved speed feedback and improved low speed torque accuracy 9904 3 SCALAR SPEED The encoder provides speed feedback This is not closed loop speed regulation However using parameter 2608 sLIP COMP RATIO and an encoder improves steady state speed accuracy 5003 ENCODER FAULT Defines the drive operation if a failure is detected in communication between the encoder and the encoder interface module or between the module and the drive 1 FAULT The drive generates fault ENCODER ERR and the motor coasts to a stop 2 ALARM The drive generates alarm ENCODER ERR and operates as if parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE 0 DISABLE that is speed feedback is derived from the internal motor model 5010 Z PLS ENABLE Enables disables the use of an encoder s Z pulse to define the motor shaft s zero position When enabled a Z pulse input resets parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE to zero to define the shaft s zero position This function requires an encoder that provides Z pulse signals 0 DISABLE Z pulse input is not present or ignored if present 1 ENABLE A Z pulse input resets parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE to zero 5011 POSITION RESET Resets the en
315. ofile documentation defines the proper fault request process Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 260 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Fieldbus fault code Drive fault code DRIVECOM specification 27 CONFIG FILE 630Fh 28 SERIAL 1 ERR 7510h 29 EFB CON FILE 6306h 30 FORCE TRIP FF90h 31 EFB 1 FF92h 32 EFB 2 FF93h 33 EFB 3 FF94h 34 MOTOR PHASE FF56h 35 OUTP WIRING FF95h 36 INCOMPATIBLE SW 630Fh 37 CB OVERTEMP 4110h 38 USER LOAD CURVE FF6Bh 101 SERF CORRUPT FF55h 102 Reserved FF55h 103 SERF MACRO FF55h 104 Reserved FF55h 105 Reserved FF55h 201 DSP T1 OVERLOAD 6100h 202 DSP T2 OVERLOAD 6100h 203 DSP T3 OVERLOAD 6100h 204 DSP STACK ERROR 6100h 205 Reserved obsolete 5000h 206 CB ID ERROR 5000h 207 EFB LOAD ERROR 6100h 1000 PAR HZRPM 6320h 1001 PAR PFC REF NEG 6320h 1002 Reserved obsolete 6320h 1003 PAR Al SCALE 6320h 1004 PAR AO SCALE 6320h 1005 PAR PCU 2 6320h 1006 PAR EXT RO 6320h 1007 PAR FIELDBUS MISSING 6320h 1008 PAR PFC MODE 6320h 1009 PAR PCU 1 6320h 1012 PAR PFC IO 1 6320h 1013 PAR PFC IO 2 6320h 1014 PAR PFC IO 6320h 1016 PAR USER LOAD 6320h Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 261 Seri
316. ofiles used sees section ABB control profiles technical data on page 239 Note The words output and input are used as seen from the fieldbus controller point of view For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view Planning Network planning should address the following questions e e e What types and quantities of devices must be connected to the network What control information must be sent down to the drives What feedback information must be sent from the drives to the controlling system Mechanical and electrical installation EFB the power source WARNING Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from Drive terminals 28 32 are for RS485 communications e Use Belden 9842 or equivalent Belden 9842 is a dual twisted shielded pair cable with a wave impedance of 120 ohm Use one of these twisted shielded pairs for the RS485 link Use this pair to connect all A terminals together and all B terminals together Use one of the wires in the other pair for the logical ground terminal 31 leaving one wire unused Do not directly ground the RS485 network at any point Ground all devices on the network using their corresponding earthing terminals As always the grounding wires should not form any closed loops and all the devices should be earthed to a common ground Conn
317. oller actual values PID1 parameters 0128 0130 and 0132 See parameter 3405 for list of available units 4007 UNIT SCALE Se ERR 4007 value Entry Display Defines the decimal point location in PID controller actual values 0 0003 3 Enter the decimal point location counting in from the right of the entry e See the table for example using pi 3 14159 1 0031 3 1 2 0314 3 14 3 3142 3 142 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 193 Code Description 4008 0 VALUE Units P4006 Defines together with the next parameter the scaling applied to Scale P4007 1000 0 the PID controller s actual values PID1 parameters 0128 0130 as and 0132 Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 P 4009 A 4009 100 VALUE Defines together with the previous parameter the scaling applied to the PID controller s actual values 4008 Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 T s 0 100 1000 0 Internal scale 4010 ISET POINT SEL Defines the reference signal source for the PID controller Parameter has no significance when the PID regulator is by passed see 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL 0 KEYPAD Control panel provides reference 1 AI Analog input 1 provides reference 2 Al2 Analog input 2 provides reference 8 COMM F
318. on tests done according to UL 508 LISTED Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with local codes The ACS550 has an electronic motor protection feature that complies with the requirements of UL 508C When this feature is selected and properly adjusted additional overload protection is not required unless more than one motor is connected to the drive or unless additional protection is required by applicable safety regulations See parameters 3005 MOT THERM PROT and 3006 MOT THERM RATE Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 306 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual The drives are to be used in a controlled environment See section Ambient conditions on page 303 for specific limits IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Definitions EMC stands for Electromagnetic Compatibility It is the ability of electrical electronic equipment to operate without problems within an electromagnetic environment Likewise the equipment must not disturb or interfere with any other product or system within its locality First environment includes establishments connected to a low voltage network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes Second environment includes establishments connected to a network not directly supplying domestic premises Drive of category C2 drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended to be installed and commissioned only by a professional when u
319. only be detected if the error is such that the calculated slip is greater than 4 times the rated slip of the motor Encoder is not being used but parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE 1 ENABLE Diagnostics Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 277 Fault Fault name in M code panel Description and recommended corrective action 24 OVERSPEED Motor speed is greater than 120 of the larger in magnitude of 2001 MINIMUM SPEED or 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED Check for and correct Parameter settings for 2001 and 2002 Adequacy of motor braking torque Applicability of torque control Brake chopper and resistor 25 RESERVED Not used 26 DRIVE ID Internal fault Configuration Block Drive ID is not valid Contact your local ABB representative 27 CONFIG FILE Internal configuration file has an error Contact your local ABB representative 28 SERIAL 1 ERR Fieldbus communication has timed out Check for and correct Fault setup 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Communication settings Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE or Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL as appropriate Poor connections and or noise on line 29 EFB CON FILE Error in reading the configuration file for the embedded fieldbus 30 FORCE TRIP Fault trip forced by the fieldbus See the fieldbus User s Manual 31 EFB 1
320. ons so that the fault point voltage will not rise excessively when a ground fault occurs 600 VAC cable is accepted for up to 500 V AC covering the whole ACS550 range Symmetrical shielded cables must be used for the input and motor cables see the figure below A four conductor system cannot be used Compared to a four conductor system the use of symmetrical shielded cable reduces electromagnetic emission of the whole drive system as well as the stress on motor insulation bearing currents and wear The motor cable and its PE pigtail twisted shield should be kept as short as possible in order to reduce electromagnetic emission see details in section Power cable connection diagram on page 36 Motor cable shield To effectively suppress radiated and conducted radio frequency emissions the shield conductivity must be at least 1 10 of the phase conductor conductivity The requirements are easily met with a copper or aluminium shield The minimum requirement of the motor cable shield of the drive is shown below It consists of a Planning the electrical installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 22 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual concentric layer of copper wires The better and tighter the shield the lower the emission level and bearing current Insulation jacket Copper wire screen Inner insulation R AA V Cable core p Additional US requirements
321. ontents Safety Installation Programming Start up Diagnostics Technical data Guide for Capacitor Reforming in ACS50 ACS55 ACS150 ACS350 ACS550 and ACH550 3AFE68735190 English The Industrial wordmark and Product names in the form Drive are registered or pending trademarks of ABB CANopen is a registered trademark of CAN in Automation e V ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International DeviceNet is a registered trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Ethernet IP is a registered trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association DRIVECOM is a registered trademark of DRIVECOM User Organization Interbus is a registered trademark of Interbus Club LonWorks is a registered trademark of Echelon Corp Metasys is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls Inc Modbus Modbus Plus and Modbus TCP are registered trademarks of Schneider Automation Inc PROFIBUS is a registered trademark of Profibus Trade Org PROFIBUS DP is a registered trademark of Siemens AG Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 Drives 132 355 kW 250 550 hp User s Manual 3AFE64804626 Rev C EN EFFECTIVE 17 09 2007 2007 ABB Oy All Rights Reserved Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 5 Safety Use of warnings and notes gt BP PE There are two
322. ontrol can also be switched to speed control To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 8 TORQUE CTRL Connection example X1 1 10 J1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 42 External speed reference 1 0 10 V 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 2 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC q 5 2 External torque reference 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common D 7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA Note 1 KD 8 2 Output current 0 20 mA 9 AGND Analog output circuit common speed control 110 124 Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC e Reverses torque direction in 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common torque control L 12 DCOM Digital input common for all 113 DI1 Start stop Activation starts the drive 2 114 DI2 Forward reverse Activation reverses direction 7 15 IDI3 Speed torque control Activation selects torque control L7 116 DI4 Constant speed 1 1202 117 015 Ramp pair selection Activate to select 2nd acc dec ramp pair _ __ 18 DI6 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable Note 2 20 RO1A Default operation The sensor needs to be powered 21 RO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 See the manufacturer s instructions 22 RO2C Relay output
323. ontrol location Alternatives are LOCAL 1 EXT1 2 EXT2 0114 RUN TIME drive s accumulated running time in hours h e be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameters mode 0115 JKWH COUNTER drive s accumulated power consumption in kilowatt hours be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameters mode 0116 BLK OUTPUT Application block output signal Value is from either PFC control if PFC Control is active or Parameter 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 131 Code Description 0118 DI 1 3 STATUS Status of the three digital inputs Status is displayed as a binary number 1 indicates that the input is activated O indicates that the input is deactivated 0119 DI 4 6 STATUS Status of the three digital inputs See parameter 0118 Di 1 3 STATUS DI 1 DI2 DI3 0120 Al 1 The relative value of analog input 1 in 96 0121 Al 2 The relative value of analog input 2 in 96 0122 RO 1 3 STATUS Status of the three relay outputs 1indicates that the relay is energized O indicates that the relay is de energized 0123 RO 4 6 STATUS Status of the three relay outputs
324. ops below the limit 3208 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 174 14 AT SET POINT Energize relay when the output frequency is equal to the reference frequency 15 FAULT RST Energize relay when the drive is in a fault condition and will reset after the programmed auto reset delay See parameter 3103 DELAY TIME 16 FLT ALARM Energize relay when fault or alarm occurs 17 EXT CTRL Energize relay when external control is selected 18 REF 2 SEL Energize relay when EXT2 is selected 19 CONST FREQ Energize relay when a constant speed is selected 20 REF LOSS Energize relay when reference or active control place is lost 21 OVERCURRENT Energize relay when an overcurrent alarm or fault occurs 22 OVERVOLTAGE Energize relay when an overvoltage alarm or fault occurs 23 DRIVE TEMP Energize relay when a drive or control board overtemperature alarm or fault occurs 24 UNDERVOLTAGE Energize relay when an undervoltage alarm or fault occurs 25 LOSS Energize relay when 11 signal is lost 26 AI2 LOSS Energize relay when AI2 signal is lost 27 MOTOR TEMP Energize relay when a motor overtemperature alarm or fault occurs 28 STALL Energize relay when a stall alarm or fault exists 30 PID SLEEP Energize relay when the PID sleep function is active 31 Use relay to start stop motor in PFC control See Group 81 PFC CONTROL Use this option only
325. or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohm power system the system will be connected to earth potential through the varistor This may cause danger or damage the drive If a drive with its varistor connected is installed on a corner grounded TN system the drive will be damaged Ensure that the power is removed from the drive Remove the upper front cover by undoing the screws Disconnect the varistor cable from the board o Disconnect the other end of the varistor cable tg r P 5 Fasten the front cover Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 47 Leading the power input and motor cables through the lead through plate 1 Make adequate holes in the grommets to fit them tightly on the cables 2 Lead the cables through the holes all three conductors of a three phase cable through the same hole and slide the grommets onto the cables Preparing the power cables 1 Strip the cables 2 Twist the shield wires 3 Bend the conductors to the terminals 4 Cut the conductors to adequate length Put the pedestal onto the lead through plate and check the length of the conductors Remove the pedestal 5 Crimp or screw cable lugs onto the conductors WARNING The maximum allowed width of the cable lug is 38 mm 1 5 in
326. or must be protected against thermal overload and the current must be switched off when overload is detected The drive includes a motor thermal protection function that protects the motor and switches off the current when necessary Depending on a drive parameter value the function either monitors a calculated temperature value based on a motor thermal model or an actual temperature indication given by motor temperature sensors The user can tune the thermal model further by feeding in additional motor and load data The most common temperature sensors are motor sizes IEC180 225 thermal switch e g Klixon motor sizes IEC200 250 and larger PTC or Pt100 See Group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS on page 170 for more information on the motor thermal protection by the software and Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS on page 180 for the connection and use of the temperature sensors Protection against short circuit in the motor and motor cable The drive protects the motor cable and motor in a short circuit situation when the motor cable is dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive No additional protection devices are needed Planning the electrical installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 20 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Protection against short circuit inside the drive or in the supply cable Arrange the protection according to the following guidelines Circuit diag
327. ore lifting WARNING The drive is heavy frame size R7 115 kg 254 Ib frame size R8 Do not tilt the drive The centre of gravity of the drive is high The drive will overturn from a tilt of about 6 degrees Frame size R8 drives are equipped with support legs to prevent tilting They must be locked to the open position during the installation and always when wheeling the drive Do not wheel the drive except for installation the front direction is preferable because the front wheels are steadier The drive frame may be deformed if wheeled when the pedestal is removed If the drive is moved over long distances place it on its back on a pallet and move it by fork lift Back Front 2 Do not lift by the lower V 3 Do not wheel over ilt part of the frame Do not tilt long distances e Frame size R8 Log the support legs open during the installation and always when wheeling the drive uae nnns 7 Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 31 Before installation Delivery check The drive is delivered in a box that also contains appropriate user s manual optional module manuals delivery documents Check that there are no signs of damage Before attempting installation and operation check the informa
328. ork by applying input power and repeating the check as described above SPEED LIMITS AND ACCELERATION DECELERATION TIMES Set the minimum speed parameter 2001 LOC 2 1 PAR FWD Set the maximum speed parameter 2002 LOC 2 2 PAR F WD Set the acceleration time 1 parameter 2202 LOC 2 2 2 Note Check also acceleration time 2 parameter 2205 if two mA yA acceleration times will be used in the application Set the deceleration time 1 parameter 2203 LOC 2 2 3 Note Set also deceleration time 2 parameter 2206 if two E deceleration times will be used in the application SAVING A USER PARAMETER SET AND FINAL CHECK The start up is now completed However it might be useful at Loc 0 0 2 this stage to set the parameters required by your application and save the settings as a user parameter set as instructed in PAR FWD section User parameter sets on page 777 Check that the drive state is OK Basic Control Panel Check that there are no faults or alarms shown on the display If you want to check the LEDs on the front of the drive switch first to remote control otherwise a fault is generated before removing the panel and verifying that the red LED is not lit and the green LED is lit but not blinking Assistant Control Panel Check that there are no faults or alarms shown on the display and that the panel LED
329. orks with either of two different control panel types Basic Control Panel This panel described in section Basic Control Panel on page 92 provides basic tools for manual entry of parameter values Assistant Control Panel This panel described below includes pre programmed assistants to automate the most common parameter setups The panel provides language support It is available with different language sets Compatibility The manual is compatible with the following panel versions Basic Control Panel ACS CP C Rev K Assistant Control Panel Area 1 ACS CP A Rev Y Assistant Control Panel Area 2 ACS CP L Rev E Assistant Control Panel Asia ACS CP D Rev M See page 75 for how to find out the version of your Assistant Control Panel See parameter 9901 LANGUAGE to see the languages supported by the different Assistant Control Panels Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 72 Assistant Control Panel Features ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual The Assistant Control Panel features alphanumeric control panel with an LCD display language selection for the display Start up Assistant to ease drive commissioning copy function parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system context sensitive help real time clock Overview The following tabl
330. ot limit parameter changes made by macros This lock does not limit parameter changes written by fieldbus inputs This parameter value can be changed only if the correct pass code is entered See parameter 1603 PASS CODE 0 LOCKED You cannot use the control panel to change parameter values The lock can be opened by entering the valid pass code to parameter 1603 1 OPEN You can use the control panel to change parameter values 2 NOT SAVED You can use the control panel to change parameter values but they are not stored in permanent memory Set parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to 1 SAVE to store changed parameter values to memory 1603 PASS CODE Entering the correct pass code allows you to change the parameter lock See parameter 1602 above The code 358 allows you to change the value of the parameter 1602 once This entry reverts back to 0 automatically 1604 FAULT RESET SEL Selects the source for the fault reset signal The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists 0 KEYPAD Defines the control panel as the only fault reset source Fault reset is always possible with control panel 1 011 Defines digital input 011 as a fault reset source Activating the digital input resets the drive 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as a fault reset source See DI1 above 7 START STOP Defines the Stop command as a fault reset source
331. otor This step keeps an equal number of motors running before and after autochange Continues with normal PFC operation Starting order counter Output The operation of the starting order counter frequency No aux 1 2aux The relay output parameter definitions 1401 1403 and motors motor motors 1410 1412 establish the initial motor sequence The lowest parameter number with a value 31 PFC identifies the relay connected to 1PFC the first motor and so on e Initially 1PFC speed regulated motor 2PFC 1st auxiliary motor etc The first autochange shifts the sequence to 2PFC speed regulated motor 3PFC 1st auxiliary motor 1PFC last auxiliary motor Area The next autochange shifts the sequence again and so on Autochange If the autochange cannot start a needed motor because all is allowed PID output T P 8119 10096 inactive motors are interlocked the drive displays an alarm 2015 PFC LOCK When ACS550 power supply is switched off the counter preserves the current Autochange rotation positions in permanent memory When power is restored the Autochange rotation starts at the position stored in memory Ifthe PFC relay configuration is changed or if the PFC enable value is changed the rotation is reset See the first bullet above Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com
332. otor cable This is not a personal safety or a fire protection feature The ground fault protective function can be disabled with parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT The EMC filter of the drive includes capacitors connected between the main circuit and the frame These capacitors and long motor cables increase the ground leakage current and may cause fault current circuit breakers to function Planning the electrical installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 21 Emergency stop devices For safety reasons install the emergency stop devices at each operator control station and at other operating stations where emergency stop may be needed Note Pressing the stop key C gt on the control panel of the drive does not generate an emergency stop of the motor or separate the drive from dangerous potential Selecting the power cables General rules Dimension the mains input power and motor cables according to local regulations The cable must be able to carry the drive load current See section Ratings on page 293 for the rated currents The cable must be rated for at least 70 maximum permissible temperature of conductor in continuous use For US see Additional US requirements on page 22 The inductance and impedance of the PE conductor cable grounding wire must be rated according to permissible touch voltage appearing under fault conditi
333. ou define these ramps as a pair one for acceleration and one for deceleration You can define two pairs of ramps and use a digital input to select one or the other pair Code Description 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL Defines control for selection of acceleration deceleration ramps Ramps are defined in pairs one each for acceleration and deceleration See below for the ramp definition parameters 0 NOT SEL Disables selection the first ramp pair is used 17 011 Defines digital input 011 as the control for ramp pair selection Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2 De activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection See DI1 above 7 COMM Defines bit 10 of the Command Word 1 as the control for ramp pair selection The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is parameter 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for ramp pair selection De activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2 Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection See DI1 INV above 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 max T Sets the acceleration time for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 1 See A in FREQ sd the figure Actual acceleration time also d
334. ow 16 AI1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 17 AI1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 20 KEYPAD RNC Defines the control panel as the reference source A Stop command resets the reference to zero the R stands for reset e Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT does not copy the reference 21 KEYPAD NC Defines the control panel as the reference source A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero The reference is stored Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 does not copy the reference Analog input reference correction Parameter values 9 10 and 14 17 use the formula in the following table Value setting Calculation of the Al reference C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value 50 of reference value B value C B C value 50 of reference value B value Where e Main reference value for values 9 10 and AI1 for values 14 17 e B Correcting reference AM for values 9 10 and AI2 for values 14 17 Example The figure shows the reference source curves for value settings 9 10 and 14 17 where e C 25 P 401
335. par 1105 par 1105 ACT2 TORQUE 10000 10000 100 100 Virtual addresses of the drive control The virtual address area of the drive control is allocated as follows Control Word Reference 1 REF1 Reference 2 REF2 Status Word Actual Value 1 ACT1 wl N gt Actual Value 2 ACT2 Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 270 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Generic profile technical data Overview The generic profile aims to fulfill the industry standard drive profile for each protocol e g PROF Idrive for PROFIBUS AC DC Drive for DeviceNet Control Word As described earlier in section Control interface on page 252 the CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system For specific CONTROL WORD content see the user s manual provided with the FBA module Status Word As described earlier in section Control interface on page 252 the contents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station For specific STATUS WORD content see the user s manual provided with the FBA module Reference As described earlier in section Control interface on page 252 the REFERENCE word is a speed or frequency reference Note REF2 is not supported by the Generic Drive profiles Reference scaling REFERENCE scaling is fi
336. pecifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40012 5318 EFB PAR 18 For Modbus Sets additional delay in milliseconds before the ACS550 begins transmitting response to the master request 5319 EFB PAR 19 ABB Drives profile ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Control Word Read only copy of the Fieldbus Control Word 5320 EFB PAR 20 ABB Drives profile ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Status Word Read only copy of the Fieldbus Status Word Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 206 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Group 81 PFC CONTROL This group defines a Pump Fan Control PFC mode of operation The major features of PFC control are ACS550 controls the motor of pump no 1 varying the motor speed to control the pump capacity This motor is the speed regulated motor Direct line connections power the motor of pump no 2 and pump no 3 etc The ACS550 switches pump no 2 and then pump no 3 etc on and off as needed These motors are auxiliary motors The ACS550 PID control uses two signals a process reference and an actual value feedback The PID controller adjusts the speed frequency of the first pump such that the actual value follows the process reference When demand defined by the process reference exceeds the first motor s capacity user defined as a frequency limit the PFC control automatically starts an auxil
337. pecifying the year press Ew To cancel your changes press To enable or disable the automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes select DAYLIGHT SAVING on the menu and press SS Display LOC USET DATE 03 05 CANCEL 00 00 OK LOC DAYLIGHT SAV 1 Pressing p opens the help that shows the beginning and end dates of the Australial NSW Vict inq fime i Australia2 Tasmania period during which daylight saving time is used in each country or area EXIT 00 00 SEL whose daylight saving changes you can select to be followed Lot SEIT To disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving EU changes select Off and press on Mar t 2 t 2 here To enable automatic clock transitions select the country or area whose US daylight saving changes are followed and press SS EXIT 00 00 return to the previous display without making changes press Ez Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 88 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Parameter Backup mode The Parameter Backup mode is used to export parameters from one drive to another or to make a backup of the drive parameters Uploading to the panel stores all drive parameters including up to two user sets to the Assistant Control Panel The full set partial parameter set application and user sets can then be dow
338. peration Digital input de activated Constant Speed 1 activated 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input See above 7 DI1 2 INv Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using 011 and Di2 Inverse operation uses two digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 DI activated 012 Function 1 1 Noconstant speed 0 1 Constant speed 1 1202 1 0 Constant speed 2 1203 0 0 Constant speed 3 1204 8 DI2 3 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI2 and DI3 See above DI1 2 INV for code 9 DI3 4 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI3 and e See above DI1 2 INV for code 10 014 5 1 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI4 and 015 See above DI1 2 INV for code 11 DI5 6 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using 015 and DI6 e See above DI1 2 INV for code 12 DI1 2 3 INV Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using 011 012 and 013 Inverse operation uses three digital inputs as defined below 0 Di de activated 1 activated g DI2 DIS Function No constant speed Constant speed 1 1202 Constant speed 2 1203 Constant speed 3 1204 Constant speed 4 1205 Constant speed 5 1206 Constant speed 6 1207 0 0 Constant speed 7 1208 O O O
339. percent to engineering units multiply by the value of the parameter that defines 10096 and divide by 10096 For example Value of the Feedback integer Parameter resolution er parameter that Value of 100 ref 100 9 defines 100 Scaled Value 10 0 1 1500 10 0 1 1500 RPM 100 15 rpm 100 0 1 500 Hz 100 0 1 500 Hz 100 50 Hz Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9908 MOT NOM SPEED as the 100 reference and that 9908 1500 rpm 2 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9907 MOT NOM FREQ as the 100 reference and that 9907 500 Hz Actual Value mapping See the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 272 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Diagnostics 273 WARNING Do not attempt any measurement parts replacement or other service procedure not described in this manual Such action will void the warranty may endanger correct operation and increase downtime and expense WARNING All electrical installation and maintenance work described in this chapter should only be undertaken by qualified service personnel The safety instructio
340. ponsive to error value changes The longer the derivation time the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change If the derivation time is set to zero the controller works as a PI controller otherwise as a PID controller The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant Controller output Ae Kp Tp Ts Kp e Error value Gain K 1 ae Integration time gt 0 Tp Derivation time gt 0 t Sample time period 2 ms gt Ae Error value change between two samples Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 164 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description 2304 ACC COMPENSATION Sets the derivation time for acceleration compensation e Adding a derivative of the reference to the output of the speed controller compensates for inertia during acceleration 2303 DERIVATION TIME describes the principle of derivative action Rule of thumb Set this parameter between 50 and 100 of the sum of the mechanical time constants for the motor and the driven machine The figure shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is accelerated along a ramp No acceleration compensation Acceleration compensation A A Speed reference Actual speed t t Note You
341. pressure reference that controls the pressure in the pipe The speed regulated pump operates alone at low water consumption levels As water consumption increases first one constant speed pump operates then the second As flow increases the pressure at the output end of the pipe drops relative to the pressure measured at the input end As auxiliary motors step in to increase the flow the adjustments below correct the reference to more closely match the output pressure When the first auxiliary pump operates increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 When two auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 parameter 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 When three auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 parameter 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 parameter 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 207 Code Description 8104 STEP 2 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference Applies only when at least two auxiliary constant speed motors are running See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 8105 STEP Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference Applies only when at least three auxiliary constant speed motors are running See parameter 8103 REFERE
342. put mode press repeatedly until you get there REM 5 49 1 Hz 0 5 10 7 9 DIR 100 00 MENU 2 If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the status line switch to local LOC v control by pressing p The display briefly shows a message about changing 4 0 i 1 H Z the mode and then returns to the Output mode 0 5 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU 3 To change the direction from forward tu shown on the status line to reverse LOC JU shown on the status line or vice versa press wea 4 0 1 H Z 0 5 A 10 7 ote Parameter 7003 DIRECTION must be set to 3 REQUEST DTR 1 00 00 MENU Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 78 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual How to set the speed frequency or torque reference Step Action Display 1 If you are not in the Output mode press e repeatedly until you get there REM v EA 10 7 9 DIR 100 00 MENU 2 If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the status line switch to local LOC v control by pressing 2 The display briefly shows a message about changing 4 0 1 H Z the mode and then returns to the Output mode 0 0 Note With Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT you can allow the reference 1 0 1 modification in remote control DIR 00 00 MENU 3 e To increase the highlighted reference value shown in the top right corner ofthe LOC 5 50 0 2 di
343. r See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The third auxiliary motor starts if Two auxiliary motors are running ACS550 output frequency exceeds the limit 8111 1 Hz Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit 8111 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 208 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description 8112 LOW FREQ 1 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the first auxiliary motor The first auxiliary motor stops if e Only one the first auxiliary motor is running f Hz e ACS550 output frequency drops below the limit A 8112 1 Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8112 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 8109 NS After the first auxiliary motor stops Output frequency increases by the value P 8112 i 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 NL In effect the output of the speed regulated motor increases to P dia MIN 4 B compensate for the loss of the auxiliary motor See the figure where p gt e 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 Low FREQ 1 P 8116 gt B Output frequency decrease during the stop delay e C Diagram showing auxiliary motor s run status as frequency decreases 1 Grey path Shows hyste
344. r speed Check for both of the following 1 lt 60 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED lt 16 0 8 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 120 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ Motor Poles lt 0 992 1010 1011 RESERVED Not used 1012 PAR PFC IO 1 IO configuration is not complete not enough relays are parameterized to PFC Or a conflict exists between Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS parameter 8117 NR OF AUX MOT and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 1013 PAR PFC IO 2 IO configuration is not complete the actual number of PFC motors parameter 8127 MOTORS does not match the PFC motors in Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 1014 PAR PFC IO 3 IO configuration is not complete the drive is unable to allocate a digital input interlock for each PFC motor parameters 8120 INTERLOCKS and 8127 MOTORS 1015 RESERVED Not used 1016 PAR USER LOAD C Parameter values for the user load curve are inconsistent Check that the following conditions are met 3704 LOAD FREQ 1 lt 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 lt 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 lt 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 3705 LOAD TORQ LOW 1 lt 3706 LOAD HIGH 1 3708 LOAD TORQ LOW 2 lt 3709 LOAD HIGH 2 3711 LOAD LOW 3 lt 3712 LOAD HIGH 3 3714 LOAD TORQ LOW 4 lt 3715 LOAD HIGH 4 3717 LOAD LOW 5 3718 LOAD HIGH 5 Fault resetting
345. r supply and motor cables with high capacitance may result in erroneous error reports during non running tests To disable response to fault monitoring when the drive is not running use parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT To disable response to all ground fault monitoring use parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT 17 OBSOLETE Not used 18 THERM FAIL Internal fault The thermistor measuring the internal temperature of the drive is open or shorted Contact your local ABB representative 19 OPEX LINK Internal fault A communication related problem has been detected on the fiber optic link between the control and OINT boards Contact your local ABB representative 20 OPEX PWR Internal fault Low voltage condition detected on OINT power supply Contact your local ABB representative 21 CURR MEAS Internal fault Current measurement is out of range Contact your local ABB representative 22 SUPPLY PHASE Ripple voltage in the DC link is too high Check for and correct Missing mains phase Blown fuse 23 ENCODER ERR The drive is not detecting a valid encoder signal Check for and correct Encoder presence and proper connection reverse wired loose connection or short circuit Voltage logic levels are outside of the specified range A working and properly connected Pulse Encoder Interface Module OTAC 01 Wrong value entered in parameter 5001 PULSE NR A wrong value will
346. ram Short circuit protection Protect the drive and Distribution input cable with fuses board Input cable Drive or a circuit breaker See footnotes 1 and UM P EL de 1 Size the fuses according to instructions given in section Fuses and circuit breakers on page 295 The fuses will protect the input cable in short circuit situations restrict drive damage and prevent damage to adjoining equipment in case of a short circuit inside the drive 2 Circuit breakers which have been tested by ABB with the ACS550 can be used Fuses must be used with other circuit breakers See section Fuses and circuit breakers on page 295 The protective characteristics of circuit breakers depend on the type construction and settings of the breakers There are also limitations pertaining to the short circuit capacity of the supply network WARNING Due to the inherent operating principle and construction of circuit AN breakers independent of the manufacturer hot ionized gases may escape from the breaker enclosure in case of a short circuit To ensure safe use special attention must be paid to the installation and placement of the breakers Follow the manufacturer s instructions Note Circuit breakers must not be used without fuses in the USA Ground fault protection The drive is equipped with an internal ground fault protective function to protect the drive against ground faults in the motor and the m
347. rameter 1103 REF1 SELECT i9 PID1 REF2 LIMIT Russ E SELECT J max 1107 1108 gt PFC 20 21 9 _1 MIN 1107 1108 1107 REF2 MIN Sets the minimum for external reference 2 The minimum analog input signal in volts or amperes corresponds to REF2 MIN in 96 Parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1 or 1304 MINIMUM AI2 sets the minimum analog input signal This parameter sets the minimum frequency reference The value is a percentage of the maximum frequency or speed maximum process reference nominal torque 1108 2 Sets the maximum for external reference 2 The maximum analog input signal in volts or amperes corresponds to REF2 MAX in 96 e Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM 11 or 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 sets the maximum analog input signal This parameter sets the maximum frequency reference The value is a percentage of the maximum frequency or speed maximum process reference nominal torque Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 142 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS This group defines a set of constant speeds In general You can program up to 7 constant speeds ranging from 0 500 Hz or 0 30000 rpm Values must be positive No negative speed va
348. rameters 4101 4126 PID 1 PARAM SET defines which set is selected 0 5 1 PID Set 1 parameters 4001 4026 is active 1 011 Defines digital input 011 as the control for PID Set selection Activating the digital input selects PID Set 2 De activating the digital input selects PID Set 1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for PID Set selection See DI1 above 7 SET 2 PID Set 2 parameters 4101 4126 is active 8 11 TIMED FUNC 1 4 Defines the Timed function as the control for the PID Set selection Timed function de activated PID Set 1 Timed function activated PID Set 2 See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 12 2 ZONE MIN The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and feedback 2 The drive will control the zone and select the set that has a larger difference A positive difference a setpoint higher than the feedback is always larger than a negative difference This keeps feedback values at or above the setpoint Controller does not react to the situation of feedback above setpoint if another zone s feedback is closer to its setpoint 13 2 ZONE MAX The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and feedback 2 The drive will control the zone and select the set that has a smaller difference A negative difference a setpoint lower than the feedback is always sma
349. rection Start Stop is through digital input DI6 DI6 activated Start DI6 de activated Stop Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DI5 015 activated Reverse de activated Forward 8 KEYPAD Control Panel Start Stop and Direction commands are through the control panel when EXT1 is active Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 9 DI1F 2R Start Stop Direction commands through 011 and DI2 combinations Start forward DI1 activated and DI2 de activated Start reverse DI1 de activated and DI2 activated Stop both 011 and 012 activated or both de activated Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 10 comm Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start stop and direction commands Bits 0 1 2 of Command Word 1 parameter 0301 activates the start stop and direction commands See Fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 138 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description 11 TIMED FUNC 1 Assigns Start Stop control to Timed Function 1 Timed Function activated START Timed Function de activated STOP See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 12 14 TIMED FUNC 2 4 Assigns Start Stop control to Timed Function 2 4 See TIMED FUNC 1 above 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS Defines external contro
350. reduced if the ACS550 fsw internal temperature rises above a limit See the figure Limit R7 R8 drives This function allows the highest possible switching frequency to be used based on operating conditions Higher switching frequency results in lower acoustic noise 4 kHz ACS550 0 OFF The function is disabled 1 The switching frequency is limited according to 1kHz i gt the figure 90 C 100 C 2608 SLIP COMP RATIO Sets gain for slip compensation in squirrel cage motor slips under load Increasing the frequency as the motor torque increases compensates for the slip Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ No slip compensation 1 200 Increasing slip compensation 100 means full slip compensation 2609 NOISE SMOOTHING This parameter introduces a random component to the switching frequency Noise smoothing distributes the acoustic motor noise over a range of frequencies instead of a single tonal frequency resulting in lower peak noise intensity The random component has an average of 0 Hz It is added to the switching frequency set by parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 2619 DC STABILIZER Enables or disables the DC voltage stabilizer The DC stabilizer is used in scalar control mode to prevent possible voltage oscillations in the drive DC bus caused by motor load or weak supply network In case of voltage variation the drive tun
351. resis if time is reversed the path 1 t backwards is not the same For details on the path for starting 0 see the diagram at 8109 START FREQ 1 Note 8112 Low FREQ 1 value must be between 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 1 e 8109 START FREQ 1 8113 LOW FREQ 2 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the second auxiliary motor e See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The second auxiliary motor stops if Two auxiliary motors are running e ACS550 output frequency drops below the limit 8113 1 Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8113 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 8114 LOW FREQ 3 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the third auxiliary motor See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The third auxiliary motor stops if Three auxiliary motors are running e ACS550 output frequency drops below the limit 8114 1 Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8114 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 8115 AUX MOT START D Sets the Start Delay for the auxiliary motors The output frequency must remain above the start frequency limit parameter 8109 8110 or 8111 for this time period before the auxiliary motor starts e See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation 8116 AUX MOT STOP D Sets the Stop Delay for the auxiliary motors The output frequency must remain below th
352. rol word bits not supported by the ABB DRV LIM implementation Modbus addressing With Modbus each function code implies access to a specific Modbus reference set Thus the leading digit is not included in the address field of a Modbus message Note The ACS550 supports the zero based addressing of the Modbus specification Holding register 40002 is addressed as 0001 in a Modbus message Similarly coil 33 is addressed as 0032 in a Modbus message Refer again to the Mapping summary above The following sections describe in detail the mapping to each Modbus reference set 0 Mapping Modbus coils The drive maps the following information to the Oxxxx Modbus set called Modbus Coils bit wise map of the CONTROL WORD selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE The first 32 coils are reserved for this purpose Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 233 relay output states numbered sequentially beginning with coil 00033 The following table summarizes the reference set Modbus Internal location ABB DRV LIM DCU PROFILE ABB DRV FULL ref all profiles 5305 0 5305 1 5305 2 00001 CONTROL BitO OFF1 STOP orFr1 00002 CONTROL Bit 1 OFF2 START 2
353. roup 01 OPERATING DATA 6 334 parameter listing in section Complete parameter list on page 115 7 3 122 for resolution which indicates the decimal point location and the units of measure 8 Bar meter displayed 9 Decimal point location and units as for the source signal Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 178 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description 3405 JOUTPUT1 UNIT Selects the units used with the first display parameter Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT 0 NOUNIT 9 C 18 MWh 27 36 I s 45 Pa 54 Ib m 63 Mrev 1 A 10 Ib ft 19 2 m s 28 MGD 37 46 GPS 55 Ib h 64 d 2 V 11 mA 20 m3 h 29 inHg 38 I h 47 gal s 56 FPS 65 inWC 3 Hz 12 21 dm s 30 39 m3 s 48 57 ft s 66 4 96 13 kW 22 31 kb s 40 m m 49 58 inH20 67 Nm 5 s 14 W 23 kPa 32 kHz 41 kg s 50 ft s 59 in wg 6 h 15 kWh 24 GPM 33 ohm 42 kg m 51 60 ft wg 7 rpm 16 25 PSI 34 ppm 43 kg h 52 ft h 61 Ibsi 8 kh 17 hp 26 35 pps 44 53 lb s 62 ms The following units are useful for the bar display 117 ref 119 dev 121 SP 123 lout 125 Fout 127 Vdc 118 120 LD 122 124 Vout 126 Tout 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN Sets the minimum value displayed for the firs
354. rs Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 159 Code Description 2105 DC HOLD SPEED Sets the speed for DC Hold Requires that parameter 2104 HOLD CTL 1 DC HOLD 2106 DC CURR REF Defines the DC current control reference as a percentage of parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 2107 DC BRAKE TIME Defines the DC brake time after modulation has stopped if parameter 2104 is 2 DC BRAKING 2108 START INHIBIT Sets the Start inhibit function on or off The Start inhibit function ignores a pending start command in any of the following situations a new start command is required A fault is reset Run Enable parameter 1601 activates while start command is active Mode changes from local to remote Control switches from EXT1 to EXT2 e Control switches from EXT2 to EXT1 0 Disables the Start inhibit function 1 ON Enables the Start inhibit function 2109 EMERG STOP SEL Defines control of the Emergency stop command When activated Emergency stop decelerates the motor using the emergency stop ramp parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME e Requires an external stop command and removal of the emergency stop command before drive can restart NOT SEL Disables the Emergency stop function through digital inputs 1 011 Defines digital input 011 as the control for Emergency stop command Activ
355. rt up on page 61 The Start up Assistant which is included in the Assistant Control Panel only guides you through all essential settings to be done In the limited start up the drive gives no guidance you go through the very basic settings by following the instructions given in the manual f you have a Basic Control Panel follow the instructions given in section How to perform the limited start up on page 61 How to perform the limited start up For the limited start up you can use the Basic Control Panel or the Assistant Control Panel The instructions below are valid for both control panels but the displays shown are the Basic Control Panel displays unless the instruction applies to the Assistant Control Panel only Before you start ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand A A Check the installation See the checklist in chapter Installation page 59 SAFETY The start up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician The safety instructions given in chapter Safety must be followed during the start up procedure The drive will start up automatically at power up if the external run command is on Start up control with I O and ID Run Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 62 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger De couple the driven machine if there is
356. rwtr com Email info clrwtr com 108 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual This macro provides parameter settings for pump and fan control PFC applications To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 7 PFC CONTROL Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting OFF Connection example X1 1 10 41 SCR Signal cable shield screen 1 2 AI1 External ref 1 Manual or Ext ref 2 PID PFC 0 10 V i 3 AGND Analog input circuit common Note 1 1 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC Manual 0 10V gt 0 50 Hz D 5 2 Actual signal PID 4 20 mA PID PFC 0 10V gt 0 100 14 6 AGND Analog input circuit common PID setpoint lt 7 1 Output frequency 0 20 mA D 1 8 2 Actual 1 controller actual value 0 4 20 mA 9 AGND Analog output circuit common 410124V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common L 12 DCOM Digital input common for all t 13 DI1 Start Stop Manual Activation starts the drive t 14 012 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 15 DI3 EXT1 EXT2 selection Activation selects PFC control 16 014 Interlock Deactivation always stops the drive I 4417 015 Interlock Deactiv
357. s Code Description 5310 EFB PAR 10 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40005 5311 EFB PAR 11 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40006 5312 EFB PAR 12 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40007 5313 EFB PAR 13 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40008 5314 EFB PAR 14 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40009 5315 EFB PAR 15 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40010 5316 EFB PAR 16 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40011 5317 EFB PAR 17 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40012 5318 EFB PAR 18 Sets additional delay in milliseconds before the ACS550 begins transmitting response to the master request 5319 EFB PAR 19 Holds a copy in hex of the CONTROL WORD Modbus register 40001 5320 EFB PAR 20 Holds a copy in hex of the STATUS WORD Modbus register 40004 Except where restricted by the drive all parameters are available for both reading and writing The parameter writes are verified for the correct value and for a valid register addresses Note Parameter writes through standard Modbus are always volatile i e modified values are not automatically stored to permanent memory Use parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to save all altered values The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function
358. s see Modbus addressing below ACS550 Modbus reference Supported function codes Control Bits Coils Oxxxx 01 Read Coil Status Relay Outputs 05 Force Single Coil 15 Force Multiple Coils Status Bits Discrete Inputs 1xxxx 02 Read Input Status Discrete Inputs Analog Inputs Input Registers 3xxxxx 04 Read Input Registers Parameters Holding Registers 4xxxx 03 Read Registers Control Status Words 06 Preset Single 4X Register References 16 Preset Multiple 4X Registers 23 Read Write Registers Communication profiles When communicating by Modbus the ACS550 supports multiple profiles for control and status information Parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE selects the profile used ABB DRV LIM The primary and default profile is the ABB DRV LIM profile This implementation of the ABB Drives profile standardizes the control interface with ACS400 drives The ABB Drives profile is based on the PROFIBUS interface It is discussed in detail in the following sections DCU PROFILE The DCU PROFILE profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits It is the internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus environment ABB DRV FULL ABB DRV FULL is the implementation of the ABB Drives profile that standardizes the control interface with ACS600 and ACS800 drives This implementation supports two cont
359. s a digital input starting with DI2 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFC Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 Free Not allowed DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI3 DI6 Free 1 DI1 Free 011 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 First PFC Relay DI3 DI6 Free DI4 DI6 Free 2 DI1 Free 011 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 First PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI4 DI6 Free DI5 DI6 Free 3 DI1 Free 011 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 First PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay 014 Third PFC Relay 015 Third PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 4 DI1 Free 011 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 First PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay 015 Third PFC Relay 015 Fourth PFC Relay DI6 Fourth PFC Relay 016 Free 5 Not allowed 011 Free DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay 014 Third PFC Relay 015 Fourth PFC Relay DI6 Fifth PFC Relay 6 Not allowed Not allowed Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www c
360. s are within limits 10 REV_REF 1 Drive reference is in reverse direction 0 Drive reference is in forward direction 11 REV 1 Drive is running in reverse direction 0 Drive is running in forward direction 12 PANEL LOCAL 1 Control is in control panel or PC tool local mode 0 Control is not in control panel local mode 13 FIELDBUS LOCAL 1 Control is in fieldbus local mode steals control panel local 0 Control is not in fieldbus local mode 14 EXT2 ACT 1 Control is in EXT2 mode 0 Control is in EXT1 mode 15 FAULT 1 Drive is in a fault state 0 Drive is not in a fault state Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 245 DCU profile STATUS WORD See parameter 0304 Bit Name Value Status 16 ALARM 1 An alarm is on 0 No alarms are on 17 REQ_MAINT 1 A maintenance request is pending 0 No maintenance request is pending 18 DIRLOCK 1 Direction lock is ON Direction change is locked out 0 Direction lock is OFF 19 LOCALLOCK 1 Local mode lock is ON Local mode is locked out 0 Local mode lock is OFF 20 CTL_MODE 1 Drive is in vector control mode 0 Drive is in scalar control mode 21 25 Reserved 26 REQ_CTL 1 Copy the control word 0 no op 27 REQ REF1 1 Reference 1 requested in this channel 0 Reference 1 is not requested in this
361. s generate errors 5206 FRAME ERRORS Contains a count of the characters with a framing error that the bus receives For high counts check Communication speed settings of devices connected on the bus they must not differ Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors 5207 BUFFER OVERRUNS Contains a count of the characters received that cannot be placed in the buffer Longest possible message length for the drive is 128 bytes e Received messages exceeding 128 bytes overflow the buffer The excess characters are counted 5208 CRC ERRORS Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error that the drive receives For high counts check Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors e CRC calculations for possible errors Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 204 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL This group defines set up variables used for an embedded fieldbus EFB communication protocol The standard EFB protocol in the ACS550 is Modbus See chapter Embedded fieldbus page 219 Code Description 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID Contains the identification and program revision of the protocol Format XXYY where xx protocol ID and YY program revision 5302 EFB STATION ID Defines the node address of the RS485 link The node address on each unit must
362. s in remote control Press key 2 to switch In remote control the panel between remote and local control display shows text REM STARTING AND CONTROLLING THE SPEED OF THE MOTOR Start by switching digital input DI1 on Assistant Control Panel The arrow starts rotating It is dotted until the PM i setpoint is reached OUTPUT F WD Basic Control Panel Text FWD starts flashing fast and stops after the setpoint is reached Regulate the drive output frequency motor speed by adjusting the 5 voltage of analog input 11 a OUTPUT F WD CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF ROTATION OF THE MOTOR 500 Reverse direction Switch digital input DI2 on OUTPUT REV Forward direction Switch digital input DI2 off ef 5 Z OUTPUT FWD STOPPING THE MOTOR Switch digital input DI1 off The motor stops 0 0 Assistant Control Panel The arrow stops rotating i Basic Control Panel Text FWD starts flashing slowly OUTPUT FWD Start up control with I O and ID Run Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 69 How to perform the ID Run The drive estimates motor characteristics automatically using identification magnetization when the drive is started for the first time and after any motor parameter Group 99 START UP DATA is changed This is valid when parameter 9910 I
363. s stops the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A Default operation 2118048 Ready gt 19 connected to 21 Beant ones 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable 23 RO2A A Default nis ud i DI4 Output 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 gt i Reference 102 52 25 Relay output 3 programmable CONST SPEED 26 R Default A O 1 CONST SPEED 2 1203 27 RO3B Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 1 1 coNsT SPEED 3 1204 Fault 2 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Analog reference 11 Analog output AO1 Speed J1 e Start stop and direction DI1 2 Analog output AO2 Current Sp Alt 0 10 V Constant speed selection DI3 4 gt Relay output 1 Ready 9 gt JAl2 0 4 20 mA Ramp pair 1 2 selection DI5 Relay output 2 Running or Run enable DI6 Relay output 3 Fault 1 v1 o 1 0 10 V v 127 AI2 0 4 20 mA Application macros Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 105 Motor Potentiometer macro This macro provides a cost effective interface for PLCs that vary the speed of the motor using only digital signals To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 4 MOTOR POT Connection example 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 Al Not used 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC
364. sed in the first environment Note A professional is a person or organization having necessary skills in installing and or commissioning power drive systems including their EMC aspects Category C2 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class first environment restricted distribution EMC standard IEC EN 61800 3 does not any more restrict the distribution of the drive but the using installation and commissioning are defined Drive of category drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V intended for use in the second environment and not intended for use in the first environment Category C3 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class second environment unrestricted distribution Compliance with the IEC EN 61800 3 2004 The immunity performance of the drive complies with the demands of IEC EN 61800 3 category C2 see page 306 for IEC EN 61800 3 definitions The emission limits of IEC EN 61800 3 are complied with the provisions described below First environment drives of category C2 1 Frame size R7 drives The internal EMC filter is connected and the EMC screen is installed Frame size R8 drives do not comply with the demands of category C2 2 The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual 3 The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual 4 The maximum motor cable length is 100 m 330 ft WARNING In a domestic environment this product may cause radi
365. see section Fan Blow dry clean compressed air from bottom to top and simultaneously use a vacuum cleaner at the air outlet to trap the dust Note Prevent dust from entering adjoining equipment Replace the cooling fan Fan The life span of the cooling fan of the drive is about 50 000 R7 and 60 000 R8 hours The actual life span depends on the running time of the fan ambient temperature and dust concentration When the Assistant Control Panel is in use the Notice Handler Assistant informs when the definable value of the operating hour counter is reached see parameter 2901 This information can also be passed to the relay output see parameter 1401 regardless of the used panel type Replacement fans are available from ABB Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts Maintenance Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 287 Replacing the fan R7 1 OX TENE opes UND Remove power from the drive Remove the upper front cover and disconnect the control panel cables Disconnect the discharging resistor wire Remove the DC capacitor pack by undoing the black fixing screws Disconnect the fan supply wires detachable terminal Disconnect the fan capacitor wires Undo the black fixing screws of the fan cassette Press the snap on holders to release the side cover Lift from the handle and pull the fan cassette out 10 11 Ins
366. sensor used PT100 C PTC ohm or thermistor See parameters 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL and 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL NONE 1 1 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses one PT100 sensor Analog output 1 or 2 feeds constant current through the sensor sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises as does the voltage over the sensor temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input AI1 or Al2 and converts it to degrees Celsius 2 2 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses two PT100 sensors Operation is the same as for above 1 x 100 3 3 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses three PT100 sensors Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100 4 PTC Sensor configuration uses one The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor The resistance of the sensor increases sharply as the motor temperature rises over the PTC reference temperature as does the voltage over the resistor The temperature measurement function Excessive reads the voltage through analog input A11 and converts it into ohms The table below and the graph show typical PTC sensor resistance as a function of the motor operating temperature Temperature Resistance Normal 1 5 kohm Normal Excessive gt 4 kohm 5 THERM 0 Sensor configuration uses a thermistor Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input Connect ei
367. signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 for ACT2 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM Sets the minimum value for ACT1 Scales the source signal used as the actual value ACT1 defined P 4019 2 by parameter 4016 AcT1 INPUT For parameter 4016 values 6 COMM ACT 1 and 7 COMM ACT 2 scaling is not done ACT1 A Par 4016 Source Source min Source max P 4018 1 Analog input 1 1301 MINIMUM AI1 1302 MAXIMUM 11 2 Analog input 2 1304 MINIMUM 12 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 Source min Source max 3 Current 0 2 nominal current Source signal 4 Torque 2 nominal torque 2 nominal torque 5 Power 2 nominal power 2 nominal power ACT 96 4 B See the figure A Normal B Inversion ACT1 MINIMUM gt 1 P 4018 MAXIMUM 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM Sets the maximum value for ACT1 See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 4020 2 MINIMUM Sets the minimum value for ACT2 See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM Sets the maximum value for ACT2 See 4018 ACT MINIMUM P 40194 T T Source min Source Source signal 4022 SLEEP SELECTION Defines the control for the PID sleep function 0 NOT SEL Disables the PID sleep control function 1 011 Defines digital input 011 as the control for the PID sleep function Activating the digital input activates the sleep function De activating the digital input restores PID control 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digi
368. splay press The value changes immediately It is stored in the drive 5 0 0 H Z permanent memory and restored automatically after power switch off 0 5 0 decrease the value press amp w 7 1 0 DIR 00 00 MENU How to adjust the display contrast Step Action Display 1 If you are not in the Output mode press repeatedly until you get there LOC v 49 1 4 4 17 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU 2 To increase the contrast press keys simultaneously LOC v To decrease the contrast press keys X and amp w 2 simultaneously 4 4 1 pz 10 7 DI R 00 00 MENU Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Parameters mode In the Parameters mode you can view and change parameter values start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to select a parameter and change its value Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the Output mode otherwise LOC W MAIN MENU 1 EXIT PARAM by pressing CZ repeatedly until you get to the Main menu EXIT 100 00 ENTER 2 Go to the Parameters mode by selecting PARAMETERS on the menu with keys age GRO m 1 ENTER C A and CY
369. t common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 AI2 Not used 6 AGND Analog input circuit common Dp 7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA Le 1 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA 149 AGND Analog output circuit common 10124V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 11 IGND Auxiliary voltage output common 12 DCOM Digital input common for all 413 DI1 Start Momentary activation with DI2 activated starts the drive 14 DI2 Stop Momentary deactivation stops the drive 15 DI3 Fwd Rev Activation reverses rotation direction 16 014 Constant speed selection 17 DI5 Constant speed selection 18 DI6 Not used 19 1 Relay output 1 programmable 20 1 Default operation Note 1 Code 21 RO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 0 open 1 connected 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable 23 RO2A Default operation DM DIS Output 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 0 0 Reference through 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable 1 0 CONST SPEED T 1202 26 Default operation 0 7 CONST SPEED 2 1203 27 RO3B l Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 7 CONST SPEED 1204 Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Analog reference 11 Analog output AO1 Speed J1 e Start stop and direction DI1 2 3 gt Analog output AO2 Current o gt Al1 0 10 V e Constant speed selection 014 5 Relay output 1 Ready 2 AI2 0 4 20 mA Relay output 2 Running or R
370. t display parameter Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX Sets the maximum value displayed for the first display parameter Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM Selects the second parameter by number displayed on the control panel See parameter 3401 3409 SIGNAL2 MIN Defines the minimum expected value for the second display parameter See parameter 3402 3410 SIGNAL2 Defines the maximum expected value for the second display parameter See parameter 3403 3411 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM Defines the decimal point location for the second display parameter See parameter 3404 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT Selects the units used with the second display parameter See parameter 3405 3413 JOUTPUT2 MIN Sets the minimum value displayed for the second display parameter See parameter 3406 3414 OUTPUT2 Sets the maximum value displayed for the second display parameter See parameter 3407 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM Selects the third parameter by number displayed on the control panel See parameter 3401 3416 SIGNAL3 MIN Defines the minimum expected value for the third display parameter See parameter 3402 3417 SIGNAL3 Defines the maximum expected value for the third display parameter See parameter 3403 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM Defines the decimal point location for the third display parameter See parameter 3404
371. tal input DI2 DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function See DI1 above 7 INTERNAL Defines the output rpm frequency process reference and process actual value as the control for the PID sleep function Refer to parameters 4025 WAKE UP DEV and 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for the PID sleep function De activating the digital input activates the sleep function Activating the digital input restores PID control 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function See DI1 INV above Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 196 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL P4024 A Sets the motor speed frequency that enables the PID sleep ER UE Pr function a motor speed frequency below this level for at least t P 4024 the time period 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY enables the PID sleep i function stopping the drive P 4023 Requires 4022 7 INTERNAL f See the figure A PID output level B PID process feedback 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY B Sets the time delay for the PID sleep function a motor speed P 4026 frequency below 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL for at least this time period Setpoint enables the PID sleep
372. tall the fan in reverse order to the above and replace the fan capacitor Restore power Maintenance Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 288 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Replacing the fan R8 1 Remove power from the drive 2 Remove the upper front cover 3 Disconnect the fan capacitor and power supply wires Replace the starting capacitor 4 Undo the black fastening screws of the plastic side cover of the fan and lift the cover off Undo the black fastening screws of the fan 6 Lift the fan out of the cabinet En 7 Install the fan in reverse order to the above 8 Restore power Maintenance Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 289 Capacitors The drive intermediate circuit employs several electrolytic capacitors Their life span is at least 90 000 hours depending on the operating time of the drive loading and ambient temperature Capacitor life can be prolonged by lowering the ambient temperature It is not possible to predict a capacitor failure Capacitor failure is usually followed by damage to the drive and an input cable fuse failure or a fault trip Contact ABB if capacitor failure is suspected Replacements are available from
373. te the network cable through the cable clamp 5 Connect the network cable to the module s network connector 6 Tighten the cable clamp 7 Install the conduit box cover 1 screw 8 For configuration information see the following X00302 section Communication set up FBA on page 255 section Activate drive control functions FBA on page 255 The protocol specific documentation provided with the module Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 255 Communication set up FBA Serial communication selection To activate the serial communication use parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL Set 9802 4 EXT FBA Serial communication configuration Setting 9802 together with mounting a particular FBA module automatically sets the appropriate default values in parameters that define the communication process These parameters and descriptions are defined in the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Parameter 5101 is automatically configured Parameters 5102 5126 are protocol dependent and define for example the profile used and additional I O words These parameters are referred to as the fieldbus configuration parameters See the user s manual provided with the FBA module for details on the fieldbus configuration parameters Parameter 5127 forces the validation of changes to parameters 5102 5126 If para
374. ted is installed on an IT system an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohm power system the system will be connected to earth potential through the EMC filter capacitors or varistor This may cause danger or damage the drive Required tools e set of screw drivers torque wrench with 500 mm 20 in or 2 x 250 mm 2 x 10 in extension bar 19 mm 3 4 in socket for frame size R7 13 mm 1 2 in magnetic end socket for frame size R8 17 mm 11 16 in magnetic end socket Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 35 Checking the insulation of the installation Drive Do not make any voltage tolerance or insulation resistance tests e g hi pot or megger on any part of the drive as testing can damage the drive Every drive has been tested for insulation between the main circuit and the chassis at the factory Also there are voltage limiting circuits inside the drive which cut down the testing voltage automatically Input cable Check the insulation of the input cable according to local regulations before connecting it to the drive Motor and motor cable Check the insulation of the motor and motor cable as follows 1 Check that the motor cable is connected to the motor and disconnected from the drive output terminals U2 V2 and W2 2 Measure the insulation resistance between each phase condu
375. ters Status is always readable Forcing is allowed by user configuration of the drive for fieldbus control Additional relay outputs are added sequentially Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 234 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for coils Function code Description 01 Read coil status 05 Force single coil 15 OxOF Hex Force multiple coils 1xxxx Mapping Modbus discrete inputs The drive maps the following information to the 1xxxx Modbus set called Modbus Discrete Inputs bit wise map of the STATUS WORD selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE The first 32 inputs are reserved for this purpose discrete hardware inputs numbered sequentially beginning with input 33 The following table summarizes the 1xxxx reference set Modbus Internal location ABB DRV DCU PROFILE ref all profiles 5305 0 OR 2 5305 1 10001 STATUS WORD Bit 0 RDY_ON READY 10002 STATUS WORD Bit 1 RDY RUN ENABLED 10003 STATUS WORD Bit 2 RDY REF STARTED 10004 STATUS WORD Bit TRIPPED RUNNING 10005 STATUS WORD Bit 4 OFF 2 STA ZERO SPEED 10006 STATUS WORD Bit 5 OFF 3 STA ACCELERATE 10007 STATUS WORD Bit 6 SWC_ON_INHIB DECELERATE 10008 STATUS WORD Bit 7 ALARM AT SETPO
376. the automatic reset for the undervoltage function on or off 0 DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault DC UNDERVOLT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 3107 AR AI MIN Sets the automatic reset for the analog input less than minimum value function on or off 0 DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault AI MIN after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation WARNING When the analog input signal is restored the drive may restart even after a long stop Make sure that automatic long delayed starts will not cause physical injury and or damage equipment 3108 AR EXTERNAL FLT Sets the automatic reset for external faults function on or off 0 DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault EXT FAULT 1 or EXT FAULT 2 after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 174 Group 32 SUPERVISION ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual This group defines supervision for up to three signals from Group 01 OPERATING DATA Supervision monitors a specified parameter and energizes a relay output if the parameter passes
377. the torque dropping below the underload curve or exceeding the overload curve 4 P3704 P3707 P3710 P3713 P3716 Output frequency Hz Allowed operating area Underload area 3702 USER LOAD C FUNC Action wanted during load supervision 1 FAULT fault is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD MODE has been valid longer than the time set by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 2 ALARM An alarm is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than half of the time defined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 3703 USER LOAD C TIME Defines the time limit for generating a fault Half of this time is used as the limit for generating an alarm 3704 LOAD FREQ 1 Defines the frequency value of the first load curve definition point e Must be smaller than 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 3705 LOAD TORQ LOW 1 Defines the torque value of the first underload curve definition point e Must be smaller than 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 Defines the torque value of the first overload curve definition point 3707 LOAD FREQ2 Defines the frequency value of the second load curve definition point e Must be smaller than 3710 LOAD FREQ 3708 LOAD TORQ LOW 2 Defines the torque value of the second underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 Defines the torque value of the second overload curve definition point
378. ther a PTC sensor or a normally closed thermistor relay to a digital input e When the digital input is 0 the motor is overheated See the connection figure on page 180 The table below and the graph show the resistance requirements for a PTC sensor connected between 24 V and digital input as a function of the motor operating temperature Temperature Resistance Normal 3 kohm Excessive gt 28 kohm 6 THERM 1 Sensor configuration uses a thermistor Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input Connect a normally open thermistor relay to a digital input When the digital input is 1 the motor is overheated See the connection figure on page 180 3502 INPUT SELECTION Defines the input used for the temperature sensor 17 AI1 PT100 and 2 2 PT100 and 3 8 011 016 Thermistor and 3503 ALARM LIMIT Defines the alarm limit for the motor temperature measurement At motor temperatures above this limit the drive displays an alarm 2010 MOTOR TEMP For thermistors or PTC connected to digital input 0 de activated 1 activated Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 182 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Code Description 3504 FAULT LIMIT Defines the fault limit for motor temperature measurement
379. tion The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference 1601 RUN ENABLE 7 COMM Run enable by fieldbus 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 8 COMM Fault reset by fieldbus 1607 PARAM SAVE 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters to memory then value returns to O Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 257 Relay output control Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied binary coded relay command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Drive parameter Value Description as 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 35 COMM Relay Output 1 controlled by fieldbus 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 36 1 Relay Output 2 controlled by fieldbus 1403 RELAY OUTPUT Relay Output 3 controlled by fieldbus 14101 RELAY OUTPUT 4 Relay Output 4 controlled by fieldbus 1411 RELAY OUTPUT 5 Relay Output 5 controlled by fieldbus 14121 RELAY OUTPUT 6 Relay Output 6 controlled by fieldbus 1 More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module Note Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined be
380. tion on the type designation label of the drive to verify that the drive is of the correct type Drive identification Drive labels To determine the type of drive you are installing refer to either serial number label attached inside the drive or ACSSDO DT 35SBA d es sacra MUI TODO type code label attached under the front visor inpar 3 V iP21 UL 1 1 NET ABB Oy C 6 UT aI 2 aot OBO RW ACS550 02 368A 4 hmm Mem Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 32 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Type code Use the following chart to interpret the type code found on both the type code and the serial number label ACS550 02 245A 4 J404 AC Standard Drive 550 product series MM Construction region specific 02 Setup and parts specific to IEC installation and compliance U2 Setup and parts specific to US installation and NEMA compliance Output current rating e g 245A 245 A see section Ratings on page 293 for details Voltage rating 4 380 480 V AC Options Examples of options 0J400 No control panel J404 ACS CP C Basic Control Panel L511 OREL 01 Relay output extension K451 RDNA 01 DeviceNet K452 RLON 01 LonWorks K454 RPBA 01 PROFIBUS DP Ratings and frame size Th
381. tment procedure Error Error value step C Controller output with Gain 1 D Controller output with Gain 10 4003 DERIVATION TIME Error 4 Process error value Defines the PID controller s derivation time You can add the derivative of the error to the PID controller 10095 output The derivative is the error value s rate of change For example if the process error value changes linearly the derivative is a constant added to the PID controller output The error derivative is filtered with a 1 pole filter The time constant of the filter is defined by parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER 0 0 10 0 Derivation time seconds t PID output A D part of controller output Gain_ P 4001 gt t 4 P4003 gt 4004 PID DERIV FILTER Defines the filter time constant for the error derivative part of the PID controller output e Before being added to the PID controller output the error derivative is filtered with a 1 pole filter Increasing the filter time smooths the error derivative reducing noise 0 0 10 0 Filter time constant seconds 4005 ERROR VALUE INV Selects either a normal or inverted relationship between the feedback signal and the drive speed 0 NO Normal a decrease in feedback signal increases drive speed Error Ref Fbk 1 YES Inverted a decrease in feedback signal decreases drive speed Error Fbk Ref 4006 UNITS Selects the unit for the PID contr
382. tors cause voltage transients when switched off It is highly recommended to equip inductive loads with noise attenuating circuits varistors RC filters AC or diodes DC in order to minimize the EMC emission at switch off If not suppressed the disturbances may connect capacitively or inductively to other conductors in the control cable and form a risk of malfunction in other parts of the system Install the protective component as close to the inductive load as possible Do not install protective components at the control board terminal block X1 Control Digital outputs board Varistor 19 1 1 Ki ps 230 V AC 4 20 X1C 2 21 1 3 RC filter 22 230 23 X1D 2 o 24 X1D 3 Diode If 25 24 V DC o 26 X1E 2 o 27 X1E 3 Planning the electrical installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 26 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Selecting the control cables All control cables must be shielded Use a double shielded twisted pair cable Figure a e g JAMAK by Draka NK Cables for analog signals This type of cable is recommended for the pulse encoder signals also Employ one individually shielded pair for eac
383. trol Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied binary coded relay command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent 2527 Modbus protocol reference Drive parameter Value Description ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 35 comm Relay Output 1 controlled 40134 bit 0 or 00033 by fieldbus 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 35 Relay Output 2 controlled 40134 bit 1 or 00034 by fieldbus 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 35 Relay Output 3 controlled 40134 bit 2 or 00035 by fieldbus 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 35 comm Relay Output 4 controlled 40134 bit or 00036 by fieldbus 1411 RELAY OUTPUT 5 35 Relay Output 5 controlled 40134 bit 4 or 00037 by fieldbus 14121 RELAY OUTPUT 6 35 COMM Relay Output 6 controlled 40134 bit 5 or 00038 by fieldbus 1 More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module Note Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below Modbus protocol Drive parameter Description reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 0122 RO 1 3 STATUS Relay 1 3 status 40122 0123 RO 4 6 STATUS Relay 4 6 status 40123 Analog output control Using the fieldbus for analog output control e g PID setpoint requires
384. tructed on page 96 If you press the key for about two seconds release when the display changes from LoC to LoC the drive continues as before The drive copies the current remote values for the run stop status and the reference and uses them as the initial local control settings Text FWD or REV on the bottom line starts flashing slowly Text FWD or REV on the bottom line starts flashing rapidly It stops flashing when the drive reaches the setpoint stop the drive in local control press C2 start the drive in local control press lt lt gt gt How to change the direction of the motor rotation You can change the direction of the motor rotation in any mode Step Action Display 1 If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the left switch to local LOC control by pressing 9 display briefly shows message LoC before i Hz returning to the previous display OUTPUT F WD 2 To change the direction from forward FWD shown at the bottom to LOC reverse REV shown at the bottom or vice versa press 5 OUTPUT REV Note Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to 3 REQUEST Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Output mode In the Output mode you can 95 monitor actual values of up to three Group 01 OPE
385. ts to the drive s control terminals using any of these alternatives Separate the thermistor from live parts of the motor with double reinforced insulation Protect all circuits connected to the drive s digital and analog inputs Protect against contact and insulate from other low voltage circuits with basic insulation rated for the same voltage level as the drive s main circuit Use an external thermistor relay The relay insulation must be rated for the same voltage level as the drive s main circuit The figure below shows thermistor relay and PTC sensor connections using a digital input At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor If this is not possible leave the shield unconnected Thermistor relay PTC sensor 3501 SENSOR TYPE 7 5 THERM 0 or 6 THERM 1 3501 SENSOR TYPE 5 THERM 0 Thermistor relay Control board N f Control board DI 24 V DC DI fe 14 24 V DC MD T y A Motor dy nF e Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 181 For other faults or for anticipating motor overheating using a model see Group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS Code Description 3501 SENSOR TYPE Identifies the type of the motor temperature
386. ts the faults by code number and describes each The fault name is the long form shown in the Fault mode of the Assistant Control Panel when the fault occurs The fault names shown for Assistant Control Panel only in the Fault Logger mode see page 85 and the fault names for parameter 0401 LAST FAULT may be shorter Fault Fault name in i ae Description and recommended corrective action 1 OVERCURRENT Output current is excessive Check for and correct Excessive motor load Insufficient acceleration time parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 Faulty motor motor cables or connections Diagnostics Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 275 Fault code Fault name in panel Description and recommended corrective action DC OVERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is excessive Check for and correct Static or transient overvoltages in the input power supply Insufficient deceleration time parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and 2206 DECELER TIME 2 Undersized brake chopper if present Verify that overvoltage controller is ON using parameter 2005 DEV OVERTEMP Drive heatsink is overheated Temperature is at or above limit R7 and R8 115 239 F Check for and correct Fan failure Obstructions in the air flow Dirt or dust coating
387. ult display presented on the right is shown LOC UPAR EDIT 9910 10 RUN 1 CANCEL 1 00 00 SAVE LOC v 0 0 Hz 0 0 0 DIR 00 00 MENU LOC ALARM ALARM 2019 ID run 00 00 LOC UFAULT FAULT 11 ID RUN FAIL 00 00 ID RUN WITH THE BASIC CONTROL PANEL Change parameter 9910 ID RUN to 1 ON Save the new setting by pressing x If you want to monitor actual values during the ID Run go to the Output mode by pressing 77 repeatedly until you get there Press lt gt to start the ID Run The panel keeps switching between the display that was shown when you started the ID Run and the alarm display presented on the right In general it is recommended not to press any control panel keys during the ID Run However you can stop the ID Run at any time by pressing CQ After the ID Run is completed the alarm display is not shown any more If the ID Run fails the fault display presented on the right is shown 9910 LOC PAR iim F WD i 0 0 OUTPUT FWD 2019 F WD F0011 F WD Start up control with I O and ID Run Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 71 Control panels About control panels Use a control panel to control the drive read status data and adjust parameters The drive w
388. ult is set in the Fault Words 1 OVERVOLT THERM FAIL EFB 2 Each fault has a dedicated bit 2 DEVOVERTEMP LINK EFB 3 allocated within Fault Words See section Fault listing on page 274 3 SHORT CIRC OPEX PWR INCOMPATIBLE SW for a description of the faults 4 Reserved CURR MEAS USER LOAD CURVE The control panel displays the word in 5 GNDERVOLT SUPPLY PHASE Reserved hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit 0 displays as 0001 All zeros and a 6 J LOSS ENCODER ERR Reserved 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 7 Al2LOSS OVERSPEED Reserved 0306 FAULT WORD 2 8 MOTOVERTEMP Reserved Reserved Read only copy of the Fault Word 2 9 IPANEL 1055 DRIVE ID Reserved See parameter 0305 0307 FAULT WORD 3 10 ID RUN FAIL CONFIG FILE System error Read only copy of the Fault Word 3 11 MOTOR STALL SERIAL 1 ERR System error See parameter 0305 12 CON FILE System error 13 EXT FAULT 1 FORCE TRIP System error 14 EXT FAULT 2 MOTOR PHASE System error 15 EARTH FAULT OUTP WIRING Param setting fault 0308 WORD 1 When an 2 21 e Bit 0308 ALARM WORD 1 0309 ALARM WORD 2 corresponding bit for the active alarm is set in the Alarm Words 0 OVERCURRENT Reserved Each alarm has a dedicated bit 1 OVERVOLTAGE PID SLEEP allocated within Alarm Words 2 l UNDERVOLTAGE ID RUN Bits remain set until the whole alarm word is reset Reset by writing zero to DIR LOCK Reserved the word 4 JIO
389. ure with steady load i e For thermal protection according to UL requirements for NEMA Temp rise class motors use the rule of thumb MOTOR THERM TIME equals 100 35 times 16 where 16 in seconds is specified by the motor 63 manufacturer as the time that the motor can safely operate at six times its rated current The thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s for a Class P 3006 20 trip curve 700 s and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 171 Defines the drive response if the drive detects a ground fault in the motor or motor cables The drive monitors for ground faults while the drive is running and while the drive is not running Also see parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT 0 DISABLE No drive response to ground faults 1 ENABLE Ground faults display fault 16 EARTH FAULT and if running the drive coasts to stop Code Description 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE Output current 96 relative Sets the maximum allowable operating load of the motor 4 to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR When set to 10096 the maximum allowable load is equal to the value of parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 150 Adjust the load curve level if the ambient temperature differs from nominal P3007 100 3008
390. ut signals Output signals Jumper setting Start stop and direction DI1 2 Analog output AO1 Speed J1 Reference up down DI3 4 Analog output AO2 Current 11 0 10 V Constant speed selection DI5 gt Relay output 1 Ready 9 y AI2 0 4 20 mA Runenable DI6 Relay output 2 Running or Relay output 3 Fault 1 J1 xS ol Al1 0 10 V Y0 7 AI2 0 4 20 mA Application macros Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 106 Hand Auto macro ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual This macro provides an I O configuration that is typically used in HVAC applications To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 5 HAND AUTO Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting O OFF Connection example 1 10 kohmJ1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 1 2 External reference 1 0 10 V Hand Control 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC q 5 Al2 External reference 2 0 20 mA Auto Control 6 AGND Analog input circuit common D 7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA D 1 8 2 Output current 0 20 mA 719 AGND Analog output circuit common 10 24V Auxiliary vo
391. ut voltage interruption if the external run command is on WARNING The heat sink will reach a high temperature See chapter Technical data on page 293 Safety Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual WARNING The drive is heavy Lift the drive by the lifting lugs only Do not tilt the drive The drive will overturn from a tilt of about 6 degrees Use extreme caution when manoeuvring a drive that runs on wheels An overturning drive can cause physical injury Do not tilt Note For more technical information contact the factory or your local ABB representative Safety Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 9 Table of contents ACS550 02 U2 Drive Manuals 2 Safety Use of warnings and notes 5 Table of contents Installation and commissioning flowchart Planning the electrical installation Checking the compatibility of the motor 15 Supply connection x Rege we Aiea dori S panda 18 Thermal overload and short circuit protection 19 Ground fault protection
392. y of master controllers and slave devices Modbus is a serial asynchronous protocol Transactions are half duplex featuring a single Master controlling one or more Slaves While RS232 can be used for point to point communication between a single Master and a single Slave a more common implementation features a multi drop RS485 network with a single Master controlling multiple Slaves The ACS550 features RS485 for its Modbus physical interface RTU The Modbus specification defines two distinct transmission modes ASCII and The ACS550 supports RTU only Feature summary The following Modbus function codes are supported by the ACS550 Holding Registers Function Code Hex Description Read Coil Status 0x01 Read discrete output status For the ACS550 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Read Discrete Input 0x02 Read discrete inputs status For the ACS550 the individual bits Status of the status word are mapped to Inputs 1 16 or 1 32 depending on the active profile Terminal inputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Input 33 e g DI12Input 33 Read Multiple 0x03 Read multiple holding registers For the ACS550 the entire Holding Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Read Multiple Input 0x04 Read
393. ying modern IGBT inverter technology The voltage of the pulses can be almost double at the motor terminals depending on the motor cable properties This in turn can cause additional stress on the motor insulation Planning the electrical installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 16 ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual Modern variable speed drives with their fast rising voltage pulses and high switching frequencies can cause current pulses through the motor bearings which can gradually erode the bearing races To avoid damage to motor bearings insulated N end non drive end bearings are recommended according to the following table In addition the cables must be selected and installed according to the instructions given in this manual ACS550 02 U2 devices are equipped with a common mode filter CMF which is adequate to prevent bearing currents at voltages less than 500 V The common mode filter is composed of toroidal cores installed onto the output busbars inside the drive at the factory Requirements table The following table shows how to select the motor insulation system and when external du dt limitation and insulated N end non drive end motor bearings are required The motor manufacturer should be consulted regarding the construction of the motor insulation and additional requirements for explosion safe Ex motors Failure of the motor to fulfill the following require
394. z 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 0 rpm 0 0 Hz 2506 CRIT SPEED 3 LO 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 0 rpm 0 0 Hz 2507 CRIT SPEED 3 HI 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 0 rpm 0 0 Hz Group 26 MOTOR CONTROL 2601 FLUX OPT ENABLE OFF 1 ON 1 OFF 2602 FLUX BRAKING OFF 1 1 OFF 2603 IR COMP VOLT 0 0 100 0 V 0 1V Size dependent 2604 R COMP FREQ 0 10096 196 8096 2605 U F RATIO 1 LINEAR 2 SQUARED 1 1 LINEAR 2606 SWITCHING FREQ 1 4 kHz 4 kHz 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL 0 OFF 1 ON 1 1 ON 2608 ISLIP COMP RATIO 0 20096 196 0 26009 NOISE SMOOTHING DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 DISABLE 2619 STABILIZER DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 DISABLE Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 0 disables 0 1 kh 0 0 kh 2902 COOLING FAN ACT 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 1 kh 0 0 kh 2903 REVOLUTION TRIG 0 65535 Mrev 0 disables 1 Mrev Mrev 2904 REVOLUTION ACT 0 65535 Mrev 1 Mrev 0 Mrev 2905 IRUN TIME TRIG 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 0 disables 0 1 kh 0 0 kh 2906 RUN TIME 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 1 kh 0 0 kh Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 121 Code Range Resolution Default User S 2907 USER MWh TRIG
395. z 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 02 2400 rpm 40 0 Hz U2 2880 rpm 48 0 Hz 1208 CONST SPEED 7 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 02 3000 rpm 50 0 Hz U2 3600 rpm 60 0 Hz 1209 TIMED MODE SEL 1 Ext cs1 2 3 2 51 2 3 4 1 2 51 2 3 4 Y Group 13 ANALOG INPUTS 1301 MINIMUM AI1 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 1302 MAXIMUM 1 0 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 1303 FILTER AI1 0 0 10 0s 0 15 0 15 1304 MINIMUM AI2 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 0 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 1306 2 0 0 10 0s 0 15 0 15 Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 0 47 52 1 1 READY 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 0 47 52 1 2 RUN 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 0 47 52 1 3 FAULT 1 1404 1 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 0 05 1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 0 05 1406 RO 2 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 0 05 1407 RO2 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 0 05 1408 RO 3 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 0 05 1409 RO 3 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 0 05 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 0 46 52 1 0 NOT SEL 1411 RELAY OUTPUT 5 0 46 52 1 NOT SEL 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6 0 46 52 1 0 NOT SEL 1413 RO 4 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 0 05 1414 4 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 0 05 1415 5 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 0 05 1416 5 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 0 05 1417 RO 6 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 0 05 1418 RO 6 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 0 05 Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS 1501 1 CONTENT SEL 99

ABB ACS550-02 & ACS550-U2 Drives User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

ABB ACS550-02 &amp; ACS550-U2 Drives User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

ABB ACS550-02 & ACS550-U2 Drives User`s Manual